LIB 510 MV Process Configuration

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

Issued:

15.03.2002

Version:

A

Program revision: 4.04

We reserve the right to change data without prior notice.

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

LIB 510

Notice 1

The information in this document is subject to change without notice and should not
be construed as a commitment by ABB. ABB assumes no responsibility for any error
that may occur in this document.

Notice 2

This document complies with the program revision 4.0.4.

Notice 3

Additional information such as Release Notes and Last Minute Remarks can be
found on the program distribution media.

Trademarks

Microsoft is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.

Windows NT is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation.

L

ON

W

ORKS

is registered trademark of Echelon Corporation.

Other brand or product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders.

All Microsoft products referenced in this document are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation.

background image
background image

MicroSCADA Technology Manuals

SYS 500 manuals

COM 500 manuals

Application Objects

1MRS751848-MEN

Introduction to MicroSCADA Technology

1MRS751852-MUM

JAVA-API for MicroSCADA

1MRS751851-MEN

Programming Language SCIL

1MRS751849-MEN

SCIL-API for MicroSCADA

1MRS752199-MEN

Status Codes

1MRS751850-MEN

System Configuration

1MRS751846-MEN

System Objects

1MRS751847-MEN

Configuring MicroSCADA for OPC DA Client

1MRS752246-MEN

Installation

1MRS751853-MEN

Picture Editing

1MRS751854-MEN

System Management

1MRS751857-MEN

Visual SCIL Objects

1MRS751856-MEN

Visual SCIL User Interface Design

1MRS751855-MEN

COM 500 Engineering

1MRS751858-MEN

Connecting LONWORKS Devices to MicroSCADA

1MRS751845-MEN

Communication Programming Interface (CPI)

1MRS751859-MEN

Configuring MicroSCADA for DNP V3.00 Master Protocol

1MRS751860-MEN

Configuring MicroSCADA for DNP V3.00 Slave Protocol

1MRS751861-MEN

Configuring MicroSCADA for IEC 60870-5-101 Master Protocol

1MRS751862-MEN

Configuring MicroSCADA for IEC 60870-5-101 Slave Protocol

1MRS751863-MEN

Configuring MicroSCADA for IEC 60870-5-103 Master Protocol

1MRS752012-MEN

Configuring MicroSCADA for IEC 60870-5-104 Master Protocol

1MRS751964-MEN

Configuring MicroSCADA for IEC 60870-5-104 Slave Protocol

1MRS751965-MEN

Configuring MicroSCADA for Modbus Master Protocol

1MRS752242-MEN

Configuring MicroSCADA for Modbus Slave Protocol

1MRS751864-MEN

LIB 510

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

1MRS751887-MEN

background image

LIB 500 manuals

LIB 510 manuals

SMS 510 manuals

CAP 505 manuals

Common manual for LIB, CAP and SMS

LIB 500 Configuration Manual

1MRS751880-MEN

LIB 500 Operator’s Manual

1MRS751885-MUM

LIB 510 Configuration

1MRS751886-MEN

LIB 510 MV Process Configuration

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510 MV Process Operator’s Manual

1MRS751891-MUM

LIB 510 Operator’s Manual

1MRS751888-MUM

SMS 510 Installation and Commissioning

1MRS751897-MEN

SMS 510 Operator’s Manual

1MRS751898-MUM

CAP 505 Installation and Commissioning

1MRS751901-MEN

CAP 505 Operator’s Manual

1MRS751902-MUM

Relay Configuration Tool Tutorial

1MRS751903-MEN

Relay Mimic Editor Configuration

1MRS751904-MEN

Relay Configuration Tool Quick Start Reference

1MRS751905-MEN

SPTO Configuration Tool

1MRS751906-MEN

Protocol Editing Tool

1MRS751982-MUM

Tools for Relays and Terminals

1MRS752008-MUM

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

Configuration Guide

background image

1
2

3
4

5
6

7
8

9

10

11
12

1

MV process general

2

Station

3

Bay

4

Switching device

5

Measurements

6

Transformer

7

Protection tripping tag

8

Auto-reclosing (AR) tag

9

Alarm indicator

10 REC 501

11 DTU

12 Combined switch device state

LIB 510

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

1MRS751887-MEN

background image
background image

LIB 510

Contents

Configuration Guide

Contents:

1. MV process general ..................................................................1

1.1. Installing and configuring MV Process functions ...........................1

1.1.1. Installing .............................................................................1
1.1.2. Configuring .........................................................................1

1.2. Graphical representations and functionality ..................................2

1.2.1. Attribute expressions for color definitions ..........................3

1.3. The default RI-attribute values for printouts within MV Process ...3

1.3.1. Format picture for double binary (OV related) ...................3
1.3.2. Format picture for single binary indication (OV related) .....4
1.3.3. Format picture for analog indication (OV related) ..............6
1.3.4. Format picture for analog indication (AZ related) ...............6
1.3.5. Format picture for analog indication (integer OV) ..............6
1.3.6. Format picture for analog indication (real OV) ...................6
1.3.7. Format picture for binary output (OV & SE related) ...........7
1.3.8. Format picture for digital output (OV related) .....................8
1.3.9. Format picture for analog output (OV related) ...................9

2. Station ......................................................................................11

2.1. Communication support ..............................................................11
2.2. Picture function installation .........................................................11

2.2.1. Environmental requirements ............................................11
2.2.2. Installation ........................................................................11

2.3. Picture function configuration ......................................................12

2.3.1. Preliminary work ..............................................................12
2.3.2. Configuration with standard configuration tool .................12
2.3.3. Configuration with representation tool .............................18
2.3.4. Configuration with process object tool .............................18
2.3.5. An example of the station configuration ...........................19

2.4. Application engineering information ............................................19

2.4.1. The structure of the station picture function .....................19
2.4.2. Pictures ............................................................................20
2.4.3. Language text files ...........................................................20
2.4.4. Help text files ...................................................................21
2.4.5. Configuration files ............................................................21
2.4.6. Other text files ..................................................................21
2.4.7. Process objects ................................................................21
2.4.8. Scale objects ....................................................................22
2.4.9. Command procedures .....................................................23
2.4.10.Event channels ................................................................23

3. Bay ............................................................................................25

3.1. Communication support ..............................................................25

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510 MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

Contents

Configuration Guide

3.2. Picture function installation ......................................................... 25

3.2.1. Environmental requirements ............................................ 25
3.2.2. Installation ....................................................................... 25

3.3. Picture function configuration ..................................................... 26

3.3.1. Preliminary work .............................................................. 26
3.3.2. Configuration with standard configuration tool ................. 26
3.3.3. Configuration with representation tool ............................. 34
3.3.4. Configuration with process object Tool ............................ 34
3.3.5. An example of the bay configuration ............................... 35

3.4. Application engineering information ............................................ 36

3.4.1. The structure of the bay picture function ......................... 36
3.4.2. Pictures ............................................................................ 36
3.4.3. Language text files .......................................................... 37
3.4.4. Help text files ................................................................... 37
3.4.5. Configuration files ............................................................ 38
3.4.6. Other text files ................................................................. 38
3.4.7. Process objects ............................................................... 38
3.4.8. Scale Objects .................................................................. 40
3.4.9. Command procedures ..................................................... 40
3.4.10.Event channels ................................................................ 41

4. Switching device .................................................................... 43

4.1. Communication support .............................................................. 43
4.2. Picture function installation ......................................................... 43

4.2.1. Environmental requirements ............................................ 43
4.2.2. Installation ....................................................................... 44

4.3. Picture function configuration ..................................................... 44

4.3.1. Preliminary work .............................................................. 44
4.3.2. Configuration with the standard configuration tool ........... 45
4.3.3. Configuration with representation tool ............................. 58
4.3.4. Configuration with the Process Object Tool ..................... 78
4.3.5. An Example of the switching device configuration ........... 82

4.4. Application engineering information ............................................ 83

4.4.1. The structure of the switching device .............................. 83
4.4.2. Pictures ............................................................................ 83
4.4.3. Language text files .......................................................... 84
4.4.4. Help text files ................................................................... 85
4.4.5. Configuration files ............................................................ 85
4.4.6. Other text files ................................................................. 86
4.4.7. Process objects ............................................................... 86
4.4.8. Scale objects ................................................................... 93
4.4.9. Command procedures ..................................................... 93
4.4.10.Event channels ................................................................ 94

5. Measurements ........................................................................ 95

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

Contents

LIB 510 MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

5.1. Communication support ..............................................................95
5.2. Picture function installation .........................................................95

5.2.1. Environmental requirements ............................................95
5.2.2. Installation ........................................................................95

5.3. Picture function configuration ......................................................96

5.3.1. Preliminary work ..............................................................96
5.3.2. Configuration with the Standard Configuration Tool ........96
5.3.3. Configuration with the Representation Tool ...................104
5.3.4. Configuration with Process Object Tool .........................110
5.3.5. An example of the measurement configuration .............111

5.4. Application engineering information ..........................................113

5.4.1. Limit supervision ............................................................113
5.4.2. The structure of the measurement .................................113
5.4.3. Pictures ..........................................................................113
5.4.4. Language text files .........................................................115
5.4.5. Help text files .................................................................115
5.4.6. Configuration files ..........................................................115
5.4.7. Other text files ................................................................116
5.4.8. Process objects ..............................................................116
5.4.9. Scale objects ..................................................................118
5.4.10.Command procedures ...................................................118

6. Transformer ...........................................................................119

6.1. Communication support ............................................................119
6.2. Picture function installation and configuration ...........................119

6.2.1. Environmental requirements ..........................................119
6.2.2. Installation ......................................................................119

6.3. Picture function configuration ....................................................120

6.3.1. Preliminary work ............................................................120
6.3.2. Configuration with the Standard Configuration Tool ......120
6.3.3. Configuration of the transformer measurement .............127
6.3.4. Configuration with the Representation Tool ...................128
6.3.5. Configuration with the Process Object Tool ...................128
6.3.6. An example of the transformer configuration .................130

6.4. Application engineering information ..........................................131

6.4.1. Pictures ..........................................................................131
6.4.2. Language text files .........................................................132
6.4.3. Help text files .................................................................132
6.4.4. Configuration files ..........................................................133
6.4.5. Other text files ................................................................133
6.4.6. Process objects ..............................................................133
6.4.7. Scale objects ..................................................................135
6.4.8. Command procedures ...................................................135
6.4.9. Event channels ..............................................................135

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510 MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

Contents

Configuration Guide

7. Protection tripping tag ......................................................... 137

7.1. Communication support ............................................................ 137
7.2. Environmental requirements ..................................................... 137
7.3. Configuration of the tripping tag ................................................ 137

7.3.1. Configurable attributes with the Standard Configuration

Tool ................................................................................ 137

7.3.2. Configurable attributes with the Representation Tool .... 146
7.3.3. Configurable attributes with the Process Object Tool .... 150

7.4. Application engineering information .......................................... 151

7.4.1. Pictures .......................................................................... 151
7.4.2. Language text files ........................................................ 151
7.4.3. Help text files ................................................................. 151
7.4.4. Configuration files .......................................................... 152
7.4.5. Other text files ............................................................... 152
7.4.6. Process objects ............................................................. 152
7.4.7. Scale objects ................................................................. 152

8. Auto-reclosing (AR) tag ....................................................... 153

8.1. Communication support ............................................................ 153
8.2. Environmental requirements ..................................................... 153
8.3. Configuration of the auto-reclosing tag ..................................... 153

8.3.1. Configurable attributes with the Standard Configuration

Tool ................................................................................ 153

8.3.2. Configurable attributes with the Representation Tool .... 161
8.3.3. Configurable attributes with the Process Object Tool .... 163

8.4. Application engineering information .......................................... 164

8.4.1. The structure of the auto-reclosing tag .......................... 164
8.4.2. Pictures .......................................................................... 164
8.4.3. Language text files ........................................................ 165
8.4.4. Help text files ................................................................. 165
8.4.5. Configuration files .......................................................... 165
8.4.6. Other text files ............................................................... 166
8.4.7. Process objects ............................................................. 166
8.4.8. Scale objects ................................................................. 167

9. Alarm indicator ..................................................................... 169

9.1. Communication support ............................................................ 169
9.2. Picture function installation ....................................................... 169

9.2.1. Environmental requirements .......................................... 169
9.2.2. Installation ..................................................................... 169

9.3. Picture function configuration ................................................... 170

9.3.1. Preliminary work ............................................................ 170
9.3.2. Configuration with the Standard Configuration Tool ...... 170
9.3.3. Configuration with the Representation Tool ................... 174
9.3.4. Configuration with the Process Object Tool ................... 176

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

Contents

LIB 510 MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

9.3.5. An example of the alarm indicator configuration ............177

9.4. Application engineering information ..........................................177

9.4.1. The structure of the alarm indicator ...............................177
9.4.2. Pictures ..........................................................................177
9.4.3. Language text files .........................................................178
9.4.4. Help text files .................................................................178
9.4.5. Configuration files ..........................................................178

10.REC 501 .................................................................................179

10.1.Communication support ............................................................179
10.2.Picture function installation .......................................................179

10.2.1.Environmental requirements ..........................................179
10.2.2.Installation ......................................................................179

10.3.Picture function configuration ...................................................180

10.3.1.Preliminary work ............................................................180
10.3.2.Configuration with the Standard Configuration Tool ......180
10.3.3.Configuration with the Representation Tool ...................186
10.3.4.Configuration with the Process Object Tool ...................187

10.4.Application engineering information .........................................189

10.4.1.The structure of REC 501 ..............................................189
10.4.2.Pictures ..........................................................................189
10.4.3.Language text files .........................................................190
10.4.4.Help text files .................................................................190
10.4.5.Configuration files ..........................................................191
10.4.6.Other text files ................................................................191
10.4.7.Process objects ..............................................................192
10.4.8.Scale objects ..................................................................194
10.4.9.Command procedures ...................................................194
10.4.10.Event channels .............................................................194
10.4.11.Time channels ..............................................................194

11.DTU ........................................................................................195

11.1.Communication support ............................................................195
11.2.Picture function installation .......................................................195

11.2.1.Environmental requirements ..........................................195
11.2.2.Installation ......................................................................195

11.3.Picture function configuration ...................................................196

11.3.1.Preliminary work ............................................................196
11.3.2.Configuration with the Standard Configuration Tool ......196
11.3.3.Configuration with the Representation Tool ...................200
11.3.4.Configuration with the Process Object Tool ...................201
11.3.5.An Example of the DTU configuration ............................203

11.4.Application engineering information .........................................203

11.4.1.The structure of the DTU ...............................................203
11.4.2.Pictures ..........................................................................204

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510 MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

Contents

Configuration Guide

11.4.3.Language text files ........................................................ 205
11.4.4.Help text files ................................................................. 205
11.4.5.Configuration files .......................................................... 205
11.4.6.Other text files ............................................................... 206
11.4.7.Process objects ............................................................. 206
11.4.8.Scale objects ................................................................. 208
11.4.9.Command procedures ................................................... 209
11.4.10.Event channels ............................................................ 209
11.4.11.Time channels ............................................................. 209

12.Combined switch device state ........................................... 211

12.1.Purpose .................................................................................... 211
12.2.Communication Support ........................................................... 211
12.3.Picture Function Installation ..................................................... 211

12.3.1.Environmental Requirements ........................................ 211
12.3.2.Installation ..................................................................... 211

12.4.Picture Function Configuration ................................................. 212

12.4.1.Preliminary Work ........................................................... 212
12.4.2.Configuration with Standard Configuration Tool ............ 212
12.4.3.Configuration with Representation Tool ......................... 214
12.4.4.Configuration with Bay Configuration Tool .................... 215
12.4.5.An example of the combined switch device state

configuration .................................................................. 217

12.4.6.The structure of the combined switch device state

function .......................................................................... 217

12.4.7.Pictures .......................................................................... 217
12.4.8.Help text files ................................................................. 217
12.4.9.Configuration files .......................................................... 218
12.4.10.Other text files .............................................................. 218

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

1

1. MV process general

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

1

1.

MV process general

This chapter describes the most common processes seen from the library
implementations in LIB 500 and LIB 510 revision 4.0.4.

1.1.

Installing and configuring MV Process functions

The installation of standard functions is divided into two main parts:

1. Installation

2. Configuration

The tools, i.e. Installation Tool, Standard Configuration Tool, Process Object Tool
and the Representation Tool are shortly described in the LIB 500 Configuration
Manual, Introduction.

1.1.1.

Installing

The installation of application specific picture functions is described in LIB 500
Configuration Manual, Component Library.

The name of the picture function (ID) should be unique within the same picture. It
is wise to use such an identification that is universal, i.e. the identification does not
refer to any particular substation. This makes sense when copying the single line
drawing (*.PIC) and saving it with another name, and then reusing it again in
another project.

Allowed characters are the letters A-Z, all digits and the underscore (_). However,
the name of the picture function cannot begin with a digit or an underscore.

The drawing layer of the transformer can be edited by the Picture Editor; it is
possible to define the picture function layer above or below the static background
drawing.

1.1.2.

Configuring

The object identification in the database

The LIB5xx 4.0.4 supports partitioning of the OI-attribute into five (5) identification
fields. If less than five fields will be used, the unused fields have to be the last ones
i.e. the fifth field, the fourth field, etc. By default, only three fields will be used:

Table 1.1.2-1

OI-attribute identification fields

The sum of the field lengths should be equal or less than 30 characters.

Field

Default length

Range

Station name

10 characters (9 characters +
1 space)

2 .. 28

Bay name

15 characters (14 characters
+ 1 space)

2 .. 28

Device/apparatus name

5 characters

0, 2 .. 26 (0 = not in use)

Not specified

0

0, 2 .. 24 (0 = not in use)

Not specified

0

0 .. 22 (0 = not in use)

1MRS751887-MEN

background image

2

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

1.

MV process general

Configuration Guide

The hierarchical structure always has to be maintained while reconfiguring the OI-
attribute. The first field defines the biggest group, the second field is a subgroup of
the biggest group and so on. MV Process will require substation and bay field in
order to work properly.

If the utilisation of the OI-attribute needs to be modified due to different customer
requirements, the OI-attribute has to be changed before starting the creation of the
application database, i.e. there should not be any process objects in the process
object database. The configuration can be done in the SYS_BASCON.COM file.

The object identification in the application

Due to the obligatory substation and bay identification field in the database, there is
a setting tool which defines how the OI-attribute will be shown in printouts, event
lists, alarm lists, dialogs, etc.

The configuration of the OI-attribute visibility is global, i.e. all functions done by
the LIB 5xx 4.0.4 follow the same definition. The fields starting from the beginning
and/or the end of OI-attribute can be defined as not visible. A field between visible
fields cannot be set as invisible. The reason for this lies in the performance
requirements.

In Application Settings view, the setting tool Show Object Identification for setting
the OI-attribute visibility in the application can be found in the Tools menu.

The naming convention of the database

The naming convention of the process objects should be scrutinised carefully so that
there will not be any conflicts in the database during installation. Three characters
of substation name, four characters of bay and two characters of device or apparatus
have been found to be a well-proven naming convention. With a proper naming
convention it is easy to navigate in the process object database, and it makes it easier
to copy process objects (related to a certain substation) between different
applications.

Application and Monitor Language

If some other language than English is used in the signal texts (OX-attribute), it is
necessary to define this local language at least for the user who is doing the
application engineering. It is also very important that the translation of all signal
texts has already been performed by the Text Translation Tool or by other means.

1.2.

Graphical representations and functionality

In this chapter, the general functionality of the standard functions is described. After
general principles and common functions, all the different standard functions are
described in detail, one by one.

Some principles are general and used for all standard functions (colors etc.). A
description of these general principles is provided below.

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

3

1. MV process general

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

1

1.2.1.

Attribute expressions for color definitions

Table 1.2.1-1

Attribut expressions for color definitions

1.3.

The default RI-attribute values for printouts within MV Process

1.3.1.

Format picture for double binary (OV related)

/LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/USE/FORM4FPDB1

Table 1.3.1-1

Format picture for double binary (OV related)

Description

Attribute used

Color

Comment

Selected object under
command

BI = 1

White flashing

-

Selected on the
MicroSCADA screen

AI > 0

White

-

Value substituted

SU = 1

Dark blue

Internal substitution

Update blocked

UB = 1

Magenta

Only for input objects

Not sampled

OS = 10

Magenta

No value is presented

Not updated

OS = 2 (NT=1) or
OS = 4..9

Magenta

Last known value is
presented

Value substituted

SB = 1

Dark blue

External substitution

Update blocked

BL = 1

Magenta

External block

Invalid value

OS = 1 (IV=1)

Magenta

Last known value is
presented

Unacknowledged alarm

AR = 0

Red flashing

-

Acknowledged alarm

AL = 1 and AR = 1

Red

-

Control blocked

UB = 1

Brown

Only for output objects

Alarms blocked

AB = 1

Yellow

-

Events blocked

HB = 1

Yellow

-

Printout blocked

PB = 1

Yellow

-

Reprocessing blocked

XB = 1

Yellow

-

Warning

AZ = 3-4

Yellow

Only for measurements

Manually entered

Not(SS >= 2 and
UN <> 0)

Cyan

-

Device

IX

Purpose

RI

Default

0

Station

10
(110)

Station local/remote-switch

1

Bay

10
(110)

Bay local/remote-switch

2

Switching device

10
(110)

Circuit breaker position indication

3

Switching device

10
(110)

Disconnector position indication

4

background image

4

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

1.

MV process general

Configuration Guide

1.3.2.

Format picture for single binary indication (OV related)

/LIB4/F

#

MOD/MVPROCESS/USE/FORM4FPBI1

Table 1.3.2-1

Format picture for single binary indication (OV related)

Switching device

10
(110)

Earth switch position indication

5

Switching device

30
(130)

Truck position indication

6

Switching device

10
(110)

3-state switch position indication (disc.
section)

7

Switching device

11
(111)

3-state switch position indication (earth sw.
section)

8

Transformer*

11
111**

AVR auto/manual

9

Transformer*

11
111**

AVR auto/manual

10

REC 501

10

Position indication

11

DTU 10

Position

indication

12

Alarm indicator

10..17

Indication

13

Device

IX

Purpose

RI

Device

IX

Purpose

RI

Default

0

Bay

10
(110)

Bay local/remote-switch

1

Bay

15,16,18
(115,116)

Bay interlocking

2

Switching device

15,16,17
(115,116,117)

Circuit breaker blocking and interl. 3

Switching device

20

Circuit breaker command event

4

Switching device

(210)

Circuit breaker position indication

5

Switching device

(210)

Circuit breaker open position
indication

6

Switching device

(208)

Circuit breaker close position
indication

7

Switching device

15,16,17
(115,116,117)

Disconnector blocking and interl.

8

Switching device

20

Disconnector command event

9

Switching device

(210)

Disconnector position indication

10

Switching device

(210)

Disconnector open position
indication

11

Switching device

(208)

Disconnector close position
indication

12

Switching device

15,16,17
(115,116,117)

Earth switch blocking and interl.

13

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

5

1. MV process general

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

1

Switching device

20

Earth switch command event

14

Switching device

(210)

Earth switch position indication

15

Switching device

(210)

Earth switch open position
indication

16

Switching device

(208)

Earth switch close position
indication

17

Switching device

35,36,37
(135,136,137)

Truck blocking and interlocking

18

Switching device

40

Truck command event

19

Switching device

(230)

Truck position indication

20

Switching device

(230)

Truck open position indication

21

Switching device

(228)

Truck close position indication

22

Switching device

18,19,20,21,22
(118,119,120,
121,122)

3-state switch blocking and
interlocking

23

Switching device

26

3-state switch command event

24

Switching device

(210)

3-state switch position indication
(disc. section)

25

Switching device

(211)

3-state switch position indication
(earth sw. section)

26

Switching device

(210)

3-state switch open position
indication (disc. section)

27

Switching device

(208)

3-state switch close position
indication (disc. section)

28

Switching device

(211)

3-state switch open position
indication (earth sw. section)

29

Switching device

(209)

3-state switch close position
indication (earth sw. section)

30

Switching device

21
(121)

Auxialiry plug

31

Auto-reclosing tag

10,11
(110,111)

Auto-reclosure in use/out of use

32

Auto-reclosing tag

12
(112)

Auto-reclosing progress indication 33

Trip tag

10
(110)

General protection trip indication

34

Trip tag

11
(111)

General trip relay latched ind.

35

Transformer

11
(111)

AVR auto/manual

36

Transformer*

11
(111)

AVR auto/manual
(reverse polarity)

37

DTU

13

Local/remote

38

Alarm Indicator

10..17

Alarm ON/OFF

39

Alarm Indicator

10..17

Alarm ON/OFF

40

Device

IX

Purpose

RI

background image

6

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

1.

MV process general

Configuration Guide

1.3.3.

Format picture for analog indication (OV related)

/LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/USE/FORM4FPAI1

Table 1.3.3-1

Format picture for analog indication (OV related)

1.3.4.

Format picture for analog indication (AZ related)

/LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/USE/FORM4FPAI2

Table 1.3.4-1

Format picture for analog indication (AZ related)

1.3.5.

Format picture for analog indication (integer OV)

/LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/USE/FORM4FPAI3

Table 1.3.5-1

Format picture for analog indication (integer OV)

1.3.6.

Format picture for analog indication (real OV)

/LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/USE/FORM4FPAI4

Device

IX

Purpose

RI

Default

0

Station

15

Station blocking

1

Bay

20

Bay blocking

2

Switching device

(210)

Circuit breaker position indication

3

Switching device

(210)

Disconnector position indication

4

Switching device

(210)

Earth switch position indication

5

Switching device

(230)

Truck position indication

6

Switching device

(210)

3-state switch position indication
(disc. section)

7

Switching device

(211)

3-state switch position indication
(earth sw. section)

8

Auto-reclosing tag

12

Auto-reclosing progress indication

9

All

N/A

Command termination with IEC
870-5-101 and IEC 870-5-103

10

Transformer

12

AVR single/parallel

11

DTU

100

DTU blockings

12

Device

IX

Purpose

RI

Default

0

Measurement

10 ...

Alarm and warning printout

1

Transformer

24,29

Alarm and warning printout

2

Alarm Indicator

10..17

Alarm and warning printout

3

Device

IX

Purpose

RI

Default

0

Transformer

10

Tap position

1

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

7

1. MV process general

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

1

Table 1.3.6-1

Format picture for analog indication (real OV)

1.3.7.

Format picture for binary output (OV & SE related)

/LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/USE/FORM4FPBO1

Table 1.3.7-1

Format picture for binary output (OV & SE related)

*

IX

Purpose

RI

Default

0

Transformer

25

Reference voltage

1

Device

IX

Purpose

RI

Default

0

Station

11,12,13,14

Station L/R-switch control

1

Bay

11,12,13,14

Bay L/R-switch control

2

Bay

17,19

Bay interlocking control

3

Switching device

11

Circuit breaker open select

4

Switching device

12

Circuit breaker close select

5

Switching device

13

Circuit breaker execute selected

6

Switching device

14

Circuit breaker cancel selected

7

Switching device

13

Circuit breaker select and execute 8

Switching device

11

Circuit breaker open execute

9

Switching device

12

Circuit breaker close execute

10

Switching device

11

Disconnector open select

11

Switching device

12

Disconnector close select

12

Switching device

13

Disconnector execute selected

13

Switching device

14

Disconnector cancel selected

14

Switching device

13

Disconnector select and execute

15

Switching device

11

Disconnector open execute

16

Switching device

12

Disconnector close execute

17

Switching device

11

Earth switch open select

18

Switching device

12

Earth switch close select

19

Switching device

13

Earth switch execute selected

20

Switching device

14

Earth switch cancel selected

21

Switching device

13

Earth switch select and execute

22

Switching device

11

Earth switch open execute

23

Switching device

12

Earth switch close execute

24

Switching device

31

Truck open select

25

Switching device

32

Truck close select

26

Switching device

33

Truck execute selected

27

Switching device

34

Truck cancel selected

28

Switching device

33

Truck select and execute

29

Switching device

31

Truck open execute

30

background image

8

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

1.

MV process general

Configuration Guide

1.3.8.

Format picture for digital output (OV related)

/LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/USE/FORM4FPDO1

Table 1.3.8-1

Format picture for digital output (OV related)

Switching device

32

Truck close execute

31

Switching device

12

3-state switch open select

32

Switching device

13

3-state switch close select

33

Switching device

14

3-state switch free select

34

Switching device

15

3-state switch earth select

35

Switching device

16

3-state switch execute selected

36

Switching device

17

3-state switch cancel selected

37

Switching device

16

3-state sw. (disconnector section)
select and execute

38

Switching device

17

3-state sw. (earth switch section)
select and execute

39

Switching device

12

3-state switch open execute

40

Switching device

13

3-state switch close execute

41

Switching device

14

3-state switch free execute

42

Switching device

15

3-state switch earth execute

43

Auto-reclosing tag

13

Auto-reclosing interruption

44

Auto-reclosing tag

14

Auto-reclosure in use

45

Trip tag

12...17

Latched trip relay reset

46

Transformer

14,15,16,17,18

Object command

47

Transformer

14

Object command (RTU-200)

48

Transformer

16

Object command (RTU-200)

49

REC 501

11

Open select

50

REC 501

12

Close select

51

REC 501

13

Execute selected

52

REC 501

14

Cancel selected

53

REC 501

13

Select and execute

54

DTU

11,12

Select and execute

55

Device

IX

Purpose

RI

Device

IX

Purpose

RI

Default

0

Switching device

11

Circuit breaker open execute

1

Switching device

12

Circuit breaker close execute

2

Switching device

11

Disconnector open execute

3

Switching device

12

Disconnector close execute

4

Switching device

11

Earth switch open execute

5

Switching device

12

Earth switch close execute

6

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

9

1. MV process general

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

1

1.3.9.

Format picture for analog output (OV related)

/LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/USE/FORM4FPAO1

Table 1.3.9-1

Format picture for analog output (OV related)

Switching device

31

Truck open execute

7

Switching device

32

Truck close execute

8

Switching device

12

3-state switch open execute

9

Switching device

13

3-state switch close execute

10

Switching device

14

3-state switch free execute

11

Switching device

15

3-state switch earth execute

12

Device

IX

Purpose

RI

Device

IX

Purpose

RI

Default

0

Switching device

13

Circuit breaker select and
execute

1

Switching device

13

Disconnector select and execute 2

Switching device

13

Earth switch select and execute

3

Switching device

33

Truck select and execute

4

Switching device

16

3-state sw. (disconnector
section) select and execute

5

Switching device

17

3-state sw. (earth switch section)
select and execute

6

background image
background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

11

2. Station

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

2

2. Station

2.1.

Communication support

• SPACOM/SPANET (SPA)

• SPACOM/SRIO (ANSI)

• RED 500/REX (LON)

• RTU2xx (RP570)

• RTU2xx/FTABs (RP570)

• IEC 60870-5-101

• IEC 60870-5-103

• DNP 3.0

• Modbus RTU

2.2.

Picture function installation

This chapter describes the installation of picture functions for the MV Process
station function. The picture function for the station is found in the directory /LIB4/
FMOD/MVPROCESS/INST and it should be installed by using LIB4 installation
procedures (LIB4/LIB510/MV Process 2.x/Station). This picture function is
configured by using standard configuration tools such as:

1. Standard Configuration Tool

2. Process Object Tool

2.2.1.

Environmental requirements

In order for the station to have full functionality, the Base component has to be
installed first.

2.2.2.

Installation

The size of the station picture function is 80 x 40 pixels (5 x 2 semigraphical blocks).
The button and field frame are drawn out of this area.

Owing to the limitation of the Station Authority dialog (Control authority of Control
Centers), it is not recommended to install more than one station picture function/
picture. However, if there is more than one station picture function in the same
picture, the Station Authority will only recognize the last one (installed as the last
station picture function).

Fig. 2.2.2.-1 presents a visible station picture function as a part of a complete
substation.

1MRS751887-MEN

background image

12

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

2.

Station

Configuration Guide

)LJ

7\SLFDOLQVWDOODWLRQIRUDYLVLEOHVWDWLRQSLFWXUHIXQFWLRQ

In MicroSCADA 8.4.4 you can have up to 10 000 station picture functions in one
picture, instead of having only one station picture function like in the former
MicroSCADA version. Due to this feature, the ’Station/Local/Remote’ field on the
header bar will no longer be displayed, indicating that there is a hidden station
picture function installed in the picture.

Table 2.2.2-1

During the installation, the following information has to be
given.

2.3.

Picture function configuration

2.3.1.

Preliminary work

Before the configuration of the picture functions can start, some preparatory
configurations are required (i.e. configurations that are required only once). The
usage of the object identification (OI) attribute has to be settled, the naming
convention of the process object has to be decided and the translation of the signal
texts into the local language has to be performed. For further information, please
refer to the General chapter in this MV Process Configuration Manual.

2.3.2.

Configuration with standard configuration tool

The station picture function has the following attributes to configure with the
Standard Configuration Tool:

Attribute

Meaning

Default

Picture function name

Name of the picture function within the picture

-

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

13

2. Station

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

2

Table 2.3.2-1

Configurable attributes

Attribute

Meaning

Default

STATION_NAME

Name of the substation

-

SPECIAL_IDENTIFIER_’nr’ Name of the special identifier ‘nr’

Not
configurable

STATION_LABEL

The abbreviation of the station

-

P_OBJECT_LN

Logical name of database process objects

-

STATION_TYPE

The type of control device & protocol

RED 500/
REX (LON)

OUTPUT_STATUS

Process objects for output status with DNP 3.0
protocol

N/A

DATA_ACQUISITION_UNI
T

The data acquisition unit towards process

None

AUTHORIZATION_GROUP The name of the authorization group

MV_CONTR
OL

STATION_LR_IN_USE

Station local/remote-switch used for control
authority checking

Yes

LR_REMOTELY_CONTRO
LLABLE

Station local/remote-switch remotely
controllable/ manually operated

Yes

EVENT_RECORDING

Process objects for event recording with RP
570

No process
objects

STATION_NAME

A selector type of an editable combo box to
select or enter the name of the substation.
By default the maximum length of the text is
9 characters. The selection list shows up to
ten latest entries.

The configurable attribute is being read
directly from the process object database, if
there is any process object linked to the
selected station picture function. Therefore,
the configurable attribute within a picture
function has only meaning when the process
objects have not been created.
This text will be used as a substation
identifier of the common station objects on
event list, alarm list, printout, database query,
etc. It is very important that this text is similar
to all objects withinthe same substation.

background image

14

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

2.

Station

Configuration Guide

SPECIAL_IDENTIFIER_’nr’

A selector type of an editable combo box to select or enter
a special identifier of the common station. By default this
identifier is not in use, i.e. it is not configurable with the
SCT. The selection list shows up to ten latest entries.

The configurable attribute is being read directly from the
process object database, if there is any process object
linked to the selected station picture function. Therefore,
the configurable attribute within a picture function has
meaning only when the process objects have not been
created.

This text will be used as an additional identifier of the
common station on event list, alarm list, printout, database
query, etc.

STATION_LABEL

The abbreviation of the station. The maximum length of the
text is 7 characters.

Due to the limited space on the substation single line
diagram, this label will be used as an identifier of the
common stationobjects on the screen.

P_OBJECT_LN

The logical name of the database process objects. The
maximum length of the text is 10 characters. Allowed
characters are the letters A-Z, all digits and the underscore
(_).

The logical names of process objects have to be unique
throughout the entire system, that is, different objects
cannot have the same logical name. Therefore, it is very
important to have a proper naming convention for the
process object database.

Certain naming convention is also required to speed up the
opening time of the main dialogs. With the predefined
naming convention it is possible to collect all station and
bay related database objects without searching through
the complete database. Therefore, it is advised to use the
following naming convention:

- The first three characters identify the substation
- The following four characters identify the bay
- The last three characters can be freely used to identify
the source of the signal i.e. device, unit, etc.

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

15

2. Station

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

2

The following list is presented as an example of the proper
namingconvention within one bay. The station name is
Green Bay and the bay name is HA12 Downtown:
- GRB, station
- GRBHA12BAY, bay
- GRBHA12Q0, circuit breaker Q0
- GRBHA12Q1, truck Q1
- GRBHA12Q9, earth switch Q9
- GRBHA12CT, measurements/current transformer
- GRBHA12VT, measurements/voltage transformer
- GRBHA12ALA, alarm indicator
- GRBHA12AR, auto-reclosing tag
- GRBHA12TRP, tripping tag
- GRBHA12R1, feeder terminal or protection unit 1
- GRBHA12R2, feeder terminal or protection unit 1
- GRBHA12LS1, line segment 1 of busbar coloring
- GRBHA12LS2, line segment 2 of busbar coloring
- GRBHA12LS3, line segment 3 of busbar coloring
- GRBHA12LI, line indicator of busbar coloring
If some other naming convention than 3+4 is used, it usually
takes a longer time to open the main control dialogs unless
the optional named program U_OTHER_OBJECTS is being
utilized to introduce other required process objects (not
required with the station picture function).

STATION_TYPE

A selector type of a combo box to select the station type of
the objects.

The database process objects will be created for the station
type defined here. The list of supported protocols is as
follows:

- SPACOM / SPANET (SPA)
- SPACOM / SRIO (ANSI)
- RED 500 / REx (LON)
- RTU2xx (RP570)
- RTU2xx / FTABs (RP570)
- IEC 870-5-101
- IEC 870-5-103
- DNP 3.0
- Modbus RTU

If SPACOM device has been connected to the LON-bus via
LON-SPA Gateway (LSG), the station type should be
selected as SPACOM/SPANET (SPA).

If REx device (e.g. REF 541) with LON communication is
used, the station type should be selected as RED 500/REx
(LON).

CMD_PARAMETER

A selector type of a combo box to select command
parameter for control method. This attribute has meaning
only if IEC 870-5-101 or DNP 3.0 protocol is selected,
otherwise this attribute is beind disabled.

The supported control parameters are:

background image

16

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

2.

Station

Configuration Guide

- Double command (TY = 46)
- Single command (TY = 45)
for IEC 870-5-101 protocol and
- Direct
- Direct - No ack.
for DNP 3.0 protocol

OUTPUT_STATUS

An ON/OFF type of a toggle button to select whether there is
need for output status process objects with the DNP 3.0
protocol. If STATION_TYPE is other than DNP 3.0, the
configurable attribute is being disabled, and the value has no
meaning.

DATA_ACQUISITION_UNIT

A selector type of an editable combo box to select the data

acquisition unit of the bay local/remote-switch.

This selection is not obligatory, if the signal engineering is
done by other means than SigTOOL.

The data acquisition unit, i.e. the device or module, which
connects the signals from the process to the communication
system, can be defined either by selecting the unit from the
selection list and editing it or just by entering the type desig-
nation.

If there are more than one data acquisition unit of the same
type within the bay, it is necessary to differentiate units by
using additional characters. As an example, the data acqui-
sition units for a bay with SPAJ 140 C, SPAC 535 C3 and
SACO 64D4:

SPAJ 140 C
SPCJ4D29_1
SPAC 535 C3
SPCJ4D29_2
SPTO6D3 (or SPTO6D3_1)
SACO 64D4
SACO16D2_1
SACO16D2_2
SACO16D2_3
SACO16D2_4

The additional characters should always start with an under-
score (_) and then be followed by an unit distinction charac-
ter ranging from 1 - 9, 0, A - Z. If there is no more than one
data acquisition unit of the same type within the bay, the
additional characters can be left out.

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

17

2. Station

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

2

AUTHORIZATION_GROUP

A selector type of an editable combo box to select the
authorization group for the object. The maximum length of
the text is 63 characters. The given text has to be usable as
a SCIL list attribute name (see SCIL manual). The contents
of the selection list is taken from the existing authorization
groups.

NOTE! The name may not be composed of two letters
followed by a number.

The attribute needs to be defined, if the object is wanted to
be included in some authorization group. The authorization
level of each user in this group can be defined afterwards by
the system manager with User Management pictures.

STATION_LR_IN_USE

An ON/OFF type of a toggle button to select if the station
local/remote-switch is in use, i.e. a physcal switch exists.

By default the station local/remote-switch is in use.

If this selection is set OFF, the control authority is given to
everyone whose personal authorization level is high enough
for the control actions. This is gained by setting the state
(value) of the station local/remote-switch permanently out of
use.

The process object for station local/remote-switch is created
regardless of the selection. If the station local/remote-switch
is NOT in use, the process object should be left as it is
created, i.e. switching state (SS) to manual and value (DB)
as 3 (out of use).

LR_REMOTELY_CONTROL
LABLE

An ON/OFF type of a toggle button for the selection,
whether the station local/remote-switch can be controlled
remotely by SCS or MicroSCADA or not.

By default the station local/remote-switch is defined as
manually controllable only.

Typically, if there is a remote control for the station local/
remote -switch, switching election between station and
remote can be done remotely, whereas switching election to
or from local has to be performed locally.

Switching to and from local:
This can be archieved by setting the attribute SS (switching
state) of the local command -process object to OFF (0).
Setting the SS-attribute to 0 will make relevant radio-button
in the dialog insensitive for selections.

background image

18

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

2.

Station

Configuration Guide

2.3.3.

Configuration with representation tool

The station picture function has no attributes to configure with the Representation
Tool.

2.3.4.

Configuration with process object tool

Depending on the configuration of the station picture function, the Process Object
Tool will create a certain set of the process objects into the database. Those process
objects which are going be linked to the actual process should be edited to have a
station number, an address and a proper switching state. Otherwise, by default, all
other attributes should have suitable values for normal operation.

The Process Object Tool will create process objects based on the following list:

Table 2.3.4-1

The Process Object Tool will create process objects based on
the following list

EVENT_RECORDING

An ON/OFF type of a toggle button to select whether there is
need for event recording process objects with the RP 570
protocol. If STATION_TYPE is other than RTU 2xx or RTU
2xx/FTABs, the configurable attribute is being disabled, and
the value has no meaning.

With the RP 570 the time stamp from process device comes
into the event recording process object. If no accurate time
stamp is needed or available, or the device is emulating the
RP 570 without an event recording possibility, do not set this
attribute ON.

Index

Explanation

Purpose

10

Station local/remote-switch
indication

The station local/remote-switch is used to
determine whether the control to the station
objects is allowed from the panel (local), from the
substation control system, from the remote control
system or station authority checking is out of use.

11

Station local/remote-switch
to Local-command

The station local/remote-switch to Local-command
object is an output object which is designed to set
the station control to local (panel).

12

Station local/remote-switch
to Station-command

The station local/remote-switch to Station-
command object is an output object which is
designed to set the station control to substation
control system (station).

13

Station local/remote-switch
to Remote-command

The station local/remote-switch to Remote-
command object is an output object which is
designed to set the station control to network
control system (remote).

14

Station local/remote -switch
to Out of use-command

The station local/remote-switch to Out of use-
command object is an output object which is
designed to set the station authority checking out
of use.

15

Station blockings

(optional)

The indication for station blockings is an internal
object which is meant for generating events and
printouts of the station blockings.

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

19

2. Station

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

2

2.3.5.

An example of the station configuration

An example of the configuration of the station picture function:

Table 2.3.5-1

An example of the configuration of the station picture function

2.4.

Application engineering information

2.4.1.

The structure of the station picture function

This chapter describes the structure of the station picture function. All pictures, form
pictures, help and other text files as well as all database objects are included. The
station is a part of the MV Process of LIB 510 and has a directory /LIB4/FMOD/
MVPROCESS, and the standard LIB 510 sub-directories INST, LANG0 and USE.

The installation of the “instance” picture function will automatically install “type”
picture function (FPI_STA2T) if it does not already exist. The “type” picture
function contains all common programs for the “instance” picture function and it is
only visible at the Picture Editor.

16

Station selected on monitor

(optional)

The indication for station selected on monitor is an
internal object and it is used to inform other users
that the station dialog has been opened by another
user(s).

110

Station local/remote-switch
indication

Created only for ANSI and RTU type stations. For
ANSI it is used for converting the indication from
analog value to double binary value. For RTU it is
used as an event recording object.

111-114

Indication for command
termination

(optional)

With IEC 870-5-101 and -103 indicates whether
the issued command was successful or not.

Index

Explanation

Purpose

Attribute

Value

Picture Function Name

STA

STATION_NAME

Eastwick

SPECIAL_IDENTIFIER_x

N/A

STATION_LABEL

Station

P_OBJECT_LN

EST

STATION_TYPE

RED 500 / REx (LON)

DATA_ACQUISITION_UNIT

SPTO12D4

AUTHORIZATION_GROUP

MV_CONTROL

STATION_LR_IN_USE

Yes

LR_REMOTELY_CONTROLLABLE

No

EVENT_RECORDING

N/A

background image

20

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

2.

Station

Configuration Guide

2.4.2.

Pictures

Below there is a list of all station pictures and a short description of their
functionality. Dialogs are described in detail earlier in this document. The paths are
/LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/INST

Table 2.4.2-1

Station pictures

and /LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/USE

Table 2.4.2-2

Station pictures

2.4.3.

Language text files

The following Text Translation Tool compatible text files are used by the station
picture function.

The path is /LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/LANG0

Table 2.4.3-1

Text Translation Tool compatible text files

Picture

Functionality

FPI_STA2T.PIC

Common programs for all station picture functions

FPI_STA2I.PIC

Picture function (5*2) for station

Picture

Functionality

FPU_STA2A.PIC

Main dialog

FPU_STA2B.PIC

Control confirmation dialog

FPU_STA2C.PIC

Update process data dialog

FPU_STA2D.PIC

Active object messages dialog

FPU_STA2E.PIC

Station blocking dialog

FPU_STA2F.PIC

Alarm state dialog

FPU_STA2G.PIC

Combo-box list picture for the alarm state dialog

FORM4FPDB1.PIC

Format picture for printing double indication (DB) type of
signals in MV Process

FORM4FPAI1.PIC

Format picture for printing analog input (AI) type of signals
in MV Process

FORM4FPBO1.PIC

Format picture for printing binary output (BO) type of signals
in MV Process

Text file

Functionality

FPI_STA2.TXT

Text file for the database creation of the picture function

FPU_STA2.TXT

Text file for all station dialogs

FORM4FPDB1.TXT

Text file for format picture of printing double indication (DB) type
of signals

FORM4FPAI1.TXT

Text file for format picture of printing analog input (AI) type of
signals

FORM4FPBO1.TXT

Text file for format picture of printing binary output (BO) type of
signals

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

21

2. Station

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

2

2.4.4.

Help text files

Below there is a list of the station help text files.

The path is /LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/LANG0.

Table 2.4.4-1

Station help text files

2.4.5.

Configuration files

The following configuration files are used by the station picture function. The path
is LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/INST

Table 2.4.5-1

The station picture configuration files

2.4.6.

Other text files

The following text files are used by the station. The path is /LIB4/FMOD/
MVPROCESS/USE.

Table 2.4.6-1

Text files used by the station

2.4.7.

Process objects

The following process objects will be created depending on the configuration of the
station.

Help file

Functionality

FPI_STA2.HLP

Picture function installation help file

FPU_STA2A.HLP

Main dialog help file

FPU_STA2C.HLP

Update process data dialog help file

FPU_STA2D.HLP

Active object messages dialog help file

FPU_STA2E.HLP

Station blocking dialog help file

FPU_STA2F.HLP

Alarm state dialog help file

Configuration file

Functionality

FPI_STA2.DAT

Contains the configuration data for station when it is created,
modified or deleted by configuration tools.

FPI_STA2.POT

Contains the process object definitions for the Process Object
Tool.

FPI_DAU.TXT

Contains the list of data acquisition units that are typically used by
MV Process.

INDEX4_F11.TXT

Selection list of LIB 510 Rev 4.0.3 MV Process picture functions
for installation tool (common for all other picture functions, too.)

Text file

Functionality

FPU_AUTH.TXT

Contains the SCIL code for station authority check. This code is
executed by the main dialog for station.

PATH4_F1.TXT

Contains the path definitions for the MV Process.

background image

22

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

2.

Station

Configuration Guide

Table 2.4.7-1

The manually operated station local/remote-switch will create
the following process objects with the Process Object Tool

Table 2.4.7-2

The remotely controllable station local/remote-switch will
create the following process objects with the Process Object
Tool

2.4.8.

Scale objects

At the first installation the station creates the scale 1_1 (linear 1:1 scale). For
SPACOM / SRIO (ANSI) type of station, the installation will also create the scale
FPU_1_1000 (linear 1:1000 scale).

Index

Obj. type

Process object

Remarks

Group identifier

10

DB

Station local/remote-switch
ind.

FPASTAILRS

15

AI

Blockings

Internal
Optional

FPASTAXBLK

16

AI

Station selected on
monitor

Internal
Optional

FPASTAXMEV

110

EVREC

Station local/remote-switch
ind.

RP570 only
Optional

FPASTAELRS

110

AI

Station local/remote-switch
ind.

ANSI only

FPASTAELRS

Index

Obj. type

Process object

Remarks

Group identifier

10

DB

Station local/remote-
switch ind.

FPASTAILRS

11

BO

L/R-sw. to Local -
command

FPASTACLRS

12

BO

L/R-sw. to Station -
command

FPASTACLRS

13

BO

L/R-sw. to Remote -
command

FPASTACLRS

14

BO

L/R-sw. to Out of use -
command

FPASTACLRS

15

AI

Blockings

Internal

Optional

FPASTAXBLK

16

AI

Station selected on
monitor

Internal

Optional

FPASTAXMEV

110

EVREC

Station local/remote-
switch ind.

RP570 only

Optional

FPASTAELRS

110

AI

Station local/remote-
switch ind.

ANSI only

FPASTAELRS

111-114

TERM

Command termination
indication for output
signals

IEC 870-5-101
and -103 only

Optional

FPASTATOBC

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

23

2. Station

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

2

2.4.9.

Command procedures

At the first installation the station creates the command procedure FPU_UPDATE,
which updates process objects when they are update-deblocked. This feature is
similar to the LIB 500 Blocking List function. It is also used by the Update process
data dialog.

For SPACOM / SRIO (ANSI) type of station, the installation will create the
command procedure FPU_AI2DB, which updates station local/remote-switch
indication double binary from an analog input.

2.4.10.

Event channels

For SPACOM / SRIO (ANSI) type of station, the installation will create the event
channel FPU_AI2DB, which is set to activate the command procedure
FPU_AI2DB.

background image
background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

25

3. Bay

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

3

3. Bay

3.1.

Communication support

• SPACOM/SPANET (SPA)

• SPACOM/SRIO (ANSI)

• RED 500/REX (LON)

• RTU2xx (RP570)

• RTU2xx/FTABs (RP570)

• IEC 60870-5-101

• IEC 60870-5-103

• DNP 3.0

• MODBUS RTU

3.2.

Picture function installation

This chapter describes the installation of a picture function for the MV Process bay
function. The picture function for the bay is found in the directory /LIB4/FMOD/
MVPROCESS/INST and it should be installed by using LIB4 installation
procedures (LIB4/LIB510/MV Process 2.x/Bay). Configuration of this picture
function shall be performed by using standard configuration tools such as

1. Standard Configuration Tool

2. Process Object Tool

3.2.1.

Environmental requirements

In order that the bay would have full functionality, the following components need
to be installed:

• Base

• Station (*)

(*) It is also possible to configure the bay to operate without the station picture
function. However, the bay requires the station to be installed by default.

3.2.2.

Installation

The size of the bay picture function is 80 x 40 pixels (5 x 2 semigraphical blocks).
The button and field frame is drawn out of this area.

Fig. 3.2.2.-1 presents a bay picture function as a part of a complete bay.

1MRS751887-MEN

background image

26

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

3.

Bay

Configuration Guide

)LJ

7\SLFDOED\LQVWDOODWLRQ

Table 3.2.2-1

During the installation the following information has to be
given

3.3.

Picture function configuration

3.3.1.

Preliminary work

Before the configuration of the picture functions can start, some preparatory con-
figurations are required (i.e. configurations that are required only once). The usage
of the object identification (OI) attribute has to be settled, the naming convention of
the process object has to be decided and the translation of the signal texts into local
language has to be performed. Please refer to the General chapter in this MV Pro-
cess Configuration Manual for further information.

3.3.2.

Configuration with standard configuration tool

It is important to configure attributes in the order of appearance since setting one
attribute may enable/disable and/or reset another attribute later.

The bay picture function has the following attributes to configure with the Standard
Configuration Tool

Table 3.3.2-1

Configurable attributes

Attribute

Meaning

Default

Picture Function Name:

Name of the picture function within the picture

-

Attribute

Meaning

Default

STATION_NAME

Name of the substation

-

BAY_NAME

Name of the bay

-

SPECIAL_IDENTIFIER_’nr’

Name of the special identifier ‘nr’

Not configurable

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

27

3. Bay

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

3

BAY_LABEL

The abbreviation of the bay

-

P_OBJECT_LN

Logical name of database process
objects

-

STATION_TYPE

The type of control device & protocol RED 500/REX (LON)

CMD_PARAMETER

Parameter for control method for IEC
8750-5-101 and DNP 3.0 protocol

N/A

OUTPUT_STATUS

Process objects for output status with
DNP 3.0 protocol

N/A

DATA_ACQUISITION_UNIT

The data acquisition unit towards
process

None

AUTHORIZATION_GROUP

The name of the authorization group

MV_CONTROL

BAY_LR_IN_USE

Physical L/R-switch exists/not
available

Bay L/R-switch exists

IND_DOUBLE_BINARY

Indication type double binary/single
binary

Double binary

LR_REMOTELY_CONTROLL
ABLE

Bay L/R-switch remotely controllable/
manually operated

Manually operated

EVENT_RECORDING

Process objects for event recording
with RP 570

No process objects

U_OTHER_OBJECTS

Program to define other objects

-

Attribute

Meaning

Default

STATION_NAME

A selector type of an editable combo box to select or enter
the name of the substation. By default, the maximum length
of the text is 9 characters. The selection list shows up to ten
latest entries.

The configurable attribute is being read directly from the pro-
cess object database if there is any process object linked to
the selected bay picture function. Therefore, the config-
urable attribute within a picture function has meaning only
when the process objects have not been created.

This text will be used as a substation identifier of the com-
mon bay objects on event list, alarm list, printout, database
query, etc. It is very important that this text is similar to all
objects within the same substation.

background image

28

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

3.

Bay

Configuration Guide

BAY_NAME

A selector type of an editable combo box to select or enter
the name of the bay (feeder). By default, the maximum
length of the text is 14 characters. The selection list shows
up to ten latest entries.

The configurable attribute is being read directly from the pro-
cess object database if there is any process object linked to
the selected bay picture function. Therefore, the config-
urable attribute within a picture function has meaning only
when the process objects have not been created.

This text will be used as a bay (feeder) identifier of the com-
mon bay objects on event list, alarm list, printout, database
query, etc. It is very important that this text is similar to all
objects within the same bay (feeder).

SPECIAL_IDENTIFIER_’nr’

A selector type of an editable combo box to select or enter a
special identifier of the common bay. By default, this identi-
fier is not in use, i.e. it is not configurable with the SCT. The
selection list shows up to ten latest entries.

The configurable attribute is being read directly from the pro-
cess object database, if there is any process object linked to
the selected bay picture function. Therefore, the config-
urable attribute within a picture function has meaning only
when the process objects have not been created.

This text will be used as an additional identifier of the com-
mon bay on event list, alarm list, printout, database query,
etc.

BAY_LABEL

The abbreviation of the bay/feeder. The maximum length of
the text is 7 characters.

Owing to the limited space on the substation single line dia-
gram, this label will be used as an identifier of the bay/feeder
on the screen.

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

29

3. Bay

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

3

P_OBJECT_LN

The logical name of the database process objects. The max-
imum length of the text is 10 characters. Allowed characters
are the letters A-Z, all digits and the underscore (_).
The logical names of process objects have to be unique
throughout the entire system, that is, different objects cannot
have the same logical name. Therefore, it is very important
to have a proper naming convention for the process object
database.

Certain naming convention is also required to speed up the
opening time of the main dialogs. With the predefined nam-
ing convention it is possible to collect all station and bay
related database objects without searching through the com-
plete database. Therefore, it is advised to use the following
naming convention:

- The first three characters identify the substation
- The following four characters identify the bay
- The last three characters can be freely used to identify
the source of the signal, i.e. device, unit, etc.
The following list is presented as an example of the proper
naming convention within one bay. The station name is
Green Bay and the bay name is HA12 Downtown:
- GRB, station
- GRBHA12BAY, bay
- GRBHA12Q0, circuit breaker Q0
- GRBHA12Q1, truck Q1
- GRBHA12Q9, earth switch Q9
- GRBHA12CT, measurements/current transformer
- GRBHA12VT, measurements/voltage transformer
- GRBHA12ALA, alarm indicator
- GRBHA12AR, auto-reclosing tag
- GRBHA12TRP, tripping tag
- GRBHA12R1, feeder terminal or protection unit 1
- GRBHA12R2, feeder terminal or protection unit 1
- GRBHA12LS1, line segment 1 of busbar coloring
- GRBHA12LS2, line segment 2 of busbar coloring
- GRBHA12LS3, line segment 3 of busbar coloring
- GRBHA12LI, line indicator of busbar coloring
If some other naming convention than 3+4 is used, it usually
takes a longer time to open the main control dialogs, unless
the optional named program U_OTHER_OBJECTS is being
utilized to introduce other required process objects.

background image

30

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

3.

Bay

Configuration Guide

STATION_TYPE

A selector type of a combo box to select the station type of
the objects.
The database process objects will be created for the station
type defined here. The list of supported protocols is as fol-
lows:
- SPACOM / SPANET (SPA)
- SPACOM / SRIO (ANSI)
- RED 500 / REx (LON)
- RTU2xx (RP570)
- RTU2xx / FTABs (RP570)
- IEC 870-5-101
- IEC 870-5-103
- DNP 3.0
- Modbus RTU
If SPACOM device has been connected to the LON-bus via
LON-SPA Gateway (LSG), the station type should be
selected as SPACOM/SPANET (SPA).
If REx device (e.g. REF 541) with LON communication is
used, the station type should be selected as RED 500/REx
(LON).

CMD_PARAMETER

A selector type of a combo box to select the command
parameter for control method. This attribute has meaning
only if IEC 870-5-101 or DNP 3.0 protocol is selected, other-
wise this attribute is being disabled.

The supported control parameters are:

- Double command (TY = 46)
- Single command (TY = 45)

for IEC 870-5-101 protocol and

- Direct
- Direct-No ack.

for DNP 3.0 protocol.

OUTPUT_STATUS

An ON/OFF type of a toggle button to select whether there is
need for output status process objects with the DNP 3.0 pro-
tocol. If STATION_TYPE is other than DNP 3.0, the config-
urable attribute is being disabled, and the value has no
meaning.

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

31

3. Bay

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

3

DATA_ACQUISITION_UNIT

A selector type of an editable combo box to select the data
acquisition unit of the bay local/remote-switch.

This selection is not obligatory, if the signal engineering is
done by other means than SigTOOL.

The data acquisition unit, i.e. the device or module, which
connects the signals from the process to the communication
system, can be defined either by selecting the unit from the
selection list and editing it or just by entering the type desig-
nation.

If there are more than one data acquisition unit of the same
type within the bay, it is necessary to differentiate units by
using additional characters. As an example, the data acqui-
sition units for a bay with SPAJ 140 C, SPAC 535 C3 and
SACO 64D4:

SPAJ 140 C
SPCJ4D29_1
SPAC 535 C3
SPCJ4D29_2
SPTO6D3 (or SPTO6D3_1)
SACO 64D4
SACO16D2_1
SACO16D2_2
SACO16D2_3
SACO16D2_4

The additional characters should always start with an under-
score (_) and then be followed by an unit distinction charac-
ter ranging from 1 - 9, 0, A - Z. If there is no more than one
data acquisition unit of the same type within the bay, the
additional characters can be left out.

AUTHORIZATION_GROUP

A selector type of an editable combo box to select the autho-
rization group for the object. The maximum length of the text
is 63 characters. The given text has to be usable as a SCIL
list attribute name (see SCIL manual). The contents of the
selection list is taken from the existing authorization groups.
NOTE! The name may not be composed of two letters fol-
lowed by a number.

The attribute needs to be defined, if the object is wanted to
be included in some authorization group. The authorization
level of each user to this group can be defined afterwards by
the system manager with User Management pictures.

background image

32

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

3.

Bay

Configuration Guide

BAY_LR_IN_USE

An ON/OFF type of a toggle button to select if the bay local/
remote-switch is in use, i.e. a physical switch exists.
By default the bay local/remote-switch is in use.

It is typical that if RTU 200 or RTU 210 is used as a remote
terminal unit, there is no bay local/remote-switches at bay
level. The control authority of a single bay is determined by
using station local/remote-switch only.

The process object for bay local/remote-switch is created
regardless of the selection. If the bay local/remote-switch is
NOT in use, the process object should be left as it is created,
i.e. switching state (SS) to manual and value (DB) as 2
(remote).

IND_DOUBLE_BINARY

An ON/OFF type of a toggle button to select, if the type of
the bay local/remote-switch indication is double binary. This
selection is being disabled and it has no meaning if the bay
local/remote-switch is not in use, i.e. BAY_LR_IN_USE is
not set.

Depending on the actual field device, the indication of the
local/remote-switch is sent either as a single binary (0/1) or
as a double binary (0/1/2/3) format.

Binary input:
0 = local
1 = remote

Double binary input:
0 = disabled (=control totally blocked)
1 = local
2 = remote
3 = none

LR_REMOTELY_CONTROL
LABLE

An ON/OFF type of a toggle button to select if the bay local/
remote-switch can be controlled remotely by SCS/
MicroSCADA. This selection is being disabled and it has no
meaning if the bay local/remote-switch in not in use, i.e.
BAY_LR_IN_USE is not set.

By default, bay local/remote-switch is defined as manually
controllable only.

It is typical that if there is a remote control for bay local/
remote-switch, shift to local can be done remotely, whereas
shift from local to remote has to be performed locally. This
can be achieved by setting the attribute SS (switching state)
of the local command process object to OFF (0). By setting
the SS-attribute to 0, the relevant radio-button on dialog will
become insensitive for shifting.

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

33

3. Bay

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

3

EVENT_RECORDING

An ON/OFF type of a toggle button to select whether there is
need for event recording process objects with the RP 570
protocol. If STATION_TYPE is other than RTU 2xx or RTU
2xx/FTABs, the configurable attribute is being disabled, and
the value has no meaning.

With the RP 570 the time stamp from process device comes
into the event recording process object. If no accurate time
stamp is needed or available, or the device is emulating the
RP 570 without an event recording possibility, do not set this
attribute ON.

U_OTHER_OBJECTS

An optional named program which is designed for the optimi-
zation and/or customization purposes.

With this program it is possible to predefine logical names
for certain signals that are required by the bay main dialog.
By hard coding this information the opening time of the main
dialog is speeded up, since there is no need to look for cor-
responding objects from the process object database. It is
recommended to predefine the objects by this program if the
size of the process objectdatabase exceeds 10000 process
objects.

Signal to predefine: STATION_LN

The logical name of the station local/remote-switch. The
STATION picture function creates this process object by
default. Only one logical name is allowed.

Syntax for predefinitions:

Not predefined; search for process object(s) done by dialog
""

No process object(s) available and it is not required
"NONE"

Logical name (LN) for process objects
"GRB"

As an example, a typical predefinition for the common bay.

With the help of this program it is possible to define the logi-
cal name (LN) for other objects that are being required by
the main control dialogs. For syntax/selections, please refer
to the installation help!

This program is for optimization/customization purposes and
therefore, it is not obligatory. The control dialog is automati-
cally collecting the same information from the database if it
is not defined here.

@’.ID’_OTHER_OBJECTS = LIST(-
STATION_LN = "GRB")

background image

34

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

3.

Bay

Configuration Guide

3.3.3.

Configuration with representation tool

The bay picture function has no attributes to configure with the Representation
Tool.

3.3.4.

Configuration with process object Tool

Depending on the configuration of the bay picture function, the Process Object Tool
will create a certain set of process objects in the database. Those process objects
which are going to be linked to the actual process should be edited to have a station
number, an address and a proper switching state. Otherwise, by default, all other
attributes should have suitable values for normal operation.

The Process Object Tool will create process objects based on the following list:

Table 3.3.4-1

Process objects based on this list are created with the
Process Object Tool

Index

Explanation

Purpose

10

Bay local/remote-switch
indication

The bay (disabled)/local/remote-switch is used to
determine whether the control to the bay objects
is completely inhibited or it is allowed locally or
remotely.

11

Bay local/remote -switch to
Disabled -command

The bay local/remote -switch to Disabled -
command object is an output object which is
designed to set the bay control to disabled (no
control locally or remotely).

12

Bay local/remote -switch to
Local -command

The bay local/remote -switch to Local -command
object is an output object which is designed to set
the bay control to the local (panel).

13

Bay local/remote -switch to
Remote -command

The bay local/remote -switch to Remote -
command object is an output object which is
designed to set the bay control to substation or
network control system (remote).

14

Bay local/remote -switch to
Reserved -command

The bay local/remote -switch to Reserved -
command object is an output object which is
designed to set the bay control to reserved. The
reserved position can be used for special
purposes.

15

External interlocking ON/OFF
(HW) -indication

(optional)

The external interlocking in use/out of use (HW) -
ind. is meant as an ON/OFF-type of indication for
the hardware switch of the interlocking function.

16

External interlocking ON/OFF
(SW) -indication

(optional)

The external interlocking in use/out of use (SW) -
ind. is meant as an ON/OFF-type of indication for
the software switch of the interlocking function.

17

External interlocking ON/OFF
-command

(optional)

The external interlocking in use/out of use -
command is an output object which can be used
to remotely enable/disable interlocking function of
the field device.

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

35

3. Bay

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

3

An example of the bay configuration

As an example, the configuration of the bay picture function is provided:

Table 3.3.4-2

Configuration of the bay picture function

18

Internal interlocking ON/OFF
-indication

(optional)

The internal interlocking in use/out of use -
indication is meant as an ON/OFF-type of
indication of the internal interlocking functions. By
disabling internal interlocking, there will not be
any interlocking checking in the control dialogs
during operation.

19

Internal interlocking ON/OFF
-command

(optional)

The internal interlocking in use/out of use -
command is an object which is defined to
internally control the state of the internal
interlocking in use/out of use -indication.

20

Bay blockings

(optional)

The bay blockings -indication is an internal object
which is meant for generating events and
printouts of the bay blockings.

21

Bay selected on monitor

(optional)

The bay selected on monitor -indication is an
internal object and it is used to inform other users
that the bay dialog has been opened by another
user(s).

110

Bay local/remote-switch indi-

cation

Created only for ANSI and RTU type stations. For
ANSI it is used for converting the indication from
analog value to double binary value. For RTU it is
used as an event recording object.

111-114,
117

Indication for command
termination

(optional)

With IEC 870-5-101 and -103 indicates whether
the issued command was successful or not.

Output status object with DNP 3.0 type of
stations.

115

External interlocking ON/OFF
(HW)

(optional)

Event recording object (for accurate time stamp)
with RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.

116

External interlocking ON/OFF
(SW)

(optional)

Event recording object (for accurate time stamp)
with RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.

Index

Explanation

Purpose

Attribute

Value

Picture Function Name

BAY2

STATION_NAME

Eastwick

BAY_NAME

Outgoing HA2

SPECIAL_IDENTIFIER_x

N/A

BAY_LABEL

HA2

P_OBJECT_LN

ESTHA02BAY

STATION_TYPE

RED 500 / REX (LON)

background image

36

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

3.

Bay

Configuration Guide

3.4.

Application engineering information

3.4.1.

The structure of the bay picture function

This chapter describes the structure of the bay picture function. All pictures, form
pictures, help and other text files as well as all database objects are included. The
bay is a part of the MV Process of LIB 510 and has a directory /LIB4/FMOD/
MVPROCESS, and the standard LIB 510 sub-directories INST, LANG0 and USE.

The installation of the “instance” picture function will automatically install “type”
picture function (FPI_BAY2T) if it does not already exist. The “type” picture func-
tion contains all common programs for the “instance” picture function and it is only
visible in the Picture Editor.

3.4.2.

Pictures

Below there is a list of all bay pictures and a short description of their functionality.
Dialogs are described in detail earlier in this document. The paths are /LIB4/
FMOD/MVPROCESS/INST

Table 3.4.2-1

Bay pictures and descriptions of their functionalities

and /LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/USE

Table 3.4.2-2

Bay pictures and descriptions of their funcitonalities

CMD_PARAMETER

N/A

OUTPUT_STATUS

N/A

DATA_ACQUISITION_UNIT

REF541

AUTHORIZATION_GROUP

MV_CONTROL

BAY_LR_IN_USE

Yes

IND_DOUBLE_BINARY

Yes

LR_REMOTELY_CONTROLLABLE

No

EVENT_RECORDING

N/A

Attribute

Value

Picture

Functionality

FPI_BAY2T.PIC

Common programs for all station picture functions

FPI_BAY2I.PIC

Picture function (5*2) for bay

Picture

Functionality

FPU_BAY2A.PIC

Main dialog

FPU_BAY2B.PIC

Control confirmation dialog

FPU_BAY2C.PIC

Update process data dialog

FPU_BAY2D.PIC

Bay blocking dialog

FPU_BAY2E.PIC

Relay selection dialog

FPU_BAY2F.PIC

Active object messages dialog

FPU_BAY2G.PIC

Bay interlocking dialog

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

37

3. Bay

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

3

3.4.3.

Language text files

The following Text Translation Tool compatible text files are used by the bay pic-
ture function. The path is /LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/LANG0

Table 3.4.3-1

Text translation tool compatible text files

3.4.4.

Help text files

Below there is a list of the bay help text files. The path is /LIB4/FMOD/MVPRO-
CESS/LANG0.

Table 3.4.4-1

Bay help text files

FPU_BAY2H.PIC

Alarm state dialog

FPU_BAY2I.PIC

Combo-box list picture for alarm state dialog

FORM4FPBI1.PIC

Format picture for printing single indication (BI) type of signals
in MV Process

FORM4FPDB1.PIC

Format picture for printing double indication (DB) type of signals
in MV Process

FORM4FPAI1.PIC

Format picture for printing analog input (AI) type of signals in
MV Process

FORM4FPBO1.PIC

Format picture for printing binary output (BO) type of signals in
MV Process

Picture

Functionality

Text file

Functionality

FPI_BAY2.TXT

Text file for the database creation of the picture function

FPU_BAY2.TXT

Text file for all bay dialogs

FORM4FPBI1.TXT

Text file for format picture of printing single indication (BI) type
of signals

FORM4FPDB1.TXT

Text file for format picture of printing double indication (DB) type
of signals

FORM4FPAI1.TXT

Text file for format picture of printing analog input (AI) type of
signals

FORM4FPBO1.TXT

Text file for format picture of printing binary output (BO) type of
signals

Help file

Functionality

FPI_BAY2.HLP

Picture function installation help file

FPU_BAY2A.HLP

Bay main dialog help file

FPU_BAY2C.HLP

Update process data dialog help file

FPU_BAY2D.HLP

Bay blocking dialog help file

FPU_BAY2E.HLP

Relay selection dialog help file

FPU_BAY2F.HLP

Active object messages dialog help file

FPU_BAY2G.HLP

Bay interlocking dialog help file

FPU_BAY2H.HLP

Alarm state dialog help file

background image

38

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

3.

Bay

Configuration Guide

3.4.5.

Configuration files

The following configuration files are used by the bay picture function. The path is
LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/INST

Table 3.4.5-1

Configuration files used by the bay picture function

3.4.6.

Other text files

The following text files are used by the bay. The path is /LIB4/FMOD/MVPRO-
CESS/USE.

Table 3.4.6-1

Text files used by the bay

3.4.7.

Process objects

The following process objects will be created depending on the configuration of the
bay.

Table 3.4.7-1

The manually operated bay local/remote-switch creates the
following process objects with the Process Object Tool

Configuration file

Functionality

FPI_BAY2.DAT

Contains the configuration data for a bay when it is created,
modified or deleted by configuration tools.

FPI_BAY2.POT

Contains the process object definitions for the Process Object
Tool.

FPI_DAU.TXT

Contains the list of data acquisition units that are typically used
by MV Process.

INDEX4_F11.TXT

Selection list of LIB 510 Rev 4.0.3 MV Process picture functions
for installation tool (common for all other picture functions, too.)

Text file

Functionality

FPU_AUTH.TXT

Contains the SCIL code for station authority check. This code is
executed by the main dialog of the bay.

PATH4_F1.TXT

Contains the path definitions for the MV Process.

Index Obj. type

Process object

Remarks

Group identifier

10

DB/BI

Bay local/remote-switch
ind.

FPABAYILRS

15

BI

Interl. in use/out of use
(SW)

Hardware sw. (MFU)

Optional

FPABAYIINH

16

BI

Interl. in use/out of use
(HW)

Software sw. (MFU)

Optional

FPABAYIINH

17

BO

Interl. in use/out of use -
cmd

Command to MFU

Optional

FPABAYCINH

18

BI

Interl. in use/out of use Internal

Optional

FPABAYIINH

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

39

3. Bay

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

3

Table 3.4.7-2

The remotely controllable bay local/remote-switch creates the
following process objects with the Process Object Tool

19

BO

Interl. in use/out of use -
cmd

Internal

Optional

FPABAYCINH

20

AI

Blockings

Internal

Optional

FPABAYXBLK

21

AI

Bay selected on
monitor

Internal

Optional

FPABAYXMEV

110

EVREC

Bay local/remote-switch
ind.

RP570 only

Optional

FPABAYELRS

110

AI

Bay local/remote-switch
ind.

ANSI only

FPABAYELRS

115

EVREC

Interl. in use/out of use
(SW)

RP570 only

Optional

FPABAYEINH

116

EVREC

Interl. in use/out of use
(HW)

RP570 only

Optional

FPABAYEINH

117,
119

TERM

Command termination
indication for output
signals

IEC 870-5-101 and -103
only

Optional

FPASTATINH

Index Obj. type

Process object

Remarks

Group identifier

Index

Obj. type

Process object

Remarks

Group

identifier

10

DB/BI

Bay local/remote-switch
ind.

FPABAYILRS

11

BO

L/R-sw. to Disabled -
command

Only if ind. type DB

FPABAYCLRS

12

BO

L/R-sw. to Local -
command

FPABAYCLRS

13

BO

L/R-sw. to Remote -
command

FPABAYCLRS

14

BO

L/R-sw. to Reserved -
command

Only if ind. type DB

FPABAYCLRS

15

BI

Interl. in use/out of use
(HW)

Hardware sw. (MFU)

Optional

FPABAYIINH

16

BI

Interl. in use/out of use
(SW)

Software sw. (MFU)

Optional

FPABAYIINH

17

BO

Interl. in use/out of use -
cmd

Command to MFU

Optional

FPABAYCINH

background image

40

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

3.

Bay

Configuration Guide

3.4.8.

Scale Objects

At the first installation the bay creates the scale 1_1 (linear 1:1 scale). For SPA-
COM / SRIO (ANSI)-type of the station, the installation will also create the scale
FPU_1_1000 (linear 1:1000 scale).

3.4.9.

Command procedures

At the first installation the bay creates the command procedure FPU_UPDATE,
which updates process objects when they are update-deblocked. This feature is
similar to the LIB 500 Blocking List function. It is also used by the Update process
data dialog.

For SPACOM / SRIO (ANSI) type of station, the installation will create the
command procedure FPU_AI2DB, which updates bay local/remote-switch double
binary indication from an analog input.

18

BI

Interl. in use/out of use -
ind.

Internal

Optional

FPABAYIINH

19

BO

Interl. in use/out of use -
cmd

Internal

Optional

FPABAYCINH

20

AI

Blockings

Internal

Optional

FPABAYXBLK

21

AI

Bay selected on monitor

Internal

Optional

FPABAYXMEV

110

EVREC

Bay local/remote-switch
ind.

RP570 only

Optional

FPABAYELRS

110

AI

Bay local/remote-switch
ind.

ANSI only

FPABAYELRS

111-
114

TERM/OS

Command termination
indication for output
signals

Output status object

IEC 870-5-101 and -103
only

Optional

Output status object
when station type is DNP
3.0, optional

FPASTATOBC

115

EVREC

Interl. in use/out of use
(HW)

RP570 only Optional

FPABAYEINH

116

EVREC

Interl. in use/out of use
(SW)-ind.

Only RP570 only

Optional

FPABAYEINH

117,
119

TERM

Command termination
indication for output
signals

IEC 870-5-101 and -103
only Optional

FPASTATINH

Index Obj.

type

Process

object

Remarks

Group

identifier

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

41

3. Bay

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

3

3.4.10.

Event channels

For SPACOM / SRIO (ANSI) type of station, the installation will create the event
channel FPU_AI2DB, which is set to activate the command procedure
FPU_AI2DB.

background image
background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

43

4. Switching device

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

4

4. Switching

device

4.1.

Communication support

• SPACOM/SPANET (SPA)

• SPACOM/SRIO (ANSI)

• RED 500/REX (LON)

• RTU2xx (RP570) (*)

• RTU2xx/FTABs (RP570) (*)

• IEC 60870-5-101

• IEC 60870-5-103

• DNP 3.0

• MODBUS RTU

(*) When using the

53 protocol with switch device, the following constraints

should be taken into consideration: There are separate process objects used for
events and alarms. Due to this fact, intermediate and faulty events are not displayed
as alarming in the Event List (red alarm indicator is not displayed at the beginning
of the event line).

4.2.

Picture function installation

This chapter describes the installation of picture function for the MV Process
switching device. The picture functions for the switching device is found in the
directory /LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/INST and it should be installed by using
LIB4 installation procedures (LIB4/LIB510/MV Process 2.x/Switching Device).
Configuration of this picture function shall be performed by using standard
configuration tools such as:

1. Standard Configuration Tool

2. Representation Tool
3. Process Object Tool

4.2.1.

Environmental requirements

In order for the switching device to have full functionality, the following
components need to be installed:

• Base

• Station (*)

• Bay (*)

(*) It is also possible to configure the switching device to operate without the station
and bay picture function. By default, however, the switching device requires them
to be installed.

1MRS751887-MEN

background image

44

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

4.

Switching device

Configuration Guide

4.2.2.

Installation

There are three different sizes of the switching device picture function: small (1*1),
medium (2*2) and large (3*3). The size of the small switching device picture
function is 16 x 20 pixels (1 x 1 semigraphical block), the medium picture function
is 32 x 40 pixels (2 x 2 semigraphical blocks) and the large picture function is 48 x
60 pixels (3 x 3 semigraphical blocks). The button frame is drawn out of this area.

It is not recommended that the medium size of the picture function is used within the
same bay with small or large picture functions because of the different snap of the
feeder lines.

Fig. 4.2.2.-1 presents different kinds of switching device picture functions as a part
of the complete bay.

)LJ

7\SLFDOED\LQVWDOODWLRQZLWKGLIIHUHQWNLQGRIVZLWFKLQJGHYLFHV

Table 4.2.2-1

During the installation the following information has to be
given:

4.3.

Picture function configuration

4.3.1.

Preliminary work

Before the configuration of the picture functions can begin, some preparatory
configurations are required (i.e. configurations that are required only once). The
usage of object identification (OI) attribute has to be settled, the naming convention

Table 4.2.-1

Attribute

Meaning

Default

Picture Function Name

Name of the picture function within the picture

-

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

45

4. Switching device

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

4

of the process object has to be decided and the translation of the signal texts into
local language has to be performed. Please refer to the General chapter in this MV
Process Configuration Manual for further information.

4.3.2.

Configuration with the standard configuration tool

It is important to configure attributes in the order of appearance since setting one
attribute may enable/disable and/or reset another attribute later.

The switching device has the following attributes to configure with the Standard
Configuration Tool:

Table 4.3.2-1

Configurable attributes

Attribute

Meaning

Default

STATION_NAME

Name of the substation

-

BAY_NAME

Name of the bay

-

DEVICE_NAME

Name of the device

-

SPECIAL_IDENTIFIER_’nr’

Name of the special identifier ‘nr’

Not configurable

P_OBJECT_LN

Logical name of database process
objects

-

SWITCHING_DEVICE_TYPE

Type of switching device

Circuit breaker

SWITCHING_DEVICE_PURPO
SE

Usage of the selected switching device
type

Circuit breaker

SWITCH_SECTION

Switch section of the truck or 3-state
switch

Truck: first section
3-state sw.:
disconnector

STATION_TYPE

Type of control device & protocol

RED 500/REX
(LON)

INDICATION_TYPE

Type of position indication process
object

Double binary

MOTORIZED

Selection of motorized or manually
oper.

Motorized

CMD_PARAMETER

Parameter for control method for IEC
8750-5-101 and DNP 3.0 protocol

N/A

CONTROL_TYPE

Type of control process object(s)

Secured control
with 4 binary
outputs

OUTPUT_STATUS

Process objects for output status with
DNP 3.0 protocol

N/A

CONTROL_PULSE_LENGTH

Length of control pulse

0

CONTROL_BITS

Bits to be used to send a control
command

Empty vector

DATA_ACQUISITION_UNIT

Data acquisition unit towards process

None

FUNCTION_BLOCK

Function block of data acquisition unit

None

CHANNEL_NUMBER

Channel number of data acquisition
unit

0

AUTHORIZATION_GROUP

Name of the authorization group

MV_CONTROL

SUFFIX_POSITION

Location of suffix

Lower right corner

background image

46

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

4.

Switching device

Configuration Guide

SYMBOL_WITH_BUTTON

Selection of symbol with or without a
button

With button

AUXILIARY_PLUG

Selection if the switching device is
mounted in the truck

Standalone
switch

EVENT_RECORDING

Process objects for event recording
with RP 570

No process
objects

COMPACT_INSTALLATION

Selection if the switching device is
being installed over the busbar

Not installed over
busbar

U_INTERLOCKING

User-specific interlocking program

-

U_OTHER_OBJECTS

Program to define other objects

-

Attribute

Meaning

Default

Table 4.3.2-2

STATION_NAME

A selector type of an editable combo box to select or enter the
name of the substation. By default, the maximum length of
the text is 9 characters. The selection list shows up to ten
latest entries.
The configurable attribute is being read directly from the
process object database, if there is any process object linked
to the selected switching device.
Therefore, the configurable attribute within a picture function
has meaning only when the process objects have not been
created.
This text will be used as a substation identifier of the
switching device objects on event list, alarm list, printout,
database query, etc. It is very important that this text is similar
to all objects within the same substation.

BAY_NAME

A selector type of an editable combo box to select or enter the
name of the bay (feeder). By default, the maximum length of
the text is 14 characters. The selection list shows up to ten
latest entries.
The configurable attribute is being read directly from the
process object database, if there is any process object linked
to the selected switching device.
Therefore, the configurable attribute within a picture function
has meaning only when the process objects have not been
created.
This text will be used as a bay (feeder) identifier of the
switching device objects on event list, alarm list, printout,
database query, etc. It is very important that this text is similar
to all objects within the same bay (feeder).

DEVICE_NAME

A selector type of an editable combo box to select or enter the
name (identifier) of the switching device. By default, the
maximum length of the text is 5 characters. The selection list
shows up to ten latest entries.
The configurable attribute is being read directly from the
process object database, if there is any process object linked
to the selected switching device.
Therefore, the configurable attribute within a picture function
has meaning only when the process objects have not been
created.
This text will be used as an identifier of the switching device
on event list, alarm list, printout, database query, etc.

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

47

4. Switching device

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

4

SPECIAL_IDENTIFIER_’nr’ A selector type of an editable combo box to select or enter a

special identifier of the switching device. By default, this
identifier is not in use, i.e. it is not configurable with the SCT.
The selection list shows up to ten latest entries.
The configurable attribute is being read directly from the
process object database, if there is any process object linked
to the selected switching device.
Therefore, the configurable attribute within a picture function
has meaning only when the process objects have not been
created.
This text will be used as an additional identifier of the
switching device on event list, alarm list, printout, database
query, etc.

P_OBJECT_LN

The logical name of the database process objects. The
maximum length of the text is 10 characters. Allowed
characters are the letters A-Z, all digits and the underscore
(_).
The logical names of process objects have to be unique
throughout the entire system, that is, different objects cannot
have the same logical name. Therefore, it is very important to
have a proper naming convention for the process object
database.

Certain naming convention is also required to speed up the
opening time of the main dialogs. With the predefined naming
convention it is possible to collect all station and bay related
database objects without searching through the complete
database. Therefore, it is advised to use the following naming
convention:

• The first three characters identify the substation

• The following four characters identify the bay

• The last three characters can be freely used to identify

the source of the signal, i.e. device, unit, etc.

The following list is presented as an example of a proper
naming convention within one bay. The station name is Green
Bay and the bay name is HA12 Downtown:

• GRB, station

• GRBHA12BAY, bay

• GRBHA12Q0, circuit breaker Q0

• GRBHA12Q1, truck Q1

• GRBHA12Q9, earth switch Q9

• GRBHA12CT, measurements/current transformer

• GRBHA12VT, measurements/voltage transformer

• GRBHA12ALA, alarm indicator

• GRBHA12AR, auto-reclosing tag

• GRBHA12TRP, tripping tag

• GRBHA12R1, feeder terminal or protection unit 1

• GRBHA12R2, feeder terminal or protection unit 2

• GRBHA12LS1, line segment 1 of busbar coloring

Table 4.3.2-2

background image

48

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

4.

Switching device

Configuration Guide

• GRBHA12LS2, line segment 2 of busbar coloring

• GRBHA12LS3, line segment 3 of busbar coloring

• GRBHA12LI, line indicator of busbar coloring

If some other naming convention than 3+4 is used, it usually
takes a longer time to open the main control dialogs unless
the optional named program
U_OTHER_OBJECTS is being utilized to introduce other
required process objects.

SWITCHING_DEVICE_TYP
E

A selector type of a combo box to select the type of the
switching device. By default, the type is a circuit breaker.
The configurable attribute has a great effect since it defines
the index range for process objects, the texts within database
and dialogs, the functionality and
methods on dialogs, etc. It is also used by the event and
alarm list when filtering certain types of switching devices.

Circuit breakers:

• Circuit breaker

• Circuit breaker with synchro-check

• Circuit breaker-disconnector (no full breaking

capasity)

Disconnectors:

• Disconnector

• Fuse switch

• Load breaking switch

Earth switch
Fault-making switch
Truck
Three-state switch
(needs to be set up by installing two picture functions)

Table 4.3.2-2

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

49

4. Switching device

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

4

SWITCHING_DEVICE_PUR
POSE

A selector type of a combo box to select the purpose of the
switching device.
The configurable attribute has just an informative purpose
since by the default it is not used by any function within LIB
5xx. The attribute is being stored into process object

database (the 25

th

or the 26

th

character of the RX attribute)

for user-defined purposes, e.g. for special search condition
on the alarm or event list.

Circuit breakers:

• Circuit breaker

• Main busbar circuit breaker

• Main busbar A circuit breaker

• Main busbar B circuit breaker

• Reserve busbar circuit breaker

• By-pass circuit breaker

• Bus-section circuit breaker

• Bus-coupler circuit breaker

Disconnectors:

• Disconnector

• Main busbar disconnector

• Main busbar A disconnector

• Main busbar B disconnector

• Reserve busbar disconnector

Table 4.3.2-2

background image

50

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

4.

Switching device

Configuration Guide

• By-pass disconnector

• Line disconnector

• Line disconnector A

• Line disconnector B

• Bus-section disconnector

• Bus-section A disconnector

• Bus-section B disconnector

• Bus-section C disconnector

• Bus-coupler disconnector

Earth switches:

• Earth switch

• Main busbar earth switch

• Main busbar A earth switch

• Main busbar B earth switch

• Reserve busbar earth switch

• By-pass earth switch

• Line earth switch

• Line earth switch A

• Line earth switch B

• CT-section earth switch

Fault-making switch
Truck
Three-state switch

SWITCH_SECTION

A selector type of a combo box to select the switch section for
the truck and the three-state switch. If
SWITCHING_DEVICE_TYPE is some other than truck or
three-state switch, the configurable attribute is being
disabled, and the value has no meaning.

When the type of the switching device is truck, this
configurable attribute is needed to combine two picture
functions as one physical truck for Busbar Coloring. If there is
a circuit breaker with two truck picture functions, this attribute
should have a different value for both truck picture functions.
In that way the Busbar Coloring calculation algorithm knows
that the other picture function is not a duplicate but a part of
the other one.

Any of the two picture functions can be selected as the first
section as long as the other picture function is selected as the
second section of the truck. If only one picture function will be
used (i.e. one sided installation), the attribute can be left by
default.

As far as the three-state switch is concerned, this selection
will be used to identify whether the picture function is for the
disconnector section or for the earth switch section of the
three-state switch.

Table 4.3.2-2

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

51

4. Switching device

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

4

STATION_TYPE

A selector type of a combo box to select the station type of
the objects.
The database process objects will be created for the station
type defined here. The list of supported protocols is as
follows:
SPACOM / SPANET (SPA)
SPACOM / SRIO (ANSI)
RED 500 / Rex (LON)
RTU2xx (RP570)
RTU2xx / FTABs (RP570)
IEC 60870-5-101
IEC 60870-5-103
DNP 3.0
MODBUS RTU

If SPACOM device has been connected to the LON-bus via
LON-SPA Gateway (LSG), the station type should be
selected as SPACOM/SPANET (SPA).

If Rex device (e.g. REF 541) with LON communication is
used, the station type should be selected as RED 500/Rex
(LON).

INDICATION_TYPE

A selector type of a combo box to select the type of the
position indication process object(s). By default, the process
object type is defined as a double indication (DB).
The purpose of this configurable attribute is to support other
data type than double indication as the position indication of
the switching device. The supported data types are:
Double indication (DB)
Single indication (BI)
2 x Single indications (2 x BI)
Analog input (AI)

The interface between the picture function and the process
object database is always with double indication object, i.e.
there is an additional process object(s) receiving information
and then passing it to double indication.

MOTORIZED

An ON/OFF type of a toggle button to select if the switching
device is motorized and remotely controllable by SCS/
MicroSCADA. By default, the switching device is defined as a
motorized object.

By selecting Motorized option, the Process Object Tool (POT)
will create a set of process objects for control purpose and all
configurable attributes related to control are being enabled.

CMD_PARAMETER

A selector type of a combo box to select the command
parameter for control method. This attribute has meaning only
if IEC 60870-5-101 or DNP 3.0 protocol is selected, otherwise
this attribute is being disabled.
The supported control parameters are:
Double command (TY = 46)
Single command (TY = 45)
for IEC 60870-5-101 protocol and
Direct
Direct-No ack.
for DNP 3.0 protocol.

Table 4.3.2-2

background image

52

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

4.

Switching device

Configuration Guide

CONTROL_TYPE

A selector type of a combo box to select the control method
and the type of the control process object(s). If the
configurable attribute MOTORIZED is not selected, this
attribute is being disabled, and the value has no meaning.
The purpose of this configurable attribute is to support other
control methods and process object types than the
conventional one. The conventional control method depends
very much on the configurable attribute STATION_TYPE
since there is a certain default method for each protocol to
control switching device. The supported control methods are:
Secured command with four binary outputs
(open select, close select, execute, cancel)
Secured command with two binary ouputs
(open execute, close execute)
Secured command with two digital outputs
(open execute, close execute; pulse length configurable)
Secured command with a single binary output (*)
(open select/close select/execute/cancel)
Secured command with a single analog output
(open select, close select, execute, cancel or open execute/
close execute)
Direct command with a single binary output
(open execute/close execute)
(*) Control method not supported with SPA and ANSI
protocols
A control device from SPACOM or RED 500 family with SPA
or LON protocol normally utilizes secured command with four
binary outputs.
Normally, A RTU 2xx with RP 570 uses secured command
with a single binary output.

OUTPUT_STATUS

An ON/OFF type of a toggle button to select whether there is
need for output status process objects with the DNP 3.0
protocol. If STATION_TYPE is other than DNP 3.0, the
configurable attribute is being disabled, and the value has no
meaning.

CONTROL_PULSE_LENGT
H

An input field for integer value to set the pulse length of the
control pulses. The configurable attribute is being enabled if
the attribute MOTORIZED is set and CONTROL_TYPE is
secured control with two digital outputs.

CONTROL_BITS

A vector type of an input field for integer values to specify the
bits to be used to send a control command to the switching
device. The configurable attribute is being enabled if the
attribute MOTORIZED is set and CONTROL_TYPE is a
secured control with an analog output.

There is a need to specify two or four elements for that vector.
If two elements are being specified, the first element
represents the bit for Open execute, while the second
element is for Close execute. When four elements are used,
the first represents the bit for Open select, the second
repersents Close select, the third represents Execute and the
fourth represents Cancel.

The bit vector shall be given to the SCT in the following way:
(0,1) or (9,10,11,8)

Table 4.3.2-2

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

53

4. Switching device

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

4

DATA_ACQUISITION_UNIT A selector type of an editable combo box to select the data

acquisition unit of the switching device.

This selection is not obligatory if the signal engineering is
done by other means than SigTOOL.

The data acquisition unit, i.e. the device or module which
connects the signals from the process to the communication
system, can be defined either by selecting the unit from the
selection list and editing it or just by entering the type
designation.

If there are more than one data acquisition unit of the same
type within the bay, it is necessary to differentiate units by
using additional characters. As an example, the data
acquisition units for a bay with SPAJ 140 C, SPAC 535 C3
and SACO 64D4:
SPAJ 140 C
SPCJ4D29_1
SPAC 535 C3
SPCJ4D29_2
SPTO6D3 (or SPTO6D3_1)
SACO 64D4
SACO16D2_1
SACO16D2_2
SACO16D2_3
SACO16D2_4

The additional characters should always start with the
underscore (_) and be followed by an unit distinction
character ranging from 1 - 9, 0, A - Z. If there is no more than
one data acquisition unit of the same type within the bay, the
additional characters can be left out.

FUNCTION_BLOCK

A selector type of an editable combo box to select the
function block (software module) of data acquisition unit that
handles the signals for this picture function. If the configurable
attribute DATA_ACQUISITION_UNIT does not specify such a
device that contains function blocks, this attribute is being
disabled, and the value has no meaning.

This selection is not obligatory if the signal engineering is
done by other means than SigTOOL.

Devices such as REF 54x, REM 54x, REC 52x and REC 53x
utilise function blocks for configuration. If the name of the
function block does not exist in the selection list (a new one),
you can enter it yourself!

CHANNEL_NUMBER

An input field for an integer value to set the channel number
of the switching device within the data acquisition unit. This
selection is only applicable for SPACOM type of the control
modules; for others this attribute is being disabled, and the
value has no meaning.

This selection is not obligatory if the signal engineering is
done by other means than SigTOOL.
SigTOOL needs a channel number for devices like SPTO
1C1, SPTO 1C4, SPTO 1D2, SPTO 1D5, SPTO 1D6, SPTO
2C2, SPTO 6D3 and SPTO 12D4.

Table 4.3.2-2

background image

54

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

4.

Switching device

Configuration Guide

AUTHORIZATION_GROUP A selector type of an editable combo box to select the

authorization group for the object. The maximum length of the
text is 63 characters. The given text has to be usable as a
SCIL list attribute name (see SCIL manual). The contents of
the selection list is taken from the existing authorization
groups.

The name may not be composed of two letters followed
by a number.

The attribute needs to be defined, if the object is wanted to be
included in some authorization group. The authorization level
of each user in this group can be defined afterwards by the
system manager with the User Management pictures.

SUFFIX_POSITION

A selector type of combo box to select the position of the
suffix
for the switching device.
The purpose of this configurable attribute is to provide the
possibility to show the status of the switching device with
letters beside the symbol.
The supported positions for suffix are:
None
Upper right corner
Lower right corner
Lower left corner
Upper left corner
The configuration is done in the Application Settings picture,
depending on how the status of the switching device is
wanted to be shown: with suffices, with colors, or with both of
them.

SYMBOL_WITH_BUTTON

An ON/OFF type of a toggle button to select whether the
control dialog(s) can be opened for the switching device.
By default the symbol is provided with an active button.

AUXILIARY_PLUG

An ON/OFF type of a toggle button to select whether the
device utilizes auxiliary plug or not. If the
SWITCHING_DEVICE_TYPE is truck or three-state switch,
the configurable attribute is being disabled, and the value has
no meaning.

The process object for an auxiliary plug informs if the control
cable from the switching device to the cubicle has been
disconnected, i.e. if the switching device is being fully racked
out from the cubicle. In that case no switching device symbol
is shown in the single line diagram.

The process object can also be used as an internal tag
without the process connection. In that case the control dialog
asks the auxiliary plug state when the object state is
intermediate.

Table 4.3.2-2

!

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

55

4. Switching device

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

4

EVENT_RECORDING

An ON/OFF type of a toggle button to select whether there is

need for event recording process objects with the RP 570
protocol. If STATION_TYPE is other than RTU 2xx or RTU
2xx/FTABs, the configurable attribute is being disabled, and
the value has no meaning.

With the RP 570 the time stamp from process device comes
into the event recording process object. If no accurate time
stamp is needed or available, or the device is emulating the
RP 570 without an event recording possibility, do not set this
attribute ON.

COMPACT_INSTALLATION An ON/OFF type of a toggle button to select if the switching

device is installed over the busbar (compact installation). If
SWITCHING_DEVICE_TYPE is not any of disconnector
types, the configurable attribute is being disabled, and the
value has no meaning.

This selection is not obligatory if no topological busbar
coloring is used.

Table 4.3.2-2

background image

56

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

4.

Switching device

Configuration Guide

U_INTERLOCKING

An optional named program which is designed for the internal
interlocking purpose.

With this internal interlocking program it is possible to make
control buttons insensitive if required. It is also capable of
generating interlocking cause messages to the information
bar of the control dialog.

As an example a simple interlocking program which checks if
the earth switch is open before allowing the control com-
mands for circuit breaker.

; By this program internal interlockings may be

; create by utilizing SCIL

;

; The following variables can be given as OUTPUT:

;

; @OPEN_INTERLOCKED,

; boolean, (if true then opening gets disabled)

; @CLOSE_INTERLOCKED,

; boolean, (if true then closing gets disabled)

; @INTERLOCKING_CAUSE,

; text, cause to be shown on the dialog infobar

;

; None of these is obligatory!

;

;earth switch Q9 not open

#IF GRBHA12Q9:POS10==0 #THEN #BLOCK

#IF GRBHA12Q9:POV10<>2 #THEN #BLOCK

@OPEN_INTERLOCKED = TRUE

@CLOSE_INTERLOCKED = TRUE

@INTERLOCKING_CAUSE = “Interlocked – Earth switch

Q9 not open”

#BLOCK_END

#BLOCK_END

#ELSE #BLOCK

@OPEN_INTERLOCKED = TRUE

@CLOSE_INTERLOCKED = TRUE

@INTERLOCKING_CAUSE = “Interlocked – Earth switch

Q9 not updated”

#BLOCK_END

;If the status of the earth switch is changed when

;the main control dialogue is opened inform the

;operator about this change in the main control

;dialogoue.

#ON GRBHA12Q9:E10 #EXEC

'P_OBJECT_LN':E'EXT_OPEN_INTERLOCK_INDEX'

;Where P_OBJECT_LN is the logical name of database

;process object and EXT_OPEN_INTERLOCK_INDEX is the

;index nr (16) for the open interlocked

;processobject. If the P_OBJECT_LN is HA12Q0 the

;syntax would be #ON GRBHA12Q9:E10 #EXEC HA12Q0:E16.

Table 4.3.2-2

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

57

4. Switching device

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

4

U_OTHER_OBJECTS

An optional named program which is designed for the optimi-
zation and/or customization purposes.

With this program it is possible to predefine logical names for
certain signals that are required by the main control dialog. By
hard coding this information, the opening time of the main dia-
log may be sped up since there is no need to look for the cor-
responding objects from the process object database. It is
recommended to predefine the objects by this program if the
size of the process object database exceeds 10000 process
objects.

Signals to predefine:
STATION_LN
The logical name of the station local/remote-switch. The
STATION picture function creates this process object by
default. Only one logical name is allowed.
BAY_LN
The logical name of the bay local/remote-switch, blocking
printout, external interlocking (hardware and software switch)
and internal interlocking. The BAY picture function creates
these process objects by default. Only one logical name is
allowed.
AR_LN
The logical name of the auto-reclosing in progress, auto-
reclosure in use (hardware switch), auto-reclosure in use
(software switch), auto-reclosure interruption and auto-reclo-
sure in use command. The RECLOSE TAG picture function
creates these process objects by default. It is also possible to
predefine process objects from auto-reclosing modules. Sev-
eral logical names as a vector are allowed. Not applicable for
other than the circuit breaker.
TRIP_LN
The logical name of the trip relay latched and latched relay
reset command. The TRIP TAG picture function creates these
process objects as a default. Several logical names as a vec-
tor are allowed. Not applicable for other than the circuit
breaker.
Syntax for predefinations:
Not predefined; search for process object(s) done by dialog
“”
No process object(s) available and it is not required
“NONE”
Logical name (LN) for process objects
“GRB”
Several logical names (LN) for process objects
VECTOR(“GRBHA01AR1”,”GRBHA01AR2”)
As an example a typical predefination for the switching
device.

Table 4.3.2-2

background image

58

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

4.

Switching device

Configuration Guide

4.3.3.

Configuration with representation tool

The switching device has the following attributes to configure with the
Representation Tool:

Table 4.3.3-1

Configurable attributes

; By this program You can define logical name (LN)

for other objects

; that is being required by the main control dialogs.

For syntax/

; selections please refer to the installation help!

;

; This program is for optimization/customization

purposes and

; therefore it is not obligatory. The control dialog

is automatically

; collecting the same information from the database

if it is not

; defined here.

@’.ID’_OTHER_OBJECTS = LIST(-

STATION_LN = “GRB”,-

BAY_LN = “GRBHA12BAY”,-

AR_LN = “GRBHA12AR”,-

TRIP_LN = “NONE”)

Table 4.3.2-2

Attribute

Meaning

Default

REPRESENTATION

Selection of symbol set
shown in picture

F_REPR/F_BREAK1 or
F_REPR/F_DISC1 or
F_REPR/F_TRUCK1

REPRESENTATION

The name of the representation (symbol set) used for the

switching device state indication. The name of the
representation can be selected with the selector called
Representation when the preview window shows an
example of the selected symbol set.

The representation is being reset if the type of the switching
device is changed.

If there is no appropriate symbol set, it is possible to make
and use a representation set of your own. In that case one of
the existing representation sets can be copied into a
representation file ../APLMOD4/USE/APLMOD4.PIR under
the application and each representation may be modified as
needed. If object specific representations are needed, the
representation set (under the application) may be renamed
and the name of the representation may be written into the
selector with the logical path.

For example: F_REPR/MY_SET

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

59

4. Switching device

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

4

Table 4.3.3-2

The switching device requires a selector and a symbol for the
following conditions

Selector Condition

Default color

0

Intermediate; selected, under command

white, blinking

1

Intermediate; selected on monitor

white

2

Intermediate; update blocked, invalid value, obsolete value,
device not synchronized or overflow

magenta

3

Intermediate; unacknowledged alarm

red, blinking

4

Intermediate; acknowledged alarm

red

5

Intermediate; warning or blockings (alarms, events,
printouts or reprocessing)

yellow

6

Intermediate; manually entered or substituted

cyan

7

Intermediate; control blocked

brown

8

Intermediate; normal state

green

9

Intermediate; Substituted

dark blue

10

Closed; selected, under command

white, blinking

11

Closed; selected on monitor

white

12

Closed; update blocked, invalid value, obsolete value,
device not synchronized or overflow

magenta

13

Closed; unacknowledged alarm

red, blinking

14

Closed; acknowledged alarm

red

15

Closed; warning or blockings (alarms, events, printouts or
reprocessing)

yellow

16

Closed; manually entered or substituted

cyan

17

Closed; control blocked

brown

18

Closed; normal state

green

19

Closed; Substituted

dark blue

20

Open; selected, under command

white, blinking

21

Open; selected on monitor

white

22

Open; update blocked, invalid value, obsolete value, device
not synchronized or overflow

magenta

23

Open; unacknowledged alarm

red, blinking

24

Open; acknowledged alarm

red

25

Open; warning or blockings (alarms, events, printouts or
reprocessing)

yellow

26

Open; manually entered or substituted

cyan

27

Open; control blocked

brown

28

Open; normal state

green

29

Open; Substituted

dark blue

30

Faulty; selected, under command

white, blinking

31

Faulty; selected on monitor

white

32

Faulty; update blocked, invalid value, obsolete value,
device not synchronized or overflow

magenta

background image

60

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

4.

Switching device

Configuration Guide

By default, there are nine sets of symbols in three different sizes for each switching
device type. These default representations are shown below as medium sized. Please
note that in actual system the symbols representing selectors 0, 3, 10, 13, 20, 23, 30,
33 and 40 are blinking to draw attention.

Fig. 4.3.3.-1 presents the available square symbols for the circuit breaker.

Table 4.3.3-3

Square symbols

)LJ

6TXDUHV\PEROVIRUWKHFLUFXLWEUHDNHU

Fig. 4.3.3.-2 presents the available vertical link upwards symbols for the circuit
breaker.

33

Faulty; unacknowledged alarm

red, blinking

34

Faulty; acknowledged alarm

red

35

Faulty; warning or blockings (alarms, events, printouts or
reprocessing)

yellow

36

Faulty; manually entered or substituted

cyan

37

Faulty; control blocked

brown

38

Faulty; normal state

green

39

Faulty; Substituted

dark blue

40

Unknown; selected, under command

white, blinking

41

Unknown; selected on command

white

42

Unknown; not sampled or object missing

magenta

Selector Condition

Default color

Symbol

Size

F_REPR/F_BREAK1

small

F_REPR/F_BREAKM1

medium

F_REPR/F_BREAKL1

large

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

61

4. Switching device

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

4

Table 4.3.3-4

Vertical link upwards symbol

)LJ

9HUWLFDOOLQNXSZDUGVV\PEROIRUWKHFLUFXLWEUHDNHU

Fig. 4.3.3.-3 presents the available horizontal link to the right symbols for the circuit
breaker.

Table 4.3.3-5

Horizontal link to the right symbols

Symbol

Size

F_REPR/F_BREAK2

small

F_REPR/F_BREAKM2

medium

F_REPR/F_BREAKL2

large

Symbol

Size

F_REPR/F_BREAK3

small

F_REPR/F_BREAKM3

medium

F_REPR/F_BREAKL3

large

background image

62

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

4.

Switching device

Configuration Guide

)LJ

+RUL]RQWDOOLQNWRWKHULJKWV\PEROIRUWKHFLUFXLWEUHDNHU

Fig. 4.3.3.-4 presents the available horizontal link to the left symbols for the circuit
breaker.

Table 4.3.3-6

Horizontal link to the left symbol

)LJ

+RUL]RQWDOOLQNWRWKHOHIWV\PEROVIRUWKHFLUFXLWEUHDNHU

Fig. 4.3.3.-5 presents the available vertical link downwards symbols for the circuit
breaker.

Symbol

Size

F_REPR/F_BREAK4

small

F_REPR/F_BREAKM4

medium

F_REPR/F_BREAKL4

large

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

63

4. Switching device

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

4

Table 4.3.3-7

Vertical link downwards symbol

)LJ

9HUWLFDOOLQNGRZQZDUGVV\PEROIRUWKHFLUFXLWEUHDNHU

Fig. 4.3.3.-6 presents the available vertical link upwards symbols of contactor for
the circuit breaker.

Table 4.3.3-8

Vertical link upwards symbol

Symbol

Size

F_REPR/F_BREAK5

small

F_REPR/F_BREAKM5

medium

F_REPR/F_BREAKL5

large

Symbol

Size

F_REPR/F_BREAK6

small

F_REPR/F_BREAKM6

medium

F_REPR/F_BREAKL6

large

background image

64

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

4.

Switching device

Configuration Guide

)LJ

9HUWLFDOOLQNXSZDUGVV\PEROVRIFRQWDFWRUIRUWKHFLUFXLWEUHDNHU

Fig. 4.3.3.-7 presents the available horizontal link to the right symbols of contactor
for the circuit breaker.

Table 4.3.3-9

Horizontal link to the right symbols

)LJ

+RUL]RQWDOOLQNWRWKHULJKWV\PEROVRIFRQWDFWRUIRUWKHFLUFXLW

EUHDNHU

Fig. 4.3.3.-8 presents the available horizontal link to the left symbols of contactor
for the circuit breaker.

Symbol

Size

F_REPR/F_BREAK7

small

F_REPR/F_BREAKM7

medium

F_REPR/F_BREAKL7

large

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

65

4. Switching device

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

4

Table 4.3.3-10 Horizontal link to the left symbols

)LJ

+RUL]RQWDOOLQNWRWKHOHIWV\PEROVRIFRQWDFWRUIRUWKHFLUFXLW

EUHDNHU

Fig. 4.3.3.-9 presents the available vertical link downwards symbols of contactor
for the circuit breaker.

Table 4.3.3-11 Vertical link downwards symbols

Symbol

Size

F_REPR/F_BREAK8

small

F_REPR/F_BREAKM8

medium

F_REPR/F_BREAKL8

large

Symbol

Size

F_REPR/F_BREAK9

small

F_REPR/F_BREAKM9

medium

F_REPR/F_BREAKL9

large

background image

66

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

4.

Switching device

Configuration Guide

)LJ

9HUWLFDOOLQNGRZQZDUGV\PEROVRIFRQWDFWRUIRUWKHFLUFXLWEUHDNHU

Fig. 4.3.3.-10 presents the available diamond symbols for the disconnector.

Table 4.3.3-12 Diamond symbols

)LJ 'LDPRQGV\PEROVIRUWKHGLVFRQQHFWRU

Fig. 4.3.3.-11 presents the available vertical link upwards symbols for the discon-
nector.

Symbol

Size

F_REPR/F_DISC1

small

F_REPR/F_DISCM1

medium

F_REPR/F_DISCL1

large

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

67

4. Switching device

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

4

Table 4.3.3-13 Vertical link upwards symbols

)LJ 9HUWLFDOOLQNXSZDUGVV\PEROIRUWKHGLVFRQQHFWRU

Fig. 4.3.3.-12 presents the available horizontal link to the right symbols for the
disconnector.

Table 4.3.3-14 Horizontal link to the right symbols

Symbol

Size

F_REPR/F_DISC2

small

F_REPR/F_DISCM2

medium

F_REPR/F_DISCL2

large

Symbol

Size

F_REPR/F_DISC3

small

F_REPR/F_DISCM3

medium

F_REPR/F_DISCL3

large

background image

68

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

4.

Switching device

Configuration Guide

)LJ +RUL]RQWDOOLQNWRWKHULJKWV\PEROIRUWKHGLVFRQQHFWRU

Fig. 4.3.3.-13 presents the available horizontal link to the left symbols for the dis-
connector.

Table 4.3.3-15 Horizontal link to the left symbols

)LJ +RUL]RQWDOOLQNWRWKHOHIWV\PEROVIRUWKHGLVFRQQHFWRU

Fig. 4.3.3.-14 presents the available vertical link downwards symbols for the
disconnector.

Symbol

Size

F_REPR/F_DISC4

small

F_REPR/F_DISCM4

medium

F_REPR/F_DISCL4

large

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

69

4. Switching device

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

4

Table 4.3.3-16 Vertical link downwards

)LJ 9HUWLFDOOLQNGRZQZDUGVV\PEROIRUWKHGLVFRQQHFWRU

Fig. 4.3.3.-15 presents the available vertical link upwards symbols of load breaking
switch.

Table 4.3.3-17 Vertical link upwards symbol

Symbol

Size

F_REPR/F_DISC5

small

F_REPR/F_DISCM5

medium

F_REPR/F_DISCL5

large

Symbol

Size

F_REPR/F_DISC6

small

F_REPR/F_DISCM6

medium

F_REPR/F_DISCL6

large

background image

70

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

4.

Switching device

Configuration Guide

)LJ 9HUWLFDOOLQNXSZDUGVV\PEROVRIORDGEUHDNLQJVZLWFKIRUWKH

GLVFRQQHFWRU

Fig. 4.3.3.-16 presents the available horizontal link to the right symbols of load
breaking switch for the disconnector.

Table 4.3.3-18 Horizontal link to the right symbols

)LJ +RUL]RQWDOOLQNWRWKHULJKWV\PEROVRIORDGEUHDNLQJVZLWFKIRUWKH

GLVFRQQHFWRU

Fig. 4.3.3.-17 presents the available horizontal link to the left symbols of load
breaking switch.

Symbol

Size

F_REPR/F_DISC7

small

F_REPR/F_DISCM7

medium

F_REPR/F_DISCL7

large

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

71

4. Switching device

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

4

Table 4.3.3-19 Horizontal link to the left symbols

)LJ +RUL]RQWDOOLQNWRWKHOHIWV\PEROVRIORDGEUHDNLQJVZLWFKIRUWKH

GLVFRQQHFWRU

Fig. 4.3.3.-18 presents the available vertical link downwards symbols of load
breaking switch.

Table 4.3.3-20 Vertical link downwards symbols

Symbol

Size

F_REPR/F_DISC8

small

F_REPR/F_DISCM8

medium

F_REPR/F_DISCL8

large

Symbol

Size

F_REPR/F_DISC9

small

F_REPR/F_DISCM9

medium

F_REPR/F_DISCL9

large

background image

72

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

4.

Switching device

Configuration Guide

)LJ 9HUWLFDOOLQNGRZQZDUGVV\PEROVRIORDGEUHDNLQJVZLWFKIRUWKH

GLVFRQQHFWRU

Fig. 4.3.3.-19 presents the available vertical link

downwards symbol for the truck.

Table 4.3.3-21 Vertical link downwards symbol

)LJ 9HUWLFDOOLQNGRZQZDUGVV\PEROIRUWKHWUXFN

Fig. 4.3.3.-20 presents the available vertical link upwards symbols for the truck.

Symbol

Size

F_REPR/F_TRUCK1

small

F_REPR/F_TRUCKM1

medium

F_REPR/F_TRUCKL1

large

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

73

4. Switching device

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

4

Table 4.3.3-22 Vertical link upwards symbols

)LJ 9HUWLFDOOLQNXSZDUGVV\PEROIRUWKHWUXFN

Fig. 4.3.3.-21 presents the available horizontal link to the right symbols for the truck.

Table 4.3.3-23 Horizontal link to the right symbols

Symbol

Size

F_REPR/F_TRUCK2

small

F_REPR/F_TRUCKM2

medium

F_REPR/F_TRUCKL2

large

Symbol

Size

F_REPR/F_TRUCK3

small

F_REPR/F_TRUCKM3

medium

F_REPR/F_TRUCKL3

large

background image

74

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

4.

Switching device

Configuration Guide

)LJ +RUL]RQWDOOLQNWRWKHULJKWV\PEROIRUWKHWUXFN

Fig. 4.3.3.-22 presents the available horizontal link to the left symbols for the truck.

Table 4.3.3-24 Horizontal link to the left symbols

)LJ +RUL]RQWDOOLQNWRWKHOHIWV\PEROVIRUWKHWUXFN

Fig. 4.3.3.-23 presents the available vertical link downwards symbols for the truck.

Symbol

Size

F_REPR/F_TRUCK4

small

F_REPR/F_TRUCKM4

medium

F_REPR/F_TRUCKL4

large

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

75

4. Switching device

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

4

Table 4.3.3-25 Vertical link downwards symbols

)LJ 9HUWLFDOOLQNGRZQZDUGVV\PEROIRUWKHWUXFN

Fig. 4.3.3.-24 presents the available vertical link upwards symbols for the truck.

Table 4.3.3-26 Vertical link upwards symbols

Symbol

Size

F_REPR/F_TRUCK5

small

F_REPR/F_TRUCKM5

medium

F_REPR/F_TRUCKL5

large

Symbol

Size

F_REPR/F_TRUCK6

small

F_REPR/F_TRUCKM6

medium

F_REPR/F_TRUCKL6

large

background image

76

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

4.

Switching device

Configuration Guide

)LJ 9HUWLFDOOLQNXSZDUGVV\PEROVIRUWKHWUXFN

Fig. 4.3.3.-25 presents the available horizontal link to the right symbols for the truck.

Table 4.3.3-27 Horizontal link to the right symbols

)LJ +RUL]RQWDOOLQNWRWKHULJKWV\PEROVIRUWKHWUXFN

Fig. 4.3.3.-26 presents the available horizontal link to the left symbols for the truck.

Symbol

Size

F_REPR/F_TRUCK7

small

F_REPR/F_TRUCKM7

medium

F_REPR/F_TRUCKL7

large

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

77

4. Switching device

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

4

Table 4.3.3-28 Horizontal link to the left symbols

)LJ +RUL]RQWDOOLQNWRWKHOHIWV\PEROVIRUWKHWUXFN

Fig. 4.3.3.-27 presents the available circle symbols for the truck.

Table 4.3.3-29 Circle symbols

Symbol

Size

F_REPR/F_TRUCK8

small

F_REPR/F_TRUCKM8

medium

F_REPR/F_TRUCKL8

large

Symbol

Size

F_REPR/F_TRUCK9

small

F_REPR/F_TRUCKM9

medium

F_REPR/F_TRUCKL9

large

background image

78

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

4.

Switching device

Configuration Guide

)LJ &LUFOHV\PEROVIRUWKHWUXFN

4.3.4.

Configuration with the Process Object Tool

Depending on the configuration of the switching device, the Process Object Tool
will create a certain set of process objects into the database. Those process objects
which are going be linked to actual process should be edited to have a station
number, an address and a proper switching state. Otherwise by default all other
attributes should have suitable values for normal operation.

Table 4.3.4-1

The Process Object Tool will create process objects for circuit
breaker, disconnector and earth switch based on the following
list.

Index

Explanation

Purpose

10

Position indication

Used for position indication of the switching device
state open/closed/ intermediate/faulty

11

Open select or open
execute

Depending on the defined control type it is used for
sending Open select or Open execute to the control
unit.

12

Close select or close
execute

Depending on the defined control type it is used for
sending Close select or Close execute to the control
unit.

13

Execute selected or
select open/close and
execute/cancel

Depending on the defined control type it is used for
sending Execute or Select open/close and Execute/
Cancel to the control unit.

14

Cancel command

Used for sending Cancel command to the control unit.

15

External control blocking
(optional)

Receives a control blocking signal from the control unit
and prevents the control actions in the single line
diagram.

16

Open interlocked
(optional)

Receives a control blocking signal for Open command
from the control unit and prevents the Open command
in the single line diagram.

17

Close interlocked
(optional)

Receives a control blocking signal for Close command
from the control unit and prevents the Close command
in the single line diagram.

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

79

4. Switching device

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

4

Table 4.3.4-2

The Process Object Tool will create process objects for truck
based on the following list.

18

Interlocking cause
(optional)

Receives an interlocking cause i.e. an integer value that
represents a reason for an unsuccessful control action.

19

Selected on monitor
(optional)

An internal tag that shows if the switching device is
being selected on different picture(s) or monitor(s).

20

Command event
(optional)

An internal or external tag that shows if the switching
device is right under command sequence.

21

Auxiliary plug state
(optional)

An internal or external tag to indicate if the switching
device is being fully racked out from cubicle and
therefore, it should not be shown in the single line
diagram.

(108)
110

Position indication other
type than double
indication

Receives position indication as single indication (110),
analog input (110) or two single indications (110-open,
108-close)

111-114 Indication for command

termination or indication
for output status
(optional)

With IEC 870-5-101 and -103 indicates whether the
issued command was successful or not.

With DNP 3.0 indicates the status of output object.

115

External control blocking
(optional)

Event recording object (for accurate time stamp) with
RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.

116

Open interlocked
(optional)

Event recording object (for accurate time stamp) with
RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.

117

Close interlocked
(optional)

Event recording object (for accurate time stamp) with
RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.

120

Command event
(optional)

Event recording object (for accurate time stamp) with
RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.

121

Auxiliary plug state
(optional)

Event recording object (for accurate time stamp) with
RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.

(208)
210

Position indication other
type than double
indication

Event recording object (for accurate time stamp) with
RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.

Index

Explanation

Purpose

Index

Explanation

Purpose

30

Position indication

Used for position indication of the truck state open/
closed/ intermediate/faulty

31

Open select or Open
execute

Depending on the defined control type it is used for
sending Open select or Open execute to the control
unit.

32

Close select or Close
execute

Depending on the defined control type it is used for
sending Close select or Close execute to the control
unit.

33

Execute selected or
Select open/close and
Execute/Cancel

Depending on the defined control type it is used for
sending Execute or Select open/close and Execute/
Cancel to the control unit.

34

Cancel command

Used for sending Cancel command to the control unit.

background image

80

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

4.

Switching device

Configuration Guide

Table 4.3.4-3

The Process Object Tool will create process objects for three
state switch based on the follwing list.

35

External control blocking
(optional)

Receives a control blocking signal from the control unit
and prevents the control actions in the single line
diagram.

36

Open interlocked
(optional)

Receives a control blocking signal for Open command
from the control unit and prevents the Open command
in the single line diagram.

37

Close interlocked
(optional)

Receives a control blocking signal for Close command
from the control unit and prevents the Close command
in the single line diagram.

38

Interlocking cause
(optional)

Receives an interlocking cause i.e. an integer value that
represents a reason for an unsuccessful control action.

39

Selected on monitor
(optional)

An internal tag that shows if the truck is being selected
on different picture(s) or monitor(s).

40

Command event
(optional)

An internal or external tag that shows if the truck is right
under command sequence.

(128)
130

Position indication other
type than double
indication

Receives position indication as single indication (110),
analog input (110) or two single indications (110-open,
108-close)

131-
134

Indication for command
termination or indication
for output status
(optional)

With IEC 870-5-101 and -103 indicates whether the
issued command was successful or not.

With DNP 3.0 indicates the status of output object.

135

External control blocking
(optional)

Event recording object (for accurate time stamp) with
RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.

136

Open interlocked
(optional)

Event recording object (for accurate time stamp) with
RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.

137

Close interlocked
(optional)

Event recording object (for accurate time stamp) with
RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.

140

Command event
(optional)

Event recording object (for accurate time stamp) with
RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.

(228)
230

Position indication other
type than double
indication

Event recording object (for accurate time stamp) with
RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.

Index

Explanation

Purpose

Index

Explanation

Purpose

10

Position indication
(disconnector section)

Used for position indication of the three-state switch
state open/closed/ intermediate/faulty

11

Position indication
(earth switch section)

Used for position indication of the three-state switch
state free/earthed/ intermediate/faulty

12

Open select or Open
execute

Depending on the defined control type it is used for
sending Open select or Open execute to the control
unit.

13

Close select or Close
execute

Depending on the defined control type it is used for
sending Close select or Close execute to the control
unit.

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

81

4. Switching device

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

4

14

Free select or Free
execute

Depending on the defined control type it is used for
sending Free select or Free execute to the control unit.

15

Earth select or Earth
execute

Depending on the defined control type it is used for
sending Earth select or Earth execute” to the control
unit.

16

Execute selected or
select open/close and
execute/cancel

Depending on the defined control type it is used for
sending Execute or Select open/close and Execute/
Cancel of disconnector section to the control unit.

17

Cancel selected or select
free/earth and execute/
cancel

Depending on the defined control type it is used for
sending Cancel or Select free/earth and Execute/
Cancel of earth switch section to the control unit.

18

External control blocking
(optional)

Receives a control blocking signal from the control unit
and prevents the control actions in the single line
diagram.

19

Open interlocked
(optional)

Receives a control blocking signal for Open command
from the control unit and prevents the Open command
in the single line diagram.

20

Close interlocked
(optional)

Receives a control blocking signal for Close command
from the control unit and prevents the Close command
in the single line diagram.

21

Free interlocked
(optional)

Receives a control blocking signal for Free command
from the control unit and prevents the Free command in
the single line diagram.

22

Earth interlocked
(optional)

Receives a control blocking signal for Earth command
from the control unit and prevents the Earth command in
the single line diagram.

23

Interlocking cause
(optional)

Receives an interlocking cause for disconnector section
i.e. an integer value that represents a reason for an
unsuccessful control action.

24

Interlocking cause
(optional)

Receives an interlocking cause for earth switch section
i.e. an integer value that represents a reason for an
unsuccessful control action.

25

Selected on monitor
(optional)

An internal tag that shows if the switching device is
being selected on different picture(s) or monitor(s).

26

Command event
(optional)

An internal or external tag that shows if the switching
device is right under command sequence.

(108)
110

Position indication other
type than double
indication

(disconnector section)

Receives position indication as single indication (110),
analog input (110) or two single indications (110-open,
108-close)

(109)
111

Position indication other
type than double
indication

(earth switch section)

Receives position indication as single indication (111),
analog input (111) or two single indications (111-open,
109-close)

112-
117

Indication for command
termination or indication
for output status
(optional)

With IEC 870-5-101 and -103 indicates whether the
issued command was successful or not

With DNP 3.0 indicates the status of output object.

Index

Explanation

Purpose

background image

82

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

4.

Switching device

Configuration Guide

4.3.5.

An Example of the switching device configuration

The configuration of the switching device as a circuit breaker can be given as an
example:

Table 4.3.5-1

Configuration of the switching device as a circuit breaker

118

External control blocking
(optional)

Event recording object (for accurate time stamp) with
RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.

119

Open interlocked
(optional)

Event recording object (for accurate time stamp) with
RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.

120

Close interlocked
(optional)

Event recording object (for accurate time stamp) with
RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.

121

Free interlocked
(optional)

Event recording object (for accurate time stamp) with
RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.

122

Earth interlocked
(optional)

Event recording object (for accurate time stamp) with
RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.

126

Command event
(optional)

Event recording object (for accurate time stamp) with
RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.

(208)
210

Position indication other
type than double
indication

(disconnector section)

Event recording object (for accurate time stamp) with
RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.

(209)
211

Position indication other
type than double
indication

(earth switch section)

Event recording object (for accurate time stamp) with
RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.

Index

Explanation

Purpose

Attribute

Value

Picture Function Name

CB1

STATION_NAME

Eastwick

BAY_NAME

Outgoing HA2

DEVICE_NAME

Q0

SPECIAL_IDENTIFIER_x

N/A

P_OBJECT_LN

ESTHA02Q0

SWITCHING_DEVICE_TYPE

Circuit breaker

SWITCHING_DEVICE_PURPOSE

Main busbar circuit breaker

SWITCH_SECTION

N/A

STATION_TYPE

RED 500 / REX (LON)

INDICATION_TYPE

Double binary

MOTORIZED

Yes

CMD_PARAMETER

N/A

CONTROL_TYPE

Secured control with 4 binary outputs

OUTPUT_STATUS

N/A

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

83

4. Switching device

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

4

4.4.

Application engineering information

4.4.1.

The structure of the switching device

This chapter describes the structure of the switching device. All pictures, form
pictures, help and other text files as well as all database objects are included. The
switching device function is a part of the MV Process of LIB 510 and has a directory
/LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS, and the standard LIB 510 sub-directories INST,
LANG0 and USE.

The installation of the “instance” picture function (small, medium or large sized)
will automatically install “type” picture function (FPI_SSWT) if it does not already
exist. The “type” picture function contains all common programs for the “instance”
picture function and it is only visible at the Picture Editor.

4.4.2.

Pictures

Below there is a list of all switching device pictures and a short description of their
functionality. Dialogs are described in detail earlier in this document. The paths are
/LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/INST

Table 4.4.2-1

Switching device pictures

and /LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/USE

CONTROL_PULSE_LENGTH

N/A

CONTROL_BITS

N/A

DATA_ACQUISITION_UNIT

REF541

FUNCTION_BLOCK

COCB1-B

CHANNEL_NUMBER

N/A

AUTHORIZATION_GROUP

MV_CONTROL

SUFFIX_POSITION

Disabled by Application Settings picture

SYMBOL_WITH_BUTTON

Yes

AUXILIARY_PLUG

No

EVENT_RECORDING

N/A

COMPACT_INSTALLATION

N/A

U_INTERLOCKING

-

U_OTHER_OBJECTS

-

REPRESENTATION

F_REPR/F_BREAK2 (vertical link)

Attribute

Value

Picture

Functionality

FPI_SSWT.PIC

Common programs for all switching device picture functions

FPI_SSWI_S.PIC

Small picture function (1*1) for switching device

FPI_SSWI_M.PIC

Medium picture function (2*2) for switching device

FPI_SSWI_L.PIC

Large picture function (3*3) for switching device

background image

84

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

4.

Switching device

Configuration Guide

Table 4.4.2-2

Switching device pictures

4.4.3.

Language text files

The following Text Translation Tool compatible text files are used by the switching
device. The path is /LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/LANG0

Table 4.4.3-1

Text Translation Tool compatible text files

Picture

Functionality

FPU_SSWA.PIC

Main control dialog

FPU_SSWB.PIC

Control confirmation dialog

FPU_SSWC.PIC

Forced operation dialog

FPU_SSWD.PIC

Alarm state dialog

FPU_SSWE.PIC

Combo box list picture for alarm state dialog

FPU_SSWF.PIC

Blocking dialog

FPU_SSWG.PIC

Normal state setting dialog

FPU_SSWH.PIC

Combo box list picture for normal state setting

FPU_SSWI.PIC

Operation counting dialog

FPU_SSWJ.PIC

Active object messages dialog

FPU_SSWK.PIC

Position simulation dialog

FPU_SSWL.PIC

Auto-reclosing control dialog

FPU_SSWM.PIC

Latched relay reset dialog

FPU_SSWO.PIC

Auxiliary plug question dialog

FORM4FPBI1.PIC

Format picture for printing single indication (BI) type of signals in
MV Process

FORM4FPDB1.PIC

Format picture for printing double indication (DB) type of signals
in MV Process

FORM4FPAI1.PIC

Format picture for printing analog input (AI) type of signals in MV
Process

FORM4FPBO1.PIC

Format picture for printing binary output (BO) type of signals in
MV Process

FORM4FPDO1.PIC

Format picture for printing digital output (DO) type of signals in
MV Process

FORM4FPAO1.PIC

Format picture for printing analog output (AO) type of signals in
MV Process

Text file

Functionality

FPI_SSW.TXT

Text file for the database creation of the picture function

FPU_SSW.TXT

Text file for all switching device dialogs

FORM4FPBI1.TXT

Text file for format picture of printing single indication (BI) type of
signals

FORM4FPDB1.TXT

Text file for format picture of printing double indication (DB) type
of signals

FORM4FPAI1.TXT

Text file for format picture of printing analog input (AI) type of
signals

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

85

4. Switching device

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

4

4.4.4.

Help text files

Below there is a list of the switching device help text files. The path is /LIB4/FMOD/
MVPROCESS/LANG0.

Table 4.4.4-1

Switching device help text files

4.4.5.

Configuration files

The following configuration files are used by the switching device. The path is
LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/INST

Table 4.4.5-1

Switching device configuration files

FORM4FPBO1.TXT

Text file for format picture of printing binary output (BO) type of
signals

FORM4FPDO1.TXT

Text file for format picture of printing digital output (DO) type of
signals

FORM4FPAO1.TXT

Text file for format picture of printing analog output (AO) type of
signals

Text file

Functionality

Help file

Functionality

FPI_SSW.HLP

Picture function installation help file

FPU_SSWA.HLP

Main control dialog help file

FPU_SSWC.HLP

Forced operation dialog help file

FPU_SSWD.HLP

Alarm state dialog help file

FPU_SSWF.HLP

Blocking dialog help file

FPU_SSWG.HLP

Normal state setting dialog help file

FPU_SSWI.HLP

Operation counting dialog help file

FPU_SSWJ.HLP

Active object messages dialog help file

FPU_SSWK.HLP

Position simulation dialog help file

FPU_SSWL.HLP

Auto-reclosing control dialog help file

FPU_SSWM.HLP

Latched relay reset dialog help file

FPU_SSWO.HLP

Auxiliary plug question dialog help file

Configuration file

Functionality

FPI_SSW.DAT

Contains the configuration data for switching device when it is
created, modified or deleted by the configuration tools.

FPI_SSW.POT

Contains the process object definitions for the Process Object
Tool.

FPI_DAU.TXT

Contains the list of data acquisition units that are typically used by
MV Process.

FPI_FB.TXT

Contains the list of RED 500 function blocks that exist at the
moment.

INDEX4_F11.TXT

Selection list of LIB 510 Rev 4.0.3 MV Process picture functions
for the Installation Tool (common for all other picture functions,
too.)

background image

86

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

4.

Switching device

Configuration Guide

4.4.6.

Other text files

The following text files are used by the switching device. The path is /LIB4/FMOD/
MVPROCESS/USE.

Table 4.4.6-1

Switching device text files

4.4.7.

Process objects

The following process objects will be created depending on the type of the switching
device.

Table 4.4.7-1

The manually operated circuit breaker, disconnector or earth
switch will create the following process objects with the
Process Object Tool

Text file

Functionality

FPU_AUTH.TXT

Contains the SCIL code for station authority check. This code is
executed by the main control dialog for the switching device.

FPU_SW_SEL.TXT

Contains the SCIL code for sending Open or Close selection
command to the switching device. This code is executed by the
main control dialog.

FPU_SW_EXE.TXT

Contains the SCIL code for sending Execute command to the
switching device. This code is executed by the main control
dialog.

FPU_SW_CAN.TXT

Contains the SCIL code for sending Cancel command to the
switching device. This code is executed by the main control
dialog.

FPU_UPDATE.TXT

Contains the SCIL code for updating process objects when they
are update-deblocked. This code is executed by the command
procedure FPU_UPDATE.

PATH4_F1.TXT

Contains the path definitions for the MV Process.

Index

Obj. type

Process object

Remarks

Group identifier

10

DB

Position indication

FPQxxxIPOS

19

AI

Object selected on
monitor

Optional

FPQxxxXMEV

21

BI

Auxialiry plug indication

Optional

FPQxxxIAUX

108

BI

Close position indication Indication type 2xBI

FPQxxxEPOS

110

BI or AI

Position indication or
open position indication

Ind. type AI, BI or 2xBI FPQxxxEPOS

110

EVREC

DB

Event recording for
position indication

Indication type DB

RP 570 only

Optional

FPQxxxEPOS

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

87

4. Switching device

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

4

Three characters (xxx) in the group identifier is being replaced by other characters
based on the selection made with configurable attributes
SWITCHING_DEVICE_TYPE and SWITCHING_DEVICE_PURPOSE.

Table 4.4.7-2

The motorized circuit breaker, disconnector or earth switch
will create the following process objects with the Process
Object Tool

121

EVREC

BI

Event recording for
auxiliary plug indication

RP 570 only

Optional

FPQxxxEAUX

208

EVREC

BI

Event recording for close
position indication

Indication type 2xBI

RP 570 only

Optional

FPQxxxEPOS

210

EVREC

BI or AI

Event recording for
position indication or
open position indication

Ind. type AI, BI or 2xBI
RP 570 only

Optional

FPQxxxEPOS

Index

Obj. type

Process object

Remarks

Group identifier

!

Index

Obj. type

Process object

Remarks

Group identifier

10

DB

Position indication

FPQxxxIPOS

11

BO

Open command or Open
execute

Sec. control with
4xBO, 2xBO or 2xDO

FPQxxxCOBC

12

BO

Close command or
Close execute

Sec. control with
4xBO, 2xBO or 2xDO

FPQxxxCOBC

13

BO

Execute command or
Open/Close select and
Execute/Cancel cmd

Sec. control with
4xBO, BO or AO

Direct control with BO

FPQxxxCOBC

14

BO

Cancel command

Sec. control with
4xBO

FPQxxxCOBC

15

BI

External control blocking Optional

FPQxxxIBLK

16

BI

External interlock for
open cmd

Optional

FPQxxxIINH

17

BI

External interlock for
close cmd

Optional

FPQxxxIINH

18

AI

External interlocking
cause

Optional

FPQxxxIINH

19

AI

Object selected on
monitor

Optional

FPQxxxXMEV

20

BI

Object command event

Optional

FPQxxxICEV

21

BI

Auxialiry plug indication Optional

FPQxxxIAUX

108

BI

Close position indication Indication type 2xBI

FPQxxxEPOS

background image

88

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

4.

Switching device

Configuration Guide

Three characters (xxx) in the group identifier is being replaced by other characters
based on the selection made with configurable attributes
SWITCHING_DEVICE_TYPE and SWITCHING_DEVICE_PURPOSE.

Table 4.4.7-3

The manually operated truck will create the following process
objects with the Process Object Tool

110

BI or AI

Position indication or
open position indication

Ind. type AI, BI or 2xBI FPQxxxEPOS

110

EVREC

DB

Event recording for
position indication

Indication type DB

RP 570 only

Optional

FPQxxxEPOS

111-114

TERM/OS

Command termination
indication for output
signals

IEC 870-5-101 and -
103 only

Optional

FPQxxxTOBC

115

EVREC

BI

Event recording for
external control blocking

Only RP570

Optional

FPQxxxEBLK

116

EVREC

BI

Event recording for
external interlock for
open cmd

Only RP570

Optional

FPQxxxEINH

117

EVREC

BI

Event recording for
external interlock for
close cmd

Only RP570

Optional

FPQxxxEINH

120

EVREC

BI

Event recording for
object command event

RP 570 only

Optional

FPQxxxECEV

121

EVREC

BI

Event recording for
auxiliary plug indication

RP 570 only

Optional

FPQxxxEAUX

208

EVREC

BI

Event recording for
close position indication

Indication type 2xBI
RP 570 only
Optional

FPQxxxEPOS

210

EVREC

BI or AI

Event recording for
position indication or
open position indication

Ind. type AI, BI or 2xBI
RP 570 only Optional

FPQxxxEPOS

252

AI

Calculated interlocking
cause

Optional

FPQxxxIINH

Index

Obj. type

Process object

Remarks

Group identifier

!

Index

Obj. type

Process object

Remarks

Group identifier

30

DB

Position indication

FPQT01IPOS

39

AI

Object selected on
monitor

Optional

FPQT01XMEV

128

BI

Close position indication Indication type 2xBI

FPQT01EPOS

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

89

4. Switching device

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

4

Table 4.4.7-4

The motorized truck will create the following process objects
with the Process Object Tool

130

BI or AI

Position indication or
open position indication

Ind. type AI, BI or 2xBI FPQT01EPOS

130

EVREC

DB

Event recording for
position indication

Indication type DB

RP 570 only

Optional

FPQT01EPOS

228

EVREC

BI

Event recording for
close position indication

Indication type 2xBI

RP 570 only

Optional

FPQT01EPOS

230

EVREC

BI or AI

Event recording for
position indication or
open position indication

Ind. type AI, BI or 2xBI
RP 570 only

Optional

FPQT01EPOS

Index

Obj. type

Process object

Remarks

Group identifier

Index

Obj. type

Process object

Remarks

Group identifier

30

DB

Position indication

FPQT01IPOS

31

BO

Open command or Open
execute

Sec. control with
4xBO, 2xBO or 2xDO

FPQT01COBC

32

BO

Close command or
Close execute

Sec. control with
4xBO, 2xBO or 2xDO

FPQT01COBC

33

BO

Execute command or
Open/Close select and
Execute/Cancel cmd

Sec. control with
4xBO, BO or AO
Direct control with BO

FPQT01COBC

34

BO

Cancel command

Sec. control with
4xBO

FPQT01COBC

35

BI

External control blocking Optional

FPQT01IBLK

36

BI

External interlock for
open cmd

Optional

FPQT01IINH

37

BI

External interlock for
close cmd

Optional

FPQT01IINH

38

AI

External interlocking
cause

Optional

FPQT01IINH

39

AI

Object selected on
monitor

Optional

FPQT01XMEV

40

BI

Object command event

Optional

FPQT01ICEV

128

BI

Close position indication Indication type 2xBI

FPQT01EPOS

130

BI or AI

Position indication or
open position indication

Ind. type AI, BI or 2xBI FPQT01EPOS

130

EVREC

DB

Event recording for
position indication

Indication type DB

RP 570 only

Optional

FPQT01EPOS

background image

90

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

4.

Switching device

Configuration Guide

Table 4.4.7-5

The manually operated three-state switch will create the
following process objects with the Process Object Tool

131-134 TERM

Command termination
indication for output
signals

IEC 870-5-101 and -
103 only

Optional

FPQxxxTOBC

135

EVREC

BI

Event recording for
external control blocking

Only RP570

Optional

FPQT01EBLK

136

EVREC

BI

Event recording for
external interlock for
open cmd

Only RP570

Optional

FPQT01EINH

137

EVREC

BI

Event recording for
external interlock for
close cmd

Only RP570

Optional

FPQT01EINH

140

EVREC

BI

Event recording for
object command event

RP 570 only

Optional

FPQT01ECEV

228

EVREC

BI

Event recording for
close position indication

Indication type 2xBI
RP 570 only
Optional

FPQT01EPOS

230

EVREC

BI or AI

Event recording for
position indication or
open position indication

Ind. type AI, BI or 2xBI

RP 570 only
Optional

FPQT01EPOS

251

AI

Calculated interlocking
cause

Optional

FPQT01IINH

Index

Obj. type

Process object

Remarks

Group identifier

Index

Obj. type

Process object

Remarks

Group identifier

10

DB

Position indication

Disconnector section

FPQ301IPOS

11

DB

Position indication

Earth switch section

FPQ301IPOS

25

AI

Object selected on
monitor

Optional

FPQ301XMEV

108

BI

Close position indication Indication type 2xBI

Disconnector section

FPQ301EPOS

109

BI

Earth position indication Indication type 2xBI

Earth switch section

FPQ301EPOS

110

BI or AI

Position indication or
open position indication

Ind. type AI, BI or 2xBI

Disconnector section

FPQ301EPOS

111

BI or AI

Position indication or
free position indication

Ind. type AI, BI or 2xBI

Earth switch section

FPQ301EPOS

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

91

4. Switching device

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

4

Table 4.4.7-6

The motorized three-state switch will create the following
process objects with the Process Object Tool

110

EVREC

DB

Event recording for
position indication

Indication type DB

RP 570 only

Optional

FPQ301EPOS

111

EVREC

DB

Event recording for
position indication

Indication type DB

RP 570 only

Optional

FPQ301EPOS

208

EVREC

BI

Event recording for
close position indication

Indication type 2xBI

RP 570 only

Optional

FPQ301EPOS

209

EVREC

BI

Event recording for
earth position indication

Indication type 2xBI

RP 570 only

Optional

FPQ301EPOS

210

EVREC

BI or AI

Event recording for
position indication or
open position indication

Ind. type AI, BI or 2xBI

RP 570 only

Optional

FPQ301EPOS

211

EVREC

BI or AI

Event recording for
position indication or
free position indication

Ind. type AI, BI or 2xBI

RP 570 only

Optional

FPQ301EPOS

Index

Obj. type

Process object

Remarks

Group identifier

Index

Obj. type

Process object

Remarks

Group identifier

10

DB

Position indication

Disconnector section

FPQ301IPOS

11

DB

Position indication

Earth switch section

FPQ301IPOS

12

BO

Open command or
Open execute

Sec. control with
4xBO, 2xBO or 2xDO

FPQ301COBC

13

BO

Close command or
Close execute

Sec. control with
4xBO, 2xBO or 2xDO

FPQ301COBC

14

BO

Free command or Free
execute

Sec. control with
4xBO, 2xBO or 2xDO

FPQ301COBC

15

BO

Earth command or
Earth execute

Sec. control with
4xBO, 2xBO or 2xDO

FPQ301COBC

16

BO

Execute command or
open/close select and
execute/ cancel cmd

Sec. control with
4xBO, BO or AO

Direct control with BO

FPQ301COBC

background image

92

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

4.

Switching device

Configuration Guide

17

BO

Cancel command or
free/earth select and
execute/cancel cmd

Sec. control with
4xBO, BO or AO

Direct control with BO

FPQ301COBC

18

BI

External control
blocking

Optional

FPQ301IBLK

19

BI

External interlock for
open cmd

Optional

FPQ301IINH

20

BI

External interlock for
close cmd

Optional

FPQ301IINH

21

BI

External interlock for
free cmd

Optional

FPQ301IINH

22

BI

External interlock for
earth cmd

Optional

FPQ301IINH

23

AI

External inter-locking
cause

Optional

FPQ301IINH

24

AI

External interlocking
cause

Optional

FPQ301IINH

25

AI

Object selected on
monitor

Optional

FPQ301XMEV

26

BI

Object command event Optional

FPQ301ICEV

108

BI

Close position indication Indication type 2xBI

FPQ301EPOS

109

BI

Earth position indication Indication type 2xBI

FPQ301EPOS

110

BI or AI

Position indication or
open position indication

Ind. type AI, BI or 2xBI FPQ301EPOS

111

BI or AI

Position indication or
free position indication

Ind. type AI, BI or 2xBI FPQ301EPOS

110

EVREC

DB

Event recording for
position indication

Indication type DB RP
570 only

Optional

FPQ301EPOS

111

EVREC

DB

Event recording for
position indication

Indication type DB RP
570 only Optional

FPQ301EPOS

112-117 TERM

Command termination
indication for output
signals

IEC 870-5-101 and -
103 only

Optional

FPQxxxTOBC

118

EVREC

BI

Event recording for
external control blocking

Only RP570

Optional

FPQ301EBLK

119

EVREC

BI

Event recording for
external interlock for
open cmd

Only RP570

Optional

FPQ301EINH

120

EVREC

BI

Event recording for
external interlock for
close cmd

Only RP570

Optional

FPQ301EINH

Index

Obj. type

Process object

Remarks

Group identifier

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

93

4. Switching device

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

4

4.4.8.

Scale objects

At the first installation the circuit breaker creates the scale 1_1 (linear 1:1 scale). For
indication type of analog input the installation will also create the scale
FPU_1_1000 (linear 1:1000 scale).

4.4.9.

Command procedures

At the first installation the switching device creates the command procedure
FPU_UPDATE, which updates process objects when they are update-deblocked.
This feature is similar to the LIB 500 Blocking List function.

For the indication type of single indication (BI), the installation will create the
command procedure FPU_BI2DB, which updates position indication double binary
from a binary input.

For the indication type of an analog input (AI), the installation will create the
command procedure FPU_AI2DB, which updates position indication double binary
from an analog input.

121

EVREC

BI

Event recording for
external interlock for
free cmd

Only RP570

Optional

FPQ301EINH

122

EVREC

BI

Event recording for
external interlock for
earth cmd

Only RP570

Optional

FPQ301EINH

126

EVREC

BI

Event recording for
object command event

RP 570 only

Optional

FPQ301ECEV

208

EVREC

BI

Event recording for
close position indication

Indication type 2xBI

RP 570 only

Optional

FPQ301EPOS

209

EVREC

BI

Event recording for
earth position indication

Indication type 2xBI

RP 570 only

Optional

FPQ301EPOS

210

EVREC

BI or AI

Event recording for
position indication or
open position indication

Ind. type AI, BI or 2xBI

RP 570 only

Optional

FPQ301EPOS

211

EVREC

BI or AI

Event recording for
position indication or
free position indication

Ind. type AI, BI or 2xBI

RP 570 only

Optional

FPQ301EPOS

251

AI

Calculated interlocking
cause

Optional

FPQ301IINH

252

AI

Calculated interlocking
cause

Optional

FPQ301IINH

Index

Obj. type

Process object

Remarks

Group identifier

background image

94

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

4.

Switching device

Configuration Guide

For the indication type of two single indication (2xBI), the installation will create
the command procedures FPU_2BI2DB and FPU_SETDB, which are used to
update position indication double binary from two binary inputs.

4.4.10.

Event channels

For the indication type of a single indication (BI), the installation will create the
event channel FPU_BI2DB, which is set to activate command procedure
FPU_BI2DB.

For the indication type of an analog input (AI), the installation will create the event
channel FPU_AI2DB, which is set to activate the command procedure
FPU_AI2DB.

For the indication type of two single indications (2xBI), the installation will create
the event channel FPU_2BI2DB, which is set to activate the command procedure
FPU_2BI2DB.

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

95

5. Measurements

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

5

5. Measurements

5.1.

Communication support

• SPACOM/SPANET (SPA)

• SPACOM/SRIO (ANSI)

• RED 500/REX (LON)

• RTU2xx (RP570)

• RTU2xx/FTABs (RP570)

• IEC 60870-5-101

• IEC 60870-5-103

• DNP 3.0

• MODBUS RTU

5.2.

Picture function installation

This document describes the picture function of the MV Process measurement. The
picture function for Measurement is found in the directory /LIB4/FMOD/
MVPROCESS/INST and it should be installed by using LIB4 installation
procedures (LIB4/LIB510/MV Process 2.x/Measurement). Configuration of this
picture function shall be performed by using standard configuration tools such as:

1. Standard Configuration Tool

2. Representation Tool
3. Process Object Tool

5.2.1.

Environmental requirements

In order for the measurement to have full functionality, the following components
need to be installed:

• Base

• Station (*)

• Bay (*)

(*) It is also possible to configure the measurement to operate without the station and
bay picture function. By default, however, the measurement picture function
requires them to be installed.

5.2.2.

Installation

There are three different sizes (small, medium and large) of each measurement type
(measurement without a field, with a horizontal field and with a vertical bar
presentation).

The size of the small measurement without field is 16 x 20 pixels (1 x 1
semigraphical block), the medium picture function is 32 x 40 pixels (2 x 2
semigraphical blocks) and the large picture function is 48 x 60 pixels (3 x 3
semigraphical blocks). The button frame is drawn out of this area.

1MRS751887-MEN

background image

96

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

5.

Measurements

Configuration Guide

As a minimum, the measurement with a horizontal field requires the following area:
the small picture function 80 x 20 pixels (5 x 1 semigraphical blocks), the medium
picture function 96 x 40 pixels (6 x 2 semigraphical blocks) and the large picture
function 112 x 60 pixels (7 x 3 semigraphical blocks). The size in a vertical direction
depends on how many measurements are connected to the picture function. The
button frame is drawn out of this area.

The size of the small measurement with a vertical bar presentation is 16 x 80 pixels
(1 x 4 semigraphical blocks), the medium picture function is 32 x 100 pixels (2 x 5
semigraphical blocks) and the large picture function is 48 x 120 pixels (3 x 6
semigraphical blocks). The size in a horizontal direction depends on how many
measurements are connected to the picture function. The button frame is drawn out
of this area.

It is

QRW recommended to use the medium size of the picture function within the

same bay with small or large picture functions because of the different snap of the
feeder lines.

Fig. 5.2.2.-1 presents all three different types of measurement picture functions in
typical installations.

)LJ

7\SLFDOPHDVXUHPHQWLQVWDOODWLRQV

Table 5.2.2-1

During the installation, the following information has to be
given

5.3.

Picture function configuration

5.3.1.

Preliminary work

Before the configuration of the picture functions can start, some preparatory
configurations are required (i.e. configurations that are required only once). The
usage of object identification (OI) attribute has to be settled, the naming convention
of the process object has to be decided, and the translation of the signal texts into
local language has to be performed. For more information, please refer to the
General chapter in this MV Process Configuration Manual.

5.3.2.

Configuration with the Standard Configuration Tool

It is important to configure attributes in the order of appearance since setting one
attribute may enable/disable and/or reset another attribute later.

The measurement picture function has the following attributes to configure with the
Standard Configuration Tool:

Attribute

Meaning

Default

Picture Function Name

Name of the picture function within the picture

-

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

97

5. Measurements

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

5

Table 5.3.2-1

Configurable measurement picture function attributes

(*) Configurable attribute exists only for the measurement with a horizontal field
(**) Configurable attribute exists only for the measurement with bar presentation

Attribute

Meaning

Default

STATION_NAME

Name of the substation

-

BAY_NAME

Name of the bay

-

DEVICE_NAME

Name of the device

-

SPECIAL_IDENTIFIER_’nr’

Name of the special identifier
‘nr’

Not configurable

P_OBJECT_LN

Logical name of database
process objects

-

STATION_TYPE

The type of control device &
protocol

RED 500/REX (LON)

TYPE_MEAS_’number’

The type of the measurement

None

FOLDER_’number_TITLE

Abbreviation of the
measurement

-

MEAS_’number_DECIMALS

Decimals used for presenting
the value

0

(*/**) SHOW_MEAS_´number’

Selection if the value is shown
on the display

No

(*)
SHOW_MEAS_´number’AS_BAR

Selection if the value is shown
with digits or bar

Digits

(*) SHOW_MEAS_’number’_UNIT

Selection if the measurement
is shown with unit

Without unit

DATA_ACQUISITION_UNIT_’num
ber’

Data acquisition unit towards
process

-

FUNCTION_BLOCK_’number’

Function block of data
acquisition unit

-

AUTHORIZATION_GROUP

The name of the authorization
group

MV_CONTROL

SYMBOL_WITH_BUTTON

Selection of symbol with or
without a button

With button

EVENT_RECORDING

Process objects for event
recording with RP 570

No process objects

U_OTHER_OBJECTS

Program to define other
objects

-

background image

98

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

5.

Measurements

Configuration Guide

STATION_NAME

A selector type of an editable combo box to select or
enter the name of the substation. By default, the
maximum length of the text is 9 characters. The selection
list shows up to ten latest entries.

The configurable attribute is being read directly from the
process object database if there is any process object
linked to the selected measurement. Therefore, the
configurable attribute within a picture function has
meaning only when the process objects have not been
created.

This text will be used as a substation identifier of the
measurement objects on event list, alarm list, printout,
database query, etc. It is very important that this text is
similar to all objects within the same substation.

BAY_NAME

A selector type of an editable combo box to select or
enter the name of the bay (feeder). By default, the
maximum length of the text is 14 characters. The
selection list shows up to ten latest entries.

The configurable attribute is being read directly from the
process object database if there is any process object
linked to the selected measurement. Therefore, the
configurable attribute within a picture function has
meaning only when the process objects have not been
created.

This text will be used as a bay (feeder) identifier of the
measurement objects on event list, alarm list, printout,
database query, etc. It is very important that this text is
similar to all objects within the same bay (feeder).

DEVICE_NAME

A selector type of an editable combo box to select or
enter the name (identifier) of the measurement. By
default, the maximum length of the text is 5 characters.
The selection list shows up to ten latest entries.

The configurable attribute is being read directly from the
process object database if there is any process object
linked to the selected measurement. Therefore, the
configurable attribute within a picture function has
meaning only when the process objects have not been
created.

This text will be used as an identifier of the measurement
on event list, alarm list, printout, database query, etc.

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

99

5. Measurements

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

5

SPECIAL_IDENTIFIER_’numbe
r’

A selector type of an editable combo box to select or
enter a special identifier of the measurement. By default,
this identifier is not in use, i.e. it is not configurable with
the SCT. The selection list shows up to ten latest entries.

The configurable attribute is being read directly from the
process object database if there is any process object
linked to the selected measurement. Therefore, the
configurable attribute within a picture function has
meaning only when the process objects have not been
created.

This text will be used as an additional identifier of the
measurement on event list, alarm list, printout, database
query, etc.

P_OBJECT_LN

The logical name of the database process objects. The
maximum length of the text is 10 characters. Allowed
characters are the letters A-Z, all digits and the
underscore (_).

The logical names of process objects have to be unique
throughout the entire system, that is, different objects
cannot have the same logical name. Therefore, it is very
important to have a proper naming convention for the
process object database.

Certain naming convention is also required to speed up
the opening time of the main dialogs. With the predefined
naming convention it is possible to collect all station and
bay related database objects without searching through
the complete database. Therefore, it is advised to use the
following naming convention:

The first three characters identify the substation

The following four characters identify the bay

The last three characters can be freely used to identify
the source of the signal i.e. device, unit, etc.

The following list is presented as an example of the
proper naming convention within one bay. The station
name is Green Bay, and the bay name is HA12
Downtown:

GRB, station
GRBHA12BAY, bay
GRBHA12Q0, circuit breaker Q0
GRBHA12Q1, truck Q1
GRBHA12Q9, earth switch Q9
GRBHA12CT, measurements/current transformer
GRBHA12VT, measurements/voltage transformer
GRBHA12ALA, alarm indicator
GRBHA12AR, auto-reclosing tag
GRBHA12TRP, tripping tag
GRBHA12R1, feeder terminal or protection unit 1
GRBHA12R2, feeder terminal or protection unit 2

background image

100

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

5.

Measurements

Configuration Guide

GRBHA12LS1, line segment 1 of busbar coloring
GRBHA12LS2, line segment 2 of busbar coloring
GRBHA12LS3, line segment 3 of busbar coloring
GRBHA12LI, line indicator of busbar coloring

If some other naming convention than 3+4 is used, it
usually takes a longer time to open the main control
dialogs unless the optional named program
U_OTHER_OBJECTS is being utilized to introduce other
required process objects.

STATION_TYPE

A selector type of a combo box to select station type of
the objects.

The database process objects will be created for the
station type defined here. The list of supported protocols
is as follows:

SPACOM / SPANET (SPA)
SPACOM / SRIO (ANSI)
RED 500 / REx (LON)
RTU2xx (RP570)
RTU2xx / FTABs (RP570)
IEC 870-5-101
IEC 870-5-103
DNP 3.0
MODBUS RTU

If SPACOM device has been connected to the LON-bus
via LON-SPA Gateway (LSG), the station type should be
selected as SPACOM/SPANET (SPA).

If REx device (e.g. REF 541) with LON communication is
used, the station type should be selected as RED 500/
REx (LON).

TYPE_MEAS_’number’

The type of the measurement. The type identifies the
measurement for the creation of database (indexes,
object texts, units ..). In case no suitable alternative can
be found, the indexes 27..37 can be used. The indexes
27 .. 32 are for user-defined analog (AI) objects, and the
indexes 33 .. 37 are for user-defined pulse counter (PC)
objects.

NOTE!

THE DATABASE OBJECTS WILL NOT BE CREATED
UNTIL THE PROCESS OBJECT TOOL HAS BEEN
USED TO CREATE THEM.

FOLDER_’number’_TITLE

The name of the measurement to be shown in the
measurement dialog. Attribute is optional, if it is not given,
the measurement is referred to as "Meas. ’number’" in the
dialog.

If the configurable attribute TYPE_MEAS_’number’ is not
configured, this attribute is being disabled, and the value
has no meaning.

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

101

5. Measurements

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

5

MEAS_’number’_DECIMALS

The number of decimals used when presenting the
measurement value in the dialog.

If the configurable attribute TYPE_MEAS_’number’ is not
configured, this attribute is being disabled, and the value
has no meaning.

(*/**)
SHOW_MEAS_’number’

States if the measurement is to be shown by default when
the picture is opened.

If the configurable attribute TYPE_MEAS_’number’ is not
configured, this attribute is being disabled, and the value
has no meaning.

(*)
SHOW_MEAS_’number’_AS_B
AR

Shows the measurement as a bar when it is shown.

If the configurable attribute TYPE_MEAS_’number’ is not
configured, this attribute is being disabled, and the value
has no meaning.

(*)
SHOW_MEAS_’number’_UNIT

Shows the measurements unit, when it is shown. The unit
is read from the database.

If the configurable attribute TYPE_MEAS_’number’ is not
configured, this attribute is being disabled, and the value
has no meaning.

DATA_ACQUISITION_UNIT_’nu
mber’

A selector type of an editable combo box to select the
data acquisition unit of the measurement ’number’.

This selection is not obligatory if the signal engineering is
done by other means than SigTOOL.

The data acquisition unit, i.e. the device or module which
connects the signals from the process to the
communication system, can be defined either by selecting
the unit from the selection list and editing it or just by
entering the type designation.

If there are more than one data acquisition unit of the
same type within the bay, it is necessary to differentiate
units by using additional characters. As an example, the
data acquisition units for a bay with SPAJ 140 C, SPAC
535 C3 and SACO 64D4:

SPAJ 140 C
SPCJ4D29_1
SPAC 535 C3
SPCJ4D29_2
SPTO6D3 (or SPTO6D3_1)
SACO 64D4
SACO16D2_1
SACO16D2_2
SACO16D2_3
SACO16D2_4

The additional characters should always start with the
underscore (_) and be followed by an unit distinction
character ranging from 1- 9, 0, A - Z. If there is no more
than one data acquisition unit of the same type within the
bay, the additional characters can be left out.

background image

102

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

5.

Measurements

Configuration Guide

FUNCTION_BLOCK_’number’

A selector type of an editable combo box to select the
function block (software module) of data acquisition unit
that handles the signals for this picture function. If the
configurable attribute
DATA_ACQUISITION_UNIT’number’ does not specify
such a device that contains function blocks, this attribute
is being disabled, and the value has no meaning.

This selection is not obligatory if the signal engineering is
done by other means than SigTOOL.

Devices such as REF 54x, REM 54x, REC 52x and REC
53x utilize function blocks for configuration. If the name of
the function block does not exist in the selection list (a
new one), you may enter it yourself!

AUTHORIZATION_GROUP

A selector type of an editable combo box to select the
authorization group for the object. The maximum length of
the text is 63 characters. The given text has to be usable
as a SCIL list attribute name (see the SCIL manual). The
contents of the selection list is taken from the existing
authorization groups.

NOTE! The name may not be composed of two letters
followed by a number.

The attribute needs to be defined, if the object is wanted
to be included in some authorization group. The
authorization level of each user in this group can be
defined afterwards by the system manager with User
Management pictures.

SYMBOL_WITH_BUTTON

An ON/OFF type of a toggle button to select whether the
control dialog(s) can be opened for the measurements.

By default the symbol is provided with an active button.

EVENT_RECORDING

An ON/OFF type of a toggle button to select whether
there is a need for event recording process objects with
the RP 570 protocol. If STATION_TYPE is other than RTU
2xx or RTU 2xx/FTABs, the configurable attribute is being
disabled, and the value has no meaning.

With the RP 570 the time stamp from process device
comes into the event recording process object. If no
accurate time stamp is needed or available, or the device
is emulating the RP 570 without an event recording
possibility, do not set this attribute ON.

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

103

5. Measurements

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

5

U_OTHER_OBJECTS

An optional named program which is designed for the
optimization and/or customization purposes.

With this program it is possible to predefine logical names
for certain signals that are required by the main control
dialog. By hard coding this information the opening time
of the main dialog can be speeded up since there is no
need to look for the corresponding objects from the
process object database. It is recommended to predefine
the objects with the help of this program if the size of the
process object database exceeds 10000 process objects.
Signals to predefine:

STATION_LN

The logical name of the station local/remote-switch. The
STATION picture function creates this process object by
default. Only one logical name is allowed.

BAY_LN

The logical name of the bay local/remote-switch, blocking
printout, external interlocking (hardware and software
switch) and internal interlocking. The BAY picture function
creates these process objects by default. Only one logical
name is allowed.

Syntax for predefinations:
Not predefined; search for process object(s) done by
dialog
""
No process object(s) available and it is not required
"NONE"
Logical name (LN) for process objects
"GRB"

As an example, a typical predefinition for the switching
device.

; The logical name (LN) for other objects that

are

; being required by the main control dialogs can

be

; defined with the help of this program. For

syntax/

; selections, please refer to the installation

help!

;

; This program is for optimization/customization

; purposes and therefore, it is not obligatory.

The

; control dialog is automatically collecting the

same

; information from the database if it is not

defined

; here.

@’.ID’_OTHER_OBJECTS = LIST(-

STATION_LN = "GRB",-

BAY_LN = "GRB_HA12BAY")

background image

104

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

5.

Measurements

Configuration Guide

5.3.3.

Configuration with the Representation Tool

The measurement picture function has the following attributes to configure with the
Representation Tool:

Table 5.3.3-1

Configurable attributes

Table 5.3.3-2

The measurement requires a selector and a symbol for the
following conditions

By default, there are nine sets of symbols in three different sizes for measurement
picture function. These default representations are shown below as medium sized.
Please note that in the actual system the symbol representing selector 3 is blinking
to draw attention.

Fig. 5.3.3.-1 presents the circle symbol for the measurement.

Attribute

Meaning

Default

REPRESENTATION

Selection of symbol set
shown in the picture

F_REPR/F_MEAS1(filled circle)

REPRESENTATION

The name of the representation (symbol set) used for the

measurement indication. The predefined representation can
be selected from the selector type of list called Library
Representations.

If there is no appropriate symbol set, it is possible to make
and use a representation set of your own. In that case one of
the existing representation sets can be copied to a
representation file ../APLMOD4/USE/ APLMOD4.PIR under
the application and modify each representation as needed. If
object specific representations are needed, the
representation set (under the application) can be renamed
and the name of the representation can be written into the
selector with the logical path.

For example: F_REPR/MY_SET

Selector

Condition

Default color

1

Selected on monitor

white

2

Update blocked or obsolete value

magenta

3

Unacknowledged alarm

red, blinking

4

Acknowledged alarm

red

5

Warning or blockings (alarms, events, printouts
or reprocessing)

yellow

6

Manually entered

cyan

7

Normal state

green

8

Substituted

Dark blue

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

105

5. Measurements

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

5

Table 5.3.3-3

Circle symbol for the measurement

)LJ

&LUFOHV\PEROIRUWKHPHDVXUHPHQW

Fig. 5.3.3.-2- Fig. 5.3.3.-7 present voltage transducer symbols for the measurement.

Table 5.3.3-4

Voltage transducer 1 for the measurement

)LJ

9ROWDJHWUDQVGXFHUIRUWKHPHDVXUHPHQW

Table 5.3.3-5

Voltage transducer 2 for the measurement

)LJ

9ROWDJHWUDQVGXFHUIRUWKHPHDVXUHPHQWW

Symbol

Size

F_REPR/F_MEAS1

small

F_REPR/F_MEASM1

medium

F_REPR/F_MEASL1

large

Symbol

Size

F_REPR/F_MEAS2

small

F_REPR/F_MEASM2

medium

F_REPR/F_MEASL2

large

Symbol

Size

F_REPR/F_MEAS3

small

F_REPR/F_MEASM3

medium

F_REPR/F_MEASL3

large

background image

106

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

5.

Measurements

Configuration Guide

Table 5.3.3-6

Voltage transducer 3 for the measurement

)LJ

9ROWDJHWUDQVGXFHUIRUWKHPHDVXUHPHQWW

Table 5.3.3-7

Voltage transducer 4 for the measurement

)LJ

9ROWDJHWUDQVGXFHUIRUWKHPHDVXUHPHQW

Table 5.3.3-8

Voltage transducer 5 for the measurement

)LJ

9ROWDJHWUDQVGXFHUIRUWKHPHDVXUHPHQW

Symbol

Size

F_REPR/F_MEAS4

small

F_REPR/F_MEASM4

medium

F_REPR/F_MEASL4

large

Symbol

Size

F_REPR/F_MEAS5

small

F_REPR/F_MEASM5

medium

F_REPR/F_MEASL5

large

Symbol

Size

F_REPR/F_MEAS6

small

F_REPR/F_MEASM6

medium

F_REPR/F_MEASL6

large

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

107

5. Measurements

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

5

Table 5.3.3-9

Voltage transducer 6 for the measurement

)LJ

9ROWDJHWUDQVGXFHUIRUWKHPHDVXUHPHQW

Fig. 5.3.3.-8 - Fig. 5.3.3.-10 present miscallenous symbols for the measurement.

Table 5.3.3-10 Current symbol for the measurement

)LJ

&XUUHQWV\PEROIRUWKHPHDVXUHPHQW

Table 5.3.3-11 Voltage symbol for the measurement

)LJ

9ROWDJHV\PEROIRUWKHPHDVXUHPHQW

Symbol

Size

F_REPR/F_MEAS7

small

F_REPR/F_MEASM7

medium

F_REPR/F_MEASL7

large

Symbol

Size

F_REPR/F_MEAS8

small

F_REPR/F_MEASM8

medium

F_REPR/F_MEASL8

large

Symbol

Size

F_REPR/F_MEAS9

small

F_REPR/F_MEASM9

medium

F_REPR/F_MEASL9

large

background image

108

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

5.

Measurements

Configuration Guide

Table 5.3.3-12 Active power symbol for the measurement

)LJ $FWLYHSRZHUV\PEROIRUWKHPHDVXUHPHQW

Table 5.3.3-13 Reactive power symbol for the measurement

)LJ 5HDFWLYHSRZHUV\PEROIRUWKHPHDVXUHPHQW

Fig. 5.3.3.-12- Fig. 5.3.3.-15 present current transducer symbols for the
measurement.

Table 5.3.3-14 Current transducer 1 for the measurement

)LJ &XUUHQWWUDQVGXFHUIRUWKHPHDVXUHPHQW

Symbol

Size

F_REPR/F_MEAS10

small

F_REPR/F_MEASM10

medium

F_REPR/F_MEASL10

large

Symbol

Size

F_REPR/F_MEAS11

small

F_REPR/F_MEASM11

medium

F_REPR/F_MEASL11

large

Symbol

Size

F_REPR/F_MEAS12

small

F_REPR/F_MEASM12

medium

F_REPR/F_MEASL12

large

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

109

5. Measurements

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

5

Table 5.3.3-15 Current transducer 2 for the measurement

)LJ &XUUHQWWUDQVGXFHUIRUWKHPHDVXUHPHQW

Table 5.3.3-16 Current transducer 3 for the measurement

)LJ &XUUHQWWUDQVGXFHUIRUWKHPHDVXUHPHQW

Table 5.3.3-17 Current transducer 4 for the measurement

)LJ &XUUHQWWUDQVGXFHUIRUWKHPHDVXUHPHQW

Symbol

Size

F_REPR/F_MEAS13

small

F_REPR/F_MEASM13

medium

F_REPR/F_MEASL13

large

Symbol

Size

F_REPR/F_MEAS14

small

F_REPR/F_MEASM14

medium

F_REPR/F_MEASL14

large

Symbol

Size

F_REPR/F_MEAS15

small

F_REPR/F_MEASM15

medium

F_REPR/F_MEASL15

large

background image

110

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

5.

Measurements

Configuration Guide

5.3.4.

Configuration with Process Object Tool

Depending on the measurement configuration, the Process Object Tool will create a
certain set of process objects in the database. Those process objects which are going
to be linked to the actual process should be edited to have a station number, an
address and a proper switching state. Otherwise, by default, all other attributes
should have suitable values for normal operation.

Table 5.3.4-1

Process objects

Index Explanation

Purpose

10

Current L1

Current measurement on phase L1

11

Current L2

Current measurement on phase L2

12

Current L3

Current measurement on phase L3

13

Neutral current I0

Neutral current measurement

14

Directional neutral current Ij

Directional neutral current measurement

15

Maximum demand I15min

Current measurement of 15 minutes
maximum demand

16

Voltage U12

Phase to phase voltage measurement on
phases L1-L2

17

Voltage U23

Phase to phase voltage measurement on
phases L2-L3

18

Voltage U31

Phase to phase voltage measurement on
phases L3-L1

19

Residual voltage U0

Residual voltage measurement

20

Active power P

Active power measurement

21

Reactive power Q

Reactive power measurement

22

Apparent power S

Apparent power measurement

23

Power factor Cosj

Power factor measurement

24

Frequency f

Frequency measurement

25

Harmonic distortion

Harmonic distortion measurement

26

Temperature

Temperature measurement

27-32 User-defined measurement

Any analog input (AI) type of user-defined
measurement

33-37 User-defined pulse counter

Any pulse counter (PC) type of user-defined
measurement

38

Active energy (kWh)

Active energy counter for kWh

39

Active energy (MWh)

Active energy counter for MWh

40

Active energy (GWh)

Active energy counter for GWh

41

Reversed active energy (kWh)

Reversed active energy counter for kWh

42

Reversed active energy (MWh)

Reversed active energy counter for MWh

43

Reversed active energy (GWh)

Reversed active energy counter for GWh

44

Reactive energy (kvarh)

Reactive energy counter for kvarh

45

Reactive energy (Mvarh)

Reactive energy counter for Mvarh

46

Reactive energy (Gvarh)

Reactive energy counter for Gvarh

47

Reversed reactive energy (kvarh)

Reversed reactive energy counter for kvarh

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

111

5. Measurements

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

5

5.3.5.

An example of the measurement configuration

The configuration of the measurement with a horizontal field can be given as an
example:

48

Reversed reactive energy (Mvarh)

Reversed reactive energy counter for Mvarh

49

Reversed reactive energy (Gvarh)

Reversed reactive energy counter for Gvarh

110

Current L1
(optional)

Event recording object (for accurate time
stamp) with RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.

111

Current L2
(optional)

Event recording object (for accurate time
stamp) with RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.

112

Current L3
(optional)

Event recording object (for accurate time
stamp) with RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.

113

Neutral current I0
(optional)

Event recording object (for accurate time
stamp) with RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.

114

Directional neutral current Ij
(optional)

Event recording object (for accurate time
stamp) with RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.

115

Maximum demand I15min
(optional)

Event recording object (for accurate time
stamp) with RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.

116

Voltage U12
(optional)

Event recording object (for accurate time
stamp) with RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.

117

Voltage U23
(optional)

Event recording object (for accurate time
stamp) with RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.

118

Voltage U31
(optional)

Event recording object (for accurate time
stamp) with RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.

119

Residual voltage U0
(optional)

Event recording object (for accurate time
stamp) with RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.

120

Active power P
(optional)

Event recording object (for accurate time
stamp) with RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.

121

Reactive power Q
(optional)

Event recording object (for accurate time
stamp) with RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.

122

Apparent power S
(optional)

Event recording object (for accurate time
stamp) with RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.

123

Power factor Cosj
(optional)

Event recording object (for accurate time
stamp) with RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.

124

Frequency f
(optional)

Event recording object (for accurate time
stamp) with RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.

125

Harmonic distortion
(optional)

Event recording object (for accurate time
stamp) with RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.

126

Temperature
(optional)

Event recording object (for accurate time
stamp) with RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.

127-
132

User-defined measurement
(optional)

Event recording object (for accurate time
stamp) with RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.

Index Explanation

Purpose

background image

112

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

5.

Measurements

Configuration Guide

Table 5.3.5-1

Measurement configuration

Attribute

Value

Picture Function Name

MEAS1

STATION_NAME

Eastwick

BAY_NAME

Outgoing HA2

DEVICE_NAME

CT

SPECIAL_IDENTIFIER_x

N/A

P_OBJECT_LN

ESTHA02CT

STATION_TYPE

RED 500 / REX (LON)

TYPE_MEAS_1

Current L1

FOLDER_1_TITLE

IL1

MEAS_1_DECIMALS

0

SHOW_MEAS_1

Yes

SHOW_MEAS_1_AS_BAR

Yes

SHOW_MEAS_1_UNIT

Yes

DATA_ACQUISITION_UNIT_1

REF543

FUNCTION_BLOCK_1

MECU3-B

TYPE_MEAS_2

Active power P

FOLDER_2_TITLE

P

MEAS_2_DECIMALS

1

SHOW_MEAS_2

No

SHOW_MEAS_2_AS_BAR

No

SHOW_MEAS_2_UNIT

Yes

DATA_ACQUISITION_UNIT_2

REF543

FUNCTION_BLOCK_2

MEPE7-B

TYPE_MEAS_3

Reactive power Q

FOLDER_3_TITLE

Q

MEAS_3_DECIMALS

1

SHOW_MEAS_3

No

SHOW_MEAS_3_AS_BAR

No

SHOW_MEAS_3_UNIT

Yes

DATA_ACQUISITION_UNIT_3

REF543

FUNCTION_BLOCK_3

MEPE7-B

TYPE_MEAS_4

None

FOLDER_4_TITLE

N/A

MEAS_4_DECIMALS

N/A

SHOW_MEAS_4

N/A

SHOW_MEAS_4_AS_BAR

N/A

SHOW_MEAS_4_UNIT

N/A

DATA_ACQUISITION_UNIT_4

N/A

FUNCTION_BLOCK_4

N/A

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

113

5. Measurements

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

5

5.4.

Application engineering information

5.4.1.

Limit supervision

Normally the alarm limits of the measurement are supervised within MicroSCADA.
There are devices that supervise the alarm limits in case RTU has been build with
EDU (the type of the process objects is RTU2xx with FTABs) and with REF54*
with LON-protocol.

When using SACO 16A3 with SPA/ANSI or REF54* with LON, the alarm limits
are sent to the device when edited with the Edit Limits dialog, if the used relays
SPA-parameters are defined to the process objects comment text (CX attribute) with
the following syntax:

Spa code for high alarm limit (HI) / Spa code for high warning limit (HW) / Spa code
for low warning limit (LW) / Spa code for low alarm limit (LI)/ scaling factor /slave
or station address. For example, alarm limits for channel 1 measurement in SACO
16A3: 1S2///1S3/1/1 (Note! SACO 16A3 has no warning limits.)

5.4.2.

The structure of the measurement

This document describes the structure of the measurement. All pictures, form
pictures, help and other text files as well as all database objects are included. The
measurement function is a part of the MV Process of LIB 510 and has a directory /
LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS, and the standard LIB 510 subdirectories INST,
LANG0 and USE.

The installation of the “instance” picture function (small, medium or large sized)
will automatically install “type” picture function (FPI_ME1T - symbol without
field, FPI_ME2T - symbol with a horizontal field or FPI_ME3T - symbol with
vertical bars) if it does not already exist. The “type” picture function contains all
common programs for the “instance” picture function and it is only visible in the
Picture Editor.

5.4.3.

Pictures

Below there is a list of all measurement pictures and a short description of their
functionality. Dialogs are described in detail earlier in this document. The path is /
LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/INST

AUTHORIZATION_GROUP

MV_CONTROL

SYMBOL_WITH_BUTTON

Yes

EVENT_RECORDING

N/A

U_OTHER_OBJECTS

-

REPRESENTATION

F_REPR/F_MEASM12 (vertical CT)

Attribute

Value

background image

114

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

5.

Measurements

Configuration Guide

Table 5.4.3-1

Measurement pictures and a description of their
functionalities

and /LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/USE

Table 5.4.3-2

Measurement pictures and a description of their
functionalities

Picture

Functionality

FPI_ME1T.PIC

Common programs for all measurements without a field
(measurement symbol)

FPI_ME1I_S.PIC

Small picture function for measurements without a field
(measurement symbol)

FPI_ME1I_M.PIC

Medium picture function for measurements without a field
(measurement symbol)

FPI_ME1I_L.PIC

Large picture function for measurements without a field
(measurement symbol)

FPI_ME2T.PIC

Common programs for all measurements with a horizontal field

FPI_ME2I_S.PIC

Small picture function for measurements with a horizontal field

FPI_ME2I_M.PIC

Medium picture function for measurements with a horizontal field

FPI_ME2I_L.PIC

Large picture function for measurements with a horizontal field

FPI_ME3T.PIC

Common programs for all measurements with a vertical field

FPI_ME3I_S.PIC

Small picture function for measurements with a vertical field

FPI_ME3I_M.PIC

Medium picture function for measurements with a vertical field

FPI_ME3I_L.PIC

Large picture function for measurements with a vertical field

Picture

Functionality

FPU_MEA.PIC

Main dialog

FPU_MEB.PIC

Alarm state dialog

FPU_MED.PIC

Blocking dialog

FPU_MEE.PIC

Edit alarm/warning limits dialog

FPU_MEF.PIC

Zero deadband setting dialog

FPU_MEG.PIC

Active object messages dialog

FPU_MEH.PIC

Additional information dialog for edit alarm/warning limits dialog

FPU_MEI.PIC

Freeze counters dialog, available only with DNP 3.0 and pulse
counter type of object

FPU_FTRENA.PIC

Small fast trend

FPU_FTRENB.PIC

Zoomed fast trend

FPU_FTRENC.PIC

Fast trend settings dialog

FPU_FT_L1.PIC

Combo box list picture for fast trend settings

FPU_FT_L1.PIC

Combo box list picture for fast trend settings

FORM4FPAI2.PIC

Format picture for printing analog input (AI) type of signals in MV
Process

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

115

5. Measurements

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

5

5.4.4.

Language text files

The following Text Translation Tool compatible text files are used by the
measurement. The path is /LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/LANG0.

Table 5.4.4-1

Text Translation Tool compatible text files

5.4.5.

Help text files

Below there is a list of the measurement help text files. The path is /LIB4/FMOD/
MVPROCESS/LANG0.

Table 5.4.5-1

Measurement help text files

5.4.6.

Configuration files

The following configuration files are used by the measurement. The path is /LIB4/
FMOD/MVPROCESS/INST.

Text file

Functionality

FPI_ME.TXT

Text file for the database creation of the picture function

FPU_ME.TXT

Text file for all measurement dialogs

FPU_FTREN.TXT

Text file for all fast trend dialogs

FORM4FPAI2.TXT

Text file for format picture of printing analog input (AI) type of
signals

Help file

Functionality

FPI_ME1.HLP

Picture function installation help file for measurement without a field
(measurement symbol)

FPI_ME2.HLP

Picture function installation help file for measurement with a
horizontal field

FPI_ME3.HLP

Picture function installation help file for measurement with a vertical
bar

FPU_MEA.HLP

Main dialog help file

FPU_MEB.HLP

Alarm state dialog help file

FPU_MED.HLP

Blockings dialog help file

FPU_MEE.HLP

Edit alarm/warning limits dialog help file

FPU_MEF.HLP

Zero deadband settings dialog help file

FPU_MEG.HLP

Active object messages dialog help file

FPU_MEI.HLP

Freeze counters dialog help file

FPU_TRENB.HLP

Zoomed fast trend dialog help file

FPU_TRENC.HLP

Fast trend settings dialog help file

background image

116

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

5.

Measurements

Configuration Guide

Table 5.4.6-1

Configuration files used by the measurement

5.4.7.

Other text files

The following text files are used by the measurement function. The path is /LIB4/
FMOD/MVPROCESS/USE.

Table 5.4.7-1

Text files used by the measurement function.

5.4.8.

Process objects

The measurement process objects can be created with the process object tool while
configuring the functions. The objects are created using the indexes below. The used
index is dependent on the type of the measurements configured to each picture
function.

Configuration file

Functionality

FPI_ME1.DAT

Contains the configuration data for measurement without a field
(measurement symbol) when it is created, modified or deleted by
the configuration tools.

FPI_ME1.POT

Contains the process object definitions for measurement without a
field (measurement symbol).

FPI_ME2.DAT

Contains the configuration data for measurement with a horizontal
field when it is created, modified or deleted by the configuration
tools.

FPI_ME2.POT

Contains the process object definitions for measurement with a
horizontal field.

FPI_ME3.DAT

Contains the configuration data for measurement with a vertical bar
when it is created, modified or deleted by the configuration tools.

FPI_ME3.POT

Contains the process object definitions for measurement with a
vertical bar.

FPI_DAU.TXT

Contains the list of data acquisition units that are typically used by
MV Process.

FPI_FB.TXT

Contains the list of RED 500 function blocks that exist at the
moment.

INDEX4_F11.TXT

Selection list of LIB 510 Rev 4.0.3 MV Process picture functions for
the Installation Tool (common for all other picture functions, too.)

Text file

Functionality

FPU_AUTH.TXT

Contains the SCIL code for station authority check. This code is
executed by the main dialog for the measurements.

FPU_FT_SET.TXT

Default settings for all fast trends

FPU_FTNEW.TXT

Used when opening a new fast trend

FPU_FTOPEN.TXT

Checking for which fast trends that should be opened when a
picture is opened

FPU_UPDATE.TXT

Contains the SCIL code for updating process objects when they
are update-deblocked. This code is executed by the command
procedure FPU_UPDATE.

PATH4_F1.TXT

Contains the path definitions for the MV Process.

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

117

5. Measurements

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

5

Table 5.4.8-1

Process objects

Index

Obj.
type

Process object

Remarks

Group identifier

10

AI

Current L1

FPPMEAMCUR

11

AI

Current L2

FPPMEAMCUR

12

AI

Current L3

FPPMEAMCUR

13

AI

Neutral current I0

FPPMEAMNCU

14

AI

Directional neutral current Ij

FPPMEAMDNC

15

AI

Maximum demand I15min

FPPMEAMMDC

16

AI

Voltage U12

FPPMEAMVOL

17

AI

Voltage U23

FPPMEAMVOL

18

AI

Voltage U31

FPPMEAMVOL

19

AI

Residual voltage U0

FPPMEAMRVL

20

AI

Active power P

FPPMEAMAPW

21

AI

Reactive power Q

FPPMEAMRPW

22

AI

Apparent power S

FPPMEAMAPP

23

AI

Power factor Cosj

FPPMEAMCOS

24

AI

Frequency f

FPPMEAMFRQ

25

AI

Harmonic distortion

FPPMEAMHDS

26

AI

Temperature

FPPMEAMTMP

27-32

AI

User defined measurement

FPPMEAMXXX

33-37

PC

User defined pulse counter

FPPMEAMXXX

38

PC

Active energy E (kWh)

FPPMEAMAEN

39

PC

Active energy E (MWh)

FPPMEAMAEN

40

PC

Active energy E (GWh)

FPPMEAMAEN

41

PC

Reverse active energy E (kWh)

FPPMEAMAEN

42

PC

Reverse active energy E (MWh)

FPPMEAMAEN

43

PC

Reverse active energy E (GWh)

FPPMEAMAEN

44

PC

Reactive energy E (kvarh)

FPPMEAMREN

45

PC

Reactive energy E (Mvarh)

FPPMEAMREN

46

PC

Reactive energy E (Gvarh)

FPPMEAMREN

47

PC

Reverse reactive energy E (kvarh)

FPPMEAMREN

48

PC

Reverse reactive energy E
(Mvarh)

FPPMEAMREN

49

PC

Reverse reactive energy E
(Gvarh)

FPPMEAMREN

110

EVREC

Current L1

Only RP570;
optional

FPPMEAECUR

111

EVREC

Current L2

Only RP570;
optional

FPPMEAECUR

112

EVREC

Current L3

Only RP570;
optional

FPPMEAECUR

background image

118

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

5.

Measurements

Configuration Guide

5.4.9.

Scale objects

At the first installation, the measurement creates the scale 1_1 (linear 1:1 scale). For
SPACOM / SRIO (ANSI)-type of station, the scale FPU_1_1000 (linear 1:1000
scale) will also be created at the installation.

5.4.10.

Command procedures

At the first installation, the measurement creates the command procedure
FPU_UPDATE, which updates process objects when they are update-deblocked.
This feature is similar to the LIB 500 Blocking List function.

113

EVREC

Neutral current I0

Only RP570;
optional

FPPMEAENCU

114

EVREC

Directional neutral current Ij

Only RP570;
optional

FPPMEAEDNC

115

EVREC

Maximum demand I15min

Only RP570;
optional

FPPMEAEMDC

116

EVREC

Voltage U12

Only RP570;
optional

FPPMEAEVOL

117

EVREC

Voltage U23

Only RP570;
optional

FPPMEAEVOL

118

EVREC

Voltage U31

Only RP570;
optional

FPPMEAEVOL

119

EVREC

Residual voltage U0

Only RP570;
optional

FPPMEAERVL

120

EVREC

Active power P

Only RP570;
optional

FPPMEAEAPW

121

EVREC

Reactive power Q

Only RP570;
optional

FPPMEAERPW

122

EVREC

Apparent power S

Only RP570;
optional

FPPMEAEAPP

123

EVREC

Power factor Cosj

Only RP570;
optional

FPPMEAECOS

124

EVREC

Frequency f

Only RP570;
optional

FPPMEAEFRQ

125

EVREC

Harmonic distortion

Only RP570;
optional

FPPMEAEHDS

126

EVREC

Temperature

Only RP570;
optional

FPPMEAETMP

127-132 EVREC

User defined measurement

Only RP570;
optional

FPPMEAEXXX

Index

Obj.
type

Process object

Remarks

Group identifier

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

119

6. Transformer

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

6

6. Transformer

6.1.

Communication support

• SPACOM/SPANET (SPA)
• SPACOM/SRIO (ANSI)
• SPACOM/LON (LON)
• RTU2xx (RP570)
• RTU2xx/FTABs (RP570)
• IEC 60870-5-101
• IEC 60870-5-103

6.2.

Picture function installation and configuration

This chapter describes the installation of picture function for the MV Process
transformer (with SPAU 341 and with SPOC 1xx/RTU-200) and transformer
measurement. The picture functions are found in the directory /LIB4/ FMOD/
MVPROCESS/INST and they should be installed by using LIB4 installation
procedures (LIB4/LIB 510/MV Process 2.x/Transformer). Configuration of the
picture function shall be performed by using standard configuration tools such as:

1. Standard Configuration Tool,

2. Representation Tool
3. Process Object Tool

6.2.1.

Environmental requirements

In order for the transformer to have full functionality, the following components
need to be installed:

• Base
• Station
• Bay

Transformer measurement needs transformer “host” picture function to be installed.

6.2.2.

Installation

There are four different sizes of the transformer picture functions: very small (2*2),
small (3*3), medium (4*4) and large (5*5). The corresponding sizes for the
transformer picture function are 32x 40 pixels (2 x2 semigraphical block), 48 x 60
pixels (3 x 3 semigraphical blocks), 64 x 80 pixels (4 x 4 semigraphical blocks) and
80 x 100 pixels (5 x 5 semigraphical blocks). The button frame is drawn out of this
area.

The size of the measurement depends on how many indications are selected to be
shown. Thus, the size can be 5*1, 5*2, 5*3 and 5*4.

It is not recommended that different sizes of picture functions are used within the
same bay because of the different snap of the feeder lines.

1MRS751887-MEN

background image

120

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

6.

Transformer

Configuration Guide

Table 6.2.2-1

During the installation the following information has to be
given

6.3.

Picture function configuration

6.3.1.

Preliminary work

Before the configuration of the picture functions can start, some preparations are
required (i.e. configurations that are required only once). The usage of the object
identification (OI) attribute has to be fixed, the naming convention of the process
object has to be decided and the translation of the signal texts into local language has
to be performed. For further information, please refer to the General chapter in this
MV Process Configuration Manual.

6.3.2.

Configuration with the Standard Configuration Tool

Table 6.3.2-1

The transformer has the following attributes to configure with
the Standard Configuration Tool (SPAU 341)

Attribute

Meaning

Default

ID

Name/Identification of the picture function within the picture

-

Attribute

Meaning

Default

STATION_NAME

Name of the substation

-

BAY_NAME

Name of the bay

-

DEVICE_NAME

Name of the device

-

SPECIAL_IDENTIFIER_’nr’

Name of the special identifier ‘nr’

Not configurable

NOMINAL_VOLTAGE

Nominal voltage of transformer

10

MIN_POSIT

Minimum position of tap changer

1

MAX_POSIT

Minimum position of tap changer

19

P_OBJECT_LN

Logical name of database process
objects

-

STATION_TYPE

The type of control device & protocol

SPACOM/SRIO
(ANSI)

CONTROL_DIALOG_WINDO
W

The name of the window in which the
transformer control dialog is opened.

MNOPER

AUTHORIZATION_GROUP

The name of the authorization group

MV_CONTROL

TRANSFORMER_TYPE

The number of windings

2-winding

SYMBOL_WITH_BUTTON

Selection of symbol with or without a
button

With button

HARDWIRED

Connection_type between SPAU
modules in parallel operation

Not hardwired

TOPO_OBJECT_COLOR_SPL
IT

Determines if secondary and tertiary
windings should propagate color to the
line segments connected to them, or the
color of the line segment connected to
primary winding should propagate
through the transformer.

NONE

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

121

6. Transformer

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

6

Table 6.3.2-2

The transformer has the following attributes to configure with
the Standard Configuration Tool (SPOC 1xx/RTU-200)

TOPO_OBJECT_COLOR1_NR The color of the primary winding

36

TOPO_OBJECT_COLOR2_NR The color of the secondary winding

36

TOPO_OBJECT_COLOR3_NR The color of the tertiary winding

36

Attribute

Meaning

Default

Attribute

Meaning

Default

STATION_NAME

Name of the substation

-

BAY_NAME

Name of the bay

-

DEVICE_NAME

Name of the device

-

SPECIAL_IDENTIFIER_’nr’

Name of the special identifier ‘nr’

Not configurable

MIN_POSITION

Minimum position of tap changer

1

MAX_POSITION

Minimum position of tap changer

19

P_OBJECT_LN

Logical name of database process

obj.

-

STATION_TYPE

The type of control device & protocol

SPACOM/

SRIO(ANSI)

CMD_PARAMETER

A selector for selecting of control

method. This attribute has meaning

only if IEC 60870-5-101 or DNP 3.0

protocol is selected, otherwise this

attribute is being disabled.

N/A

OUTPUT_STATUS

Process objects for output status with

DNP 3.0 protocol.

N/A

DATA_ACQUISITION_UNIT

The data acquisition unit towards pro-

cess

None

CONTROL_DIALOG_WIND

OW

The name of the window to which the

control dialog is opened.

MNOPER

AUTO_MANUAL_IND_TYPE The type of the auto/manual signal

01=manual, 10=auto

(DB)

AUTHORIZATION_GROUP

The name of the authorization group

MV_CONTROL

TRANSFORMER_TYPE

The number of windings

2-winding

SYMBOL_WITH_BUTTON

Selection of symbol with or without

button

With button

EVENT_RECORDING

Selection whether event recording

objects are created when RP570 pro-

tocol is used or not

N/A

background image

122

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

6.

Transformer

Configuration Guide

TOPO_OBJECT_COLOR_S

PLIT

Determines if secondary and tertiary

windings should propagate color to

the line segments connected to them,

or the color of the line segment con-

nected to primary winding should

propagate through the transformer.

NONE

TOPO_OBJECT_COLOR1_

NUMBER

The color of the primary winding

36

TOPO_OBJECT_COLOR2_

NR

The color of the secondary winding

36

TOPO_OBJECT_COLOR3_

NUMBER

The color of the tertiary winding

36

Attribute

Meaning

Default

STATION_NAME

A selector type of an editable combo box to select or enter
the name of the substation. By default, the maximum length
of the text is 9 characters. The selection list shows up to ten
latest entries.

The configurable attribute is being read directly from the
process object database, if there is any process object linked
to the selected transformer. Therefore, the configurable
attribute within a picture function has meaning only when the
process objects have not been created.

This text will be used as a substation identifier of the
transformer objects on event list, alarm list, printout,
database query, etc. It is very important that this text is
similar to all objects within the same substation.

BAY_NAME

A selector type of an editable combo box to select or enter
the name of the bay (feeder). By default, the maximum
length of the text is 14 characters. The selection list shows
up to ten latest entries.

The configurable attribute is being read directly from the
process object database, if there is any process object linked
to the selected transformer. Therefore, the configurable
attribute within a picture function has meaning only when the
process objects have not been created.

This text will be used as a bay (feeder) identifier of the
transformer objects on event list, alarm list, printout,
database query, etc. It is very important that this text is
similar to all objects within the same bay (feeder).

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

123

6. Transformer

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

6

DEVICE_NAME

A selector type of an editable combo box to select or enter
the name (identifier) of the transformer. By default, the
maximum length of the text is 5 characters.

The selection list shows up to ten latest entries.

The configurable attribute is being read directly from the
process object database, if there is any process object linked
to the selected transformer. Therefore, the configurable
attribute within a picture function has meaning only when the
process objects have not been created.

This text will be used as an identifier of the transformer on
event list, alarm list, printout, database query, etc.

SPECIAL_IDENTIFIER_’nr’

A selector type of an editable combo box to select or enter a
special identifier of the transformer. By default, this identifier
is not in use, i.e. it is not configurable with the SCT. The
selection list shows up to ten latest entries.

The configurable attribute is being read directly from the
process object database, if there is any process object linked
to the selected transformer. Therefore, the configurable
attribute within a picture function has meaning only when the
process objects have not been created.

This text will be used as an additional identifier of the
transformer on event list, alarm list, printout, database query,
etc.

NOMINAL VOLTAGE

The nominal voltage of the voltage regulator.

MIN_POSIT/(ION)

The minimum position of the tap changer.

MAX_POSIT/(ION)

The maximum position of the tap changer.

P_OBJECT_LN

The logical name of the database process objects. The
maximum length of the text is 10 characters. Allowed
characters are the letters A-Z, all digits and the underscore
(_).
The logical names of process objects have to be unique
throughout the entire system, that is, different objects cannot
have the same logical name. Therefore, it is very important
to have a proper naming convention for the process object
database.
Certain naming convention is also required to speed up the
opening time of the main dialogs. With the predefined
naming convention it is possible to collect all station and bay
related database objects without searching through the
complete database. Therefore, it is advised to use the
following naming convention:
- The first three characters identify the substation
- The following four characters identify the bay
- The last three characters can be freely used to identify
thesource of the signal i.e. device, unit, etc.

The following list is presented as an example of a proper
naming convention within one bay. The station name is
Green Bay and the bay name is HA12 Downtown:

background image

124

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

6.

Transformer

Configuration Guide

- GRB, station
- GRBHA12BAY, bay
- GRBHA12Q0, circuit breaker Q0
- GRBHA12Q1, truck Q1
- GRBHA12Q9, earth switch Q9
- GRBHA12CT, measurements/current transformer
- GRBHA12VT, measurements/voltage transformer
- GRBHA12ALA, alarm indicator
- GRBHA12AR, auto-reclosing tag
- GRBHA12TRP, tripping tag
- GRBHA12R1, feeder terminal or protection unit 1
- GRBHA12R2, feeder terminal or protection unit 1
- GRBHA12LS1, line segment 1 of busbar coloring
- GRBHA12LS2, line segment 2 of busbar coloring
- GRBHA12LS3, line segment 3 of busbar coloring
- GRBHA12LI, line indicator of busbar coloring

If some other naming convention than 3+4 is used, it usually
takes a longer time to open the main control dialogs unless
the optional named program

U_OTHER_OBJECTS is being utilized to introduce other
required process objects.

STATION_TYPE

A selector type of a combo box to select the station type of
the objects.

The database process objects will be created for the station
type defined here. The list of supported protocols for SPAU
341 is as follows:
- SPACOM / SPANET (SPA)
- SPACOM / SRIO (ANSI)
- RED 500 / REx(LON)
and for SPOC 11x or RTU-200
- SPACOM / SPANET (SPA)
- SPACOM / SRIO (ANSI)
- RED 500 / REx(LON)
- RTU2xx (RP570)
- RTU2xx/FTABs (RP570)
- IEC 60870-5-101
- IEC 60870-5-103

If SPACOM device has been connected to the LON-bus via
LON-SPA Gateway (LSG), the station type should be
selected as SPACOM/SPANET (SPA).

CMD_PARAMETER

A selector type of a combo box to select the command
parameter for control method. This attribute has meaning
only if IEC 60870-5-101 or DNP 3.0 protocol is selected,
otherwise this attribute is being disabled.
The supported control parameters are:
- Double command (TY = 46)
- Single command (TY = 45)
for IEC 60870-5-101 protocol and
- Select-Operate
for DNP 3.0 protocol.

OUTPUT_STATUS

An ON/OFF type of a toggle button to select whether there is
need for output status process objects with the DNP 3.0
protocol. If STATION_TYPE is other than DNP 3.0, the
configurable attribute is being disabled, and the value has no
meaning.

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

125

6. Transformer

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

6

DATA_ACQUISITION_UNIT

A selector type of an editable combo box to select the data
acquisition unit of the transformer. The configurable attribute
is being enabled if the attribute P_OBJECT_LN has been
configured.

This selection is not obligatory if the signal engineering is
done by other means than SigTOOL.

The data acquisition unit, i.e. the device or module, which
connects the signals from the process to the communication
system, can be defined either by selecting the unit from the
selection list and editing it or just by entering the type
designation.

If there are more than one data acquisition unit of the same
type within the bay, it is necessary to differentiate units by
using additional characters. As an example, the data
acquisition units for a bay with SPAJ140 C, SPAC 535 C3
and SACO 64D4:
SPAJ 140 C
SPCJ4D29_1
SPAC 535 C3
SPCJ4D29_2
SPTO6D3 (or SPTO6D3_1)
SACO 64D4
SACO16D2_1
SACO16D2_2
SACO16D2_3
SACO16D2_4

The additional characters should always start with the
underscore (_) and then be followed by an unit distinction
character ranging from 1 - 9, 0, A - Z. If there is no more than
one data acquisition unit of the same type within the bay, the
additional characters can be left out.

This attribute is automatically given when SPAU 341 is used
as the regulator.

CONTROL_DIALOG_WINDO
W

The name of the window in which the transformer control
dialog is opened. This feature can be utilized e.g. when
parallel operation is used and more than one control dialog is
wanted to be open for the transformer at the same time.

AUTO_MANUAL_IND_TYPE The type and polarity of the auto / manual indication object

for SPOC 1xx and RTU 200.

background image

126

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

6.

Transformer

Configuration Guide

AUTHORIZATION_GROUP

A selector type of an editable combo box to select the
authorization group for the object. The maximum length of
the text is 63 characters. The given text has to be usable as
a SCIL list attribute name (see SCIL manual). The contents
of the selection list is taken from the existing authorization
groups.

The name may not be composed of two letters followed
by a number.

The attribute can be defined, if the object is wanted to be
included in some authorization group. The authorization level
of each user in this group can be defined afterwards by the
system manager with User Management pictures.

TRANSFORMER_TYPE

Selection for 2-winding or 3-winding transformer.

HARD_WIRED

The connection type between different SPAU modules when
parallel operation is used. Hardwired means that different
SPAU-modules have a physical wiring between them. This is
used when master/slave operation mode is wanted.

SYMBOL_WITH_BUTTON

An ON/OFF-type of toggle button to select whether the
control dialog(s) can be opened for the transformer. By
default the symbol is provided with active button.

EVENT_RECORDING

An ON/OFF type of a toggle button to select whether there is

a need for event recording process objects with the RP 570
protocol. If STATION_TYPE is other than RTU 2xx or RTU
2xx/FTABs, the configurable attribute is being disabled, and
the value has no meaning.

With the RP 570 the time stamp from process device comes
into the event recording process object. If no accurate time
stamp is needed or available, or the device is emulating the
RP 570 without an event recording possibility, do not set this
attribute ON.

TOPO_OBJECT_COLOR_S
PLIT

The windings can use the same colors, (NONE), or each
winding has its own color (SPLIT).
TOPO_OBJECT_COLORx_MR is used to set the colors of
the windings when selection is split.

TOPO_OBJECT_COLOR1_
NR

Color applied to the primary winding by busbar coloring
when either the secondary or the tertiary winding becomes
active and the source of power is located on the secondary
or tertiary side of the transformer. This color is further
propagated to the adjacent line segment of the primary
winding.

TOPO_OBJECT_COLOR2_
NR

Color applied to the secondary winding by busbar coloring
when either the primary or the tertiary winding becomes
active and the source of power is located on the primary or
tertiary side of the transformer. This color is further
propagated to the adjacent line segment of the secondary
winding.

TOPO_OBJECT_
COLOR3_NR

Color applied to the tertiary winding by busbar coloring when
either the primary or the secondary winding becomes active
and the source of power is located on the primary or
secondary side of the transformer. This color is further
propagated to the adjacent line segment of the tertiary
winding.

!

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

127

6. Transformer

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

6

6.3.3.

Configuration of the transformer measurement

The measurement for the transformer is linked to the transformer picture function.

Table 6.3.3-1

For the transformer measurement there are the following
attributes to configure with the Standard Configuration Tool

The measurement can be placed freely into the picture. It is possible to link several
measurements to the same transformer picture function. The number of attributes to
be shown is freely configurable, too.

)LJ

([DPSOHVRIGLIIHUHQWFRQILJXUDWLRQRIWUDQVIRUPHUPHDVXUHPHQW

Attribute

Meaning

Default

CONNECT_TO_OBJECT

The name of the transformer
picture function to which the
measurement is linked.

-

VOLTAGE_INDICATION

Selection for voltage indication.

Yes

AUTO_MANUAL_INDICATION

Selection for auto/manual
indication.

Yes

TAP_POSITION_INDICATION

Selection for tap position
indication.

Yes

PARALLEL_INDICATION

Selection for single/parallel
indication.

No

background image

128

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

6.

Transformer

Configuration Guide

6.3.4.

Configuration with the Representation Tool

Table 6.3.4-1

The transformer has the following attributes to configure with
the Representation Tool

Table 6.3.4-2

The transformer requires a selector and a symbol for the
following conditions

By default, there are two sets (horizontal and vertical) of symbols in four different
sizes for the transformer.

6.3.5.

Configuration with the Process Object Tool

Depending on the configuration of the transformer, the Process Object Tool will
create a certain set of process objects into the database. Those process objects which
are going be linked to the actual process should be edited to have a station number,

Attribute

Meaning

Default

REPRESENTATION

Selection of symbol set shown
in picture

F_REPR/F_TRANS3

REPRESENTATION

The name of the representation (symbol set) used for the
transformer. The predefined representation can be selected
from the selector type of list called Library Representations.
If there is no appropriate symbol set, it is possible to make and
use a representation set of your own. In that case one of the
existing representation sets may be copied into a representation
file ../APLMOD4/USE/APLMOD4.PIR under the application, and
each representation may be modified as needed. If object
specific representations are needed, the representation set
(under the application) may be renamed, and the name of the
representation may be written into the selector with the logical
path.
For example: F_REPR/MY_SET
Transformer picture function provides a possibility to make one
own set of representations. This is done by selecting the empty
representation set and then drawing the wanted figure in
program U_DRAW_FIGURE.
Wanted features can be also added to existing representations
in U_DRAW_FIGURE program.

Selector

Condition

Default color

1

selected on command

white

2

Update blocked, invalid value, obsolete value, device
not synchonized or overflow

magenta

3

Unacknowledged alarm

red, blinking

4

Acknowledged alarm

red

5

Warning or blockings (alarms, events, printouts or
reprocessing)

yellow

6

Manually entered or substituted

cyan

7

Control blocked

brown

8

Normal state

green

9

Substituted

Dark blue

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

129

6. Transformer

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

6

an address and a proper switching state. Otherwise, by default, all other attributes
should have suitable values for normal operation.

When process objects are created, default scales are assigned to the analog input
signals meant to be connected to the process (indexes 24,25 and 26). The naming
convention of the scale when SPAU 341 is used as a voltage regulator is FPU_’x’ for
SPA,LON and RP570 protocols and FPU_S’x’ for ANSI protocol. ’x’ stands for the
nominal voltage given in the Standard Configuration Tool. For SPOC 11x the scale
is named as FPU_TCANSI for ANSI protocol, and FPU_TCSPAN for other
available protocols. For RTU-200 the name of the scale is FPU_TCRTU.

Table 6.3.5-1

The Process Object Tool will create process objects based on
the following list (SPAU 341)

Index

Explanation

Purposes

10

Tap position indication

Used for indication of the tap changer
position

11

Tap ch. auto / manual ind.

Used for indication of the transformer auto
manual state

12

Tap ch. single / parallel ind.

Used for indication of the transformer single /
parallel state

13

Tap ch. master / slave ind.

Used for sending "close select" -command of
the disconnector section to the control unit.

14

Tap ch. manual cmd

Used for sending "manual" -command to the
control unit.

15

Tap ch. auto cmd

Used for sending "auto" -command to the
control unit

16

Tap ch. raise cmd

Used for sending "raise" -command to the
control unit.

17

Tap ch. lower cmd

Used for sending "lower" -command to the
control unit.

18

Tap ch. single / parallel cmd

Used for sending "single" or “parallel”
command to the control unit.

19

Tap ch. master/slave command

Used for sending "master"- or “slave” -
command to the control unit.

20

Transformer ext. blocking

Used for indication of the transformer
blocking signal

21

Undervoltage blocking

Used for indication of the transformer
undervoltage blocking signal.

22

Overcurrent blocking

Used for indication of the transformer
overcurrent blocking signal

23

Main/second settings ind.

Used for indication of the active settings

24

Voltage

Used for indication of the voltage

25

Ref. voltage ind.

Used for indication of the reference voltage

26

Ref. voltage setpoint

Used for sending the reference voltage to
control unit. (Main settings

27

Ref. voltage setpoint

Used for sending the reference voltage to
control unit. (Second settings)

background image

130

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

6.

Transformer

Configuration Guide

Indexes 19, 21..23 and 25..28 are not created if controlling is done via SPOC 1xx.
Indexes 15, 17, 19, 21..23 and 25..28 are not created if controlling is done via RTU-
200.

6.3.6.

An example of the transformer configuration

Table 6.3.6-1

The configuration of the transformer (SPAU 341).

28

Checksum of SGF1

Used for indication of value of switchgroup
SGF1.

29

Tap changer operation counter

In internal use, Used for counting the number
of tap changer step changes.

30

Selected on monitor

In internal use, tags the selection of the
object made in different pictures or monitors

249

Transformer routing prim. info

For busbar coloring purposes

250

Transformer predefined color

For busbar coloring purposes

253

Transformer fict. pos. ind.

For busbar coloring purposes

255

Transformer predefined color

For busbar coloring purposes

Index

Explanation

Purposes

Attributes

Value

ID

T1

STATION_NAME

Eastwick

BAY_NAME

Transformer 1

DEVICE_NAME

TR1

NOMINAL_VOLTAGE

20

MIN_POSIT

1

MAX_POSIT

19

P_OBJECT_LN

ESTH03_T1

STATION_TYPE

SPACOM / SPANET (SPA)

CONTROL_DIALOG_WINDOW

MNOPER

AUTHORIZATION_GROUP

MV_CONTROL

TRANSFORMER_TYPE

2-winding

SYMBOL_WITH_BUTTON

Yes

HARDWIRED

No

TOPO_OBJECT_COLOR_SPLIT

SPLIT

TOPO_OBJECT_COLOR1_NR

9

TOPO_OBJECT_COLOR2_NR

10

TOPO_OBJECT_COLOR3_NR

- (Not in use, two winding transformer)

REPRESENTATION

F_REPR/F_TRANS3
(vertical link (3*3))

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

131

6. Transformer

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

6

6.4.

Application engineering information

This chapter describes the structure of the transformer. All pictures, form pictures,
help and other text files as well as all database objects are included. Transformer
function is a part of the MV Process of LIB 510 and has a directory /LIB4/FMOD/
MVPROCESS, and the standard LIB 510 subdirectories INST, LANG0 and USE.

6.4.1.

Pictures

Below there is a list of all transformer pictures and a short description of their
functionality. Dialogs are described in detail earlier in this document.

The paths are /LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/INST

Table 6.4.1-1

Transformer pictures

and /LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/USE

Table 6.4.1-2

Transformer pictures

Picture

Functionality

FPI_TRM1.PIC

Measurement for transformer (SPAU 341)

FPI_TRM2.PIC

Measurement for transformer (SPOC 11x / RTU-200)

FPI_TRT_1

Type picture function (SPAU 341)

FPI_TRI_1V

Very small picture function (2*2) for transformer

FPI_TRI_1S

Small picture function (3*3) for transformer

FPI_TRI_1M

Medium picture function (4*4) for transformer

FPI_TRI_1L

Large picture function (5*5) for transformer

FPI_TRT_2

Type picture function (SPOC 11x / RTU-200)

FPI_TRI_2V

Very small picture function (2*2) for transformer

FPI_TRI_2S

Small picture function (3*3) for transformer

FPI_TRI_2M

Medium picture function (4*4) for transformer

FPI_TRI_2L

Large picture function (5*5) for transformer

Picture

Functionality

FPU_TRA.PIC

Main control dialog (SPAU 341)

FPU_TRB.PIC

Main control dialog (SPOC 11x / RTU-200)

FPU_TRC.PIC

Control confirmation dialog

FPU_TRD.PIC

Operation counters dialog

FPU_TRE.PIC

Blockings dialog

FPU_TRF.PIC

Object messages dialog

FPU_TRG.PIC

Alarm state dialog

FPU_TRH.PIC

Information dialog

FPU_TRI.PIC

Relay tool dialog

FPU_TRJ.PIC

Drop-down list box

FPU_TRK.PIC

Drop-down list box

FORM4FPAI1.PIC

Format picture for printing single/parallel indication

background image

132

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

6.

Transformer

Configuration Guide

6.4.2.

Language text files

The following Text Translation Tool compatible text files are used by the
transformer: The path is /LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/LANG0

Table 6.4.2-1

Text Translation Tool compatible text files used by the
transformer

6.4.3.

Help text files

Below there is a list of the transformer help text files. The path is /LIB4/FMOD/
MVPROCESS/LANG0.

Table 6.4.3-1

The transformer help text files

FORM4FPAI2.PIC

Format picture for printing warning/alarm of voltage or op. counter

FORM4FPAI3.PIC

Format picture for printing tap position

FORM4FPBI1.PIC

Format picture for printing single indications

FORM4FPBO1.PIC

Format picture for printing object commands

FORM4FPDB1.PIC

Format picture for printing auto/manual state

Picture

Functionality

Text file

Functionality

FPI_TR1.TXT

Text file for the database creation of the picture function (SPAU
341)

FPI_TR2R.TXT

Text file for the database creation of the picture function (RTU-200)

FPI_TR2S.TXT

Text file for the database creation of the picture function (SPOC 11x
)

FPI_TR1.TXT

Text file for all transformer dialogs (SPAU 341)

FPI_TR2.TXT

Text file for all transformer dialogs (SPOC 1xx / RTU-200)

FORM4FPAI1.TXT

Text file for printing OV related texts for analog indications

FORM4FPAI2.TXT

Text file for printing AZ related texts for analog indications

FORM4FPBI1.TXT

Text file for printing single indications

FORM4FPBO1.TXT

Text file for printing object commands

FORM4FPDB1.TXT

Text file for printing double indications

Help file

Functionality

FPI_TR1.HLP

Picture function installation help file (SPAU 341)

FPI_TR2.HLP

Picture function installation help file (SPOC 1xx / RTU-200)

FPI_TRM.HLP

Picture function installation help file, transformer measurement

FPU_TRA.HLP

Main control dialog help file (SPAU 341)

FPU_TRB.HLP

Main control dialog help file (SPOC 11x / RTU-200)

FPU_TRD.HLP

Operation counters help file

FPU_TRE.HLP

Blockings dialog help file

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

133

6. Transformer

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

6

6.4.4.

Configuration files

The following configuration files are used by the transformer. The path is LIB4/
FMOD/MVPROCESS/INST

Table 6.4.4-1

Configuration files used by the transformer

6.4.5.

Other text files

The following text files are used by the transformer. The path is /LIB4/FMOD/
MVPROCESS/USE.

Table 6.4.5-1

Text files used by the transformer

6.4.6.

Process objects

The following process objects will be created depending on the type of the
transformer. The SPA-parameter where the process object is linked is listed for
SPAU 341.

FPU_TRF.HLP

Object messages dialog help file

FPU_TRG.HLP

Alarm state dialog help file

FPU_TRI.HLP

Relay tool dialog help file

Help file

Functionality

Configuration file

Functionality

FPI_TR_1.DAT

Contains the configuration data for the transformer when it is
created, modified or deleted by the configuration tools (SPAU
341).

FPI_TR_2.DAT

Contains the configuration data for transformer when it is created,
modified or deleted by the configuration tools (SPOC 11x / RTU-
200).

FPI_TRM12.DAT

Contains the configuration data for transformer measurements.

FPI_TR_1.POT

Contains the process object definitions for the Process Object
Tool.

FPI_TR_2.POT

Contains the process object definitions for the Process Object
Tool.

INDEX4_F11.TXT

Selection list of MV Process picture functions for LIB4 installation
tool (common for all other picture functions, too.)

Text file

Functionality

FPU_AUTH.TXT

Contains the SCIL code for station authority check. This code is
executed by the main control dialog for transformer.

FPU_UPDATE.TXT

Contains the SCIL code for updating process objects when they
are update-deblocked. This code is executed by the command
procedure FPU_UPDATE.

PATH4_F1.TXT

Contains the path definitions for the MV Process.

background image

134

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

6.

Transformer

Configuration Guide

Table 6.4.6-1

Process objects that will be created depending on the type of
the transformer

Index

Object
type

Meaning of Process
object

Remarks

Group Identifier

Spa
par.

10

AI

Tap changer position

FPTAVRIPOS

V3

11

BI/DB

Tap changer manual/
auto -ind.

FPTAVRIMAN

O6

12

BI/AI

Tap changer single/
parallel -ind.

FPTAVRISGL

V3

13

BI

Tap changer master/
slave -ind.

FPTAVRIMST

14

BO

Tap changer manual
state cmd

FPTAVRCMAN

I7

15

BO

Tap changer auto state
cmd

FPTAVRCMAN

I6

16

BO

Tap changer raise cmd

FPTAVRCPOS

I9

17

BO

Tap changer lower cmd

FPTAVRCPOS

I10

18

BO

Tap changer single/
parallel cmd

Only SPAU
341C

FPTAVRCSGL

V152

19

BO

Tap changer master/
slave cmd

Only SPAU
341C

FPTAVRCMST

20

BI

Tap changer external
blocking

FPTAVRIBLK

I12

21

BI

Tap changer
undervoltage blocking

Only SPAU
341C

FPTAVRIBLK

O4

22

BI

Tap changer overcurrent
blocking

Only SPAU
341C

FPTAVRIBLK

O3

23

BI

Tap changer main/
second setting

Only SPAU
341C

FPTAVRISBK

V150

24

AI

Voltage

FPTAVRMVOL

I1

25

AI

Tap changer reference
voltage

Only SPAU
341C

FPTAVRMRVO

S1

26

AO

Tap changer ref. voltage
setpoint
(main)

Only SPAU
341C

FPTAVRSRVO

S21

27

AO

Tap changer ref. voltage
setpoint
(second)

Only SPAU
341C

FPTAVRSRVO

S41

28

AI

Checksum SGF1

Only SPAU
341C

FPTAVRICHK

S10

29

AI

Tap changer operation
counter

FPTAVRICNR

30

AI

Tap changer selected
on monitor

FPTAVRXMEV

111

EVREC/
AI

Tap changer manual/
auto -ind.

Only RP570
and ANSI

FPTAVREMAN

249

BI

Transformer routing
prim. info

BB coloring

FPTAVRXPOS

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

135

6. Transformer

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

6

6.4.7.

Scale objects

At the first installation, the transformer creates the scale 1_1 (linear 1:1 scale). For
SPACOM / SRIO (ANSI)-type of station, the scale FPU_1_1000 (linear 1:1000
scale) will also be created at the installation.

The scale for the voltage object for SPAU 341 (index 24) is created as follows:
FPU_’nominal_voltage’ for SPA,LON and FPU_S’nominal_voltage’ for ANSI,
where ‘nominal_voltage’ is given during the picture function installation. The
corresponding scales for SPOC are FPU_TCSPAN (SPA) and FPU_TCANSI
(ANSI).

6.4.8.

Command procedures

At the first installation, the transformer creates the command procedure
FPU_UPDATE, which updates process objects when they are update-deblocked.
This feature is similar to the LIB 500 Blocking List function.

For SPACOM / SRIO (ANSI)-type of station, the command procedure FPU_AI2DB
will be created while installing. The command procedure FPU_AI2DB updates the
position indication double binary from the analog input. The command procedure
FPU_TCCO is created for updating the operation counter object.

6.4.9.

Event channels

For SPACOM / SRIO (ANSI)-type of station, the event channel FPU_AI2DB will
be created at the installation. The event channel FPU_AI2DB is set to activate the
command procedure FPU_AI2DB.

The event channel FPU_TCCO is set to activate the command procedure
FPU_AI2DB .

250

AI

Transformer predefined
color

BB coloring

FPTAVRXPCD

253

BI

Transformer fict. pos.
ind.

BB coloring

FPTAVRXPOS

255

AI

Transformer predefined
color

BB coloring

FPTAVRXPCD

Index

Object
type

Meaning of Process
object

Remarks

Group Identifier

Spa
par.

background image
background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

137

7. Protection tripping tag

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

7

7.

Protection tripping tag

7.1.

Communication support

The trip tag with a database of its own supports the following protocols:

• SPACOM/SPANET (SPA)

• SPACOM/SRIO (ANSI)

• RED 500/REX (LON)

• RTU2xx (RP570)

• RTU2xx/FTABs (RP570)

• IEC 60870-5-101

• IEC 60870-5-103

7.2.

Environmental requirements

In order for the the trip tag to have full functionality, the Base function needs to be
installed first.

To be able to reset latched protection unit remotely, it is necessary to install the
standard function for switching device (circuit breaker) to gain access to the latch
reset dialog of the switching device.

If the trip signal from SPACOM family is being used, it is recommended to first
create an event database with the SPACOM Relay Configuration Tool and then link
these process objects into the trip tag.

7.3.

Configuration of the tripping tag

7.3.1.

Configurable attributes with the Standard Configuration Tool

Table 7.3.1-1

Configurable Attributes

Attribute

Meaning

Default

STATION_NAME

Name of the substation

-

BAY_NAME

Name of the bay

-

DEVICE_NAME

Name of the device

-

SPECIAL_IDENTIFIER_’number’ Name of the special identifier ‘nr’ Not configurable

P_OBJECT_LN

Logical name of database
process objects

-

STATION_TYPE

The type of control device &
protocol

RED 500/REX
(LON)

OUTPUT_STATUS

Process objects for output status
with DNP 3.0 protocol

N/A

DATA_ACQUISITION_UNIT

The data acquisition unit towards
process

None

FUNCTION_BLOCK

Function block of data acquisition
unit

-

1MRS751887-MEN

background image

138

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

7.

Protection tripping tag

Configuration Guide

EVENT_RECORDING

Process objects for event
recording with RP 570

No process objects

LINK_TRIP_TAG_TO_LN_x

The logical name of the database
process objects to which this trip
tag is linked.

-

LINK_TRIP_TAG_TO_MODULE_
x

The module to which this trip tag
is linked.

No linking

Attribute

Meaning

Default

STATION_NAME

A selector type of an editable combo box to select or enter
the name of the substation. By default the maximum length
of the text is 9 characters. The selection list shows up to ten
latest entries.

The configurable attribute is being read directly from the
process object database, if there is any process object
linked to the selected protection tripping tag. Therefore, the
configurable attribute within a picture function has meaning
only when the process objects have not been created.

This text will be used as a substation identifier of the tripping
objects on event list, alarm list, printout, database query,
etc. It is very important that this text is similar to all objects
within the same substation.

BAY_NAME

A selector type of an editable combo box to select or enter
the name of the bay (feeder). By default the maximum
length of the text is 14 characters. The selection list shows
up to ten latest entries.

The configurable attribute is being read directly from the
process object database, if there is any process object
linked to the selected protection tripping tag. Therefore, the
configurable attribute within a picture function has meaning
only when the process objects have not been created.

This text will be used as a bay (feeder) identifier of the
tripping objects on event list, alarm list, printout, database
query, etc. It is very important that this text is similar to all
objects within the same bay (feeder).

DEVICE_NAME

A selector type of an editable combo box to select or enter
the name (identifier) of the protection unit. By default the
maximum length of the text is 5 characters. The selection
list shows up to ten latest entries.

The configurable attribute is being read directly from the
process object database, if there is any process object
linked to the selected protection tripping tag. Therefore, the
configurable attribute within a picture function has meaning
only when the process objects have not been created.

This text will be used as an identifier of the tripping objects
on event list, alarm list, printout, database query, etc.

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

139

7. Protection tripping tag

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

7

SPECIAL_IDENTIFIER_’num
ber’

A selector type of an editable combo box to select or enter a
special identifier of the protection tripping. By default, this
identifier is not in use, i.e. it is not configurable with the SCT.
The selection list shows up to ten latest entries.

The configurable attribute is being read directly from the
process object database, if there is any process object
linked to the selected protection tripping tag. Therefore, the
configurable attribute within a picture function has meaning
only when the process objects have not been created.

This text will be used as an additional identifier of the
tripping objects on event list, alarm list, printout, database
query, etc.

P_OBJECT_LN

The logical name of the database process objects. The
maximum length of the text is 10 characters. Allowed
characters are the letters A-Z, all digits and the underscore
(_).
The logical names of process objects have to be unique
throughout the entire system, that is, different objects
cannot have the same logical name. Therefore, it is very
important to have a proper naming convention for the
process object database.

Certain naming convention is also required to speed up the
opening time of the main dialogs. With the predefined
naming convention it is possible to collect all station and bay
related database objects without searching through the
complete database. Therefore, it is advised to use the
following naming convention:

background image

140

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

7.

Protection tripping tag

Configuration Guide

- The first three characters identify the substation
- The following four characters identify the bay
- The last three characters can be freely used to identify
the source of the signal i.e. device, unit, etc.

The following list is presented as an example of a proper
naming convention within one bay. The station name is
Green Bay and the bay name is HA12 Downtown:
- GRB, station
- GRBHA12BAY, bay
- GRBHA12Q0, circuit breaker Q0
- GRBHA12Q1, truck Q1
- GRBHA12Q9, earth switch Q9
- GRBHA12CT, measurements/current transformer
- GRBHA12VT, measurements/voltage transformer
- GRBHA12ALA, alarm indicator
- GRBHA12AR, auto-reclosing tag
- GRBHA12TRP, tripping tag
- GRBHA12R1, feeder terminal or protection unit 1
- GRBHA12R2, feeder terminal or protection unit 1
- GRBHA12LS1, line segment 1 of busbar coloring
- GRBHA12LS2, line segment 2 of busbar coloring
- GRBHA12LS3, line segment 3 of busbar coloring
- GRBHA12LI, line indicator of busbar coloring

If some other naming convention than 3+4 is used, it usually
takes a longer time to open the main control dialogs unless
the optional named program U_OTHER_OBJECTS is being
utilized to introduce other required process objects (not
needed with protection tripping tag).

STATION_TYPE

A selector type of a combo box to select the station type of
the objects. The configurable attribute is being enabled if the
attribute P_OBJECT_LN has been configured.

The database process objects will be created for the station
type defined here. The list of supported protocols is as
follows:

SPACOM / SPANET (SPA)
SPACOM / SRIO (ANSI)
RED 500 / REx (LON)
RTU2xx (RP570)
RTU2xx / FTABs (RP570)
IEC 870-5-101
IEC 870-5-103
If SPACOM device has been connected to the LON-bus via
LON-SPA Gateway (LSG), the station type should be
selected as SPACOM/SPANET (SPA).

If REx device (e.g. REF 541) with LON communication is
used, the station type should be selected as RED 500/REx
(LON).

OUTPUT_STATUS

An ON/OFF type of a toggle button to select whether there
is need for output status process objects with the DNP 3.0
protocol. If STATION_TYPE is other than DNP 3.0, the
configurable attribute is being disabled, and the value has
no meaning.

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

141

7. Protection tripping tag

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

7

DATA_ACQUISITION_UNIT

A selector type of an editable combo box to select the data
acquisition unit of the protection. The configurable attribute
is being enabled if the attribute P_OBJECT_LN has been
configured.
This selection is not obligatory if the signal engineering is
done by other means than SigTOOL.
The data acquisition unit, i.e. the device or module which
connects the signals from the process to the communication
system, can be defined either by selecting the unit from the
selection list and editing it or just by entering the type
designation.

If there are more than one data acquisition unit of the same
type within the bay, it is necessary to differentiate units by
using additional characters. As an example, the data
acquisition units for a bay with SPAJ 140 C, SPAC 535 C3
and SACO 64D4 are:
SPAJ 140 C
SPCJ4D29_1
SPAC 535 C3
SPCJ4D29_2
SPTO6D3 (or SPTO6D3_1)
SACO 64D4
SACO16D2_1
SACO16D2_2
SACO16D2_3
SACO16D2_4
The additional characters should always start with the
underscore (_) and then be followed by an unit distinction
character ranging from 1 - 9, 0, A - Z. If there is no more
than one data acquisition unit of the same type within the
bay, the additional characters can be left out.

FUNCTION_BLOCK

A selector type of an editable combo box to select the
function block (software module) of the data acquisition unit
that handles the signals for this picture function. If the
configurable attribute DATA_ACQUISITION_UNIT does not
specify such a device that contains function blocks or
P_OBJECT_LN has not been configured, this attribute is
being disabled, and the value has no meaning.

This selection is not obligatory if the signal engineering is
done by other means than SigTOOL.

Devices like REF 54x, REM 54x, REC 52x and REC 53x
utilize function blocks for configuration. If the name of the
function block does not exist in the selection list (a new
one), you can enter it yourself!

EVENT_RECORDING

An ON/OFF type of a toggle button to select whether there
is need for event recording process objects with the RP 570
protocol. If STATION_TYPE is other than RTU 2xx or RTU
2xx/FTABs or P_OBJECT_LN has not been configured, the
configurable attribute is being disabled, and the value has
no meaning.

With the RP 570 the time stamp from the process device
comes into the event recording process object. If no
accurate time stamp is needed or available, or the device is
emulating the RP 570 without an event recording possibility,
do not set this attribute ON.

background image

142

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

7.

Protection tripping tag

Configuration Guide

LINK_TRIP_TAG_TO_LN_x

The logical name of the database process objects of the
protection module x (x=1..5). The maximum length of the
text is 10 characters. Allowed characters are the letters A-Z,
all digits and the underscore (_).

The configurable attributes LINK_TRIP_TAG_TO_LN_x and
LINK_TRIP_TAG_TO_MODULE_x is utilized to create a link
between existing protection tripping indication objects from
the other picture function (e.g. protection module) and the
trip indication tag. It even supports linking of user-defined
process objects as LINK_TRIP_TAG_TO_MODULE_x is an
editable selector.

LINK_TRIP_TAG_TO_MODU
LE_x

An editable selector type of a combo box to select the type
designation of the protection module x (x=1..5). The
configurable attribute is being enabled if the attribute
LINK_TRIP_TAG_TO_LN_x has been configured.
By default, all protection modules from the SPACOM family
have been implemented for the users to choose from. The
supported modules are:
SPAM 05x
SPCD 2D55
SPCD 3C21
SPCD 3C22
SPCD 3C23
SPCD 3D53
SPCJ 1C7
SPCJ 1C8
SPCJ 2C30
SPCJ 3C3
SPCJ 3C48
SPCJ 3D35
SPCJ 4D24
SPCJ 4D28
SPCJ 4D29
SPCJ 4D34
SPCJ 4D36
SPCJ 4D40
SPCJ 4D44
SPCJ 4D61
SPCP 3C2
SPCS 2D26
SPCS 2D32
SPCS 2D37
SPCS 3C4
SPCS 4D11
SPCS 4D12
SPCS 4D13
SPCU 1C1
SPCU 1C6
SPCU 1D39
SPCU 1D47
SPCU 3C14
SPCU 3C15
SPEF 3A2

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

143

7. Protection tripping tag

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

7

The minimum requirement for the tripping tag to function is
the following indeces have been created and SPACOM
events have been enabled by using the Relay Configuration
Tool:
SPAM 05x
index 122 thermal trip (E5/E6)

index 125 dI> trip (E11/E12)
index 126 Is> trip (E13/E14)
index 128 I0> trip (E17/E18)
index 129 I> trip (E19/E20)
SPCD 2D55
index 26 TS2 (E31/E32) note!
index 12 dI01> (E3/E4)
index 15 dI02> (E9/E10)
SPCD 3C21
index 32 dI> L1 (E3/E4)
SPCD 3C22
index 34 dI> L2 (E3/E4)
SPCD 3C23
index 36 dI> L3 (E3/E4)
SPCD 3D53
index 44 TS2 (E27/E28) note!
index 31 3dI> trip (E1/E2)
index 32 3dI>> trip (E3/E4)
index 49 3dI> trip/L1 (1E1/1E2)
index 50 3dI>> trip/L1 (1E3/1E4)
index 53 3dI> trip/L2 (2E1/2E2)
index 54 3dI>> trip/L2 (2E3/2E4)
index 57 3dI> trip/L3 (3E1/3E2)
index 58 3dI>> trip/L3 (3E3/3E4)
SPCJ 1C7
index 12 I0> trip (E3/E4)
index 14 I0>> trip (E7/E8)
SPCJ 1C8
index 16 I0> trip (E3/E4)
index 18 I0>> trip (E7/E8)
SPCJ 2C30
index 23 dI0> trip (E1/E2)
index 25 I0> trip (E5/E6)
SPCJ 3C3
index 20 I> trip (E3/E4)
index 22 I>> trip (E7/E8)
SPCJ 3C48
index 57 I> trip (E3/E4)
index 59 I>> trip (E7/E8)
index 61 I0> trip (E11/E12)
SPCJ 3D35
index 51 TS2 (E23/E24) note!
index 41 I1> trip (E3/E4)
index 43 I2> trip (E7/E8)
index 45 I3> trip (E11/E12)
index 47 I4> trip (E15/E16)
SPCJ 4D24
index 44 TS2 (E25/E26)
index 33 I> trip (E3/E4)
index 35 I>> trip (E7/E8)
index 37 I0> trip (E11/E12)
index 39 I0>> trip (E15/E16)

background image

144

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

7.

Protection tripping tag

Configuration Guide

SPCJ 4D28
index 80 TS2 (E25/E26) note!
index 66 I> trip (E3/E4)
index 68 I>> trip (E7/E8)
index 70 I>>> trip (E11/E12)
index 72 I0> trip (E15/E16)
index 74 I0>> trip (E19/E20)
index 76 dI> trip (E23/E24)
SPCJ 4D29
index 57 TS2 (E25/E26)
index 46 I> trip (E3/E4)
index 48 I>> trip (E7/E8)
index 50 I0> trip (E11/E12)
index 52 I0>> trip (E15/E16)
SPCJ 4D34
index 78 TS2 (E41/E42)
index 60 thermal alarm trip (E5/E6)
index 61 thermal overload trip (E7/E8)
index 63 Is> trip (E11/E12)
index 65 I>> trip (E15/E16)
index 67 I0> trip (E19/E20)
index 69 dI> trip (E23/E24)
index 71 I< trip (E27/E28)
SPCJ 4D36
index 39 TS2 (E25/E26)
index 28 I> trip (E3/E4)
index 30 I>> trip (E7/E8)
index 32 I0> trip (E11/E12)
index 34 I0>> trip (E15/E16)
SPCJ 4D40
index 95 TS2 (E33/E34)
index 80 Ib> trip (E3/E4)
index 82 Ia> trip (E7/E8)
index 84 I< trip (E11/E12)
index 86 dI1> trip (E15/E16)
index 88 dI2> trip (E19/E20)
SPCJ 4D44
index 108 TS2 (E25/E26)
index 97 I> trip (E3/E4)
index 99 I>> trip (E7/E8)
index 101 I01> trip (E11/E12)
index 103 I02> trip (E15/E16)
SPCJ 4D61
index 135 TS2 (E31/E32) note!
index 121 I> trip (E3/E4)
index 123 I>> trip (E7/E8)
index 125 I>>> trip (E11/E12)
index 127 I0> trip (E15/E16)
index 129 I0>> trip (E19/E20)
index 131 dI> trip (E23/E24)
SPCP 3C2
index 62 U>, U>> trip (E3/E4)
index 64 reverse power trip (E7/E8)
SPCS 2D26
index 95 TS2 (E19/E20) note!
index 87 U0b> trip (E3/E4)

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

145

7. Protection tripping tag

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

7

SPCS 2D32
index 107 TS2 (E22/E30) note!
index 97 I0> trip (E5/E6)
index 99 U02> trip (E9/E10)

index 101 I0>> trip (E13/E14)
index 103 Itr> trip (E17/E18)
SPCS 2D37
index 22 TS2 (E23/E24) note!
index 12 I01> first trip (E3/E4)
index 14 I01> second trip (E7/E8)
index 16 I02> trip (E11/E12)
index 18 I03> trip (E15/E16)
SPCS 3C4
index 29 I0> trip (E3/E4)
index 31 I0>> trip (E7/E8)
SPCS 4D11
index 121 TS2 (E25/
E26)
index 111 I> trip (E5/E6)
index 113 I>> trip (E9/E10)
index 115 I>>> trip (E13/E14)
SPCS 4D12
index 134 TS2 (E25/E26)
index 124 I> trip (E5/E6)
index 126 I>> trip (E9/E10)
index 128 I>>> trip (E13/E14)
SPCS 4D13
index 147 TS2 (E25/E26)
index 137 I> trip (E5/E6)
index 139 I>> trip (E9/E10)
index 141 I>>> trip (E13/E14)
SPCU 1C1
index 12 U> trip (E3/E4)
index 14 U< trip (E7/E8)
SPCU 1C6
index 16 U0> trip (E3/E4)
index 18 U0>> trip (E7/E8)
SPCU 1D39
index 126 TS2 (E23/E24) note!
index 120 U0> trip (E11/E12)
SPCU 1D47
index 142 TS2 (E23/E24) note!
index 136 U> trip (E11/E12)
SPCU 3C14
index 20 U> trip (E3/E4)
index 22 U< trip (E7/E8)
SPCU 3C15
index 20 U< trip (E3/E4)
index 22 3U<< trip (E7/E8)
SPEF 3A2
index 101 I> alarm (E3/E4)
index 103 I0> alarm (E7/E8)
index 105 dI> alarm (E11/E12)

background image

146

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

7.

Protection tripping tag

Configuration Guide

7.3.2.

Configurable attributes with the Representation Tool

Please note that the Representation Tool has only effect for general objects i.e. for
the database created by the trip tag itself. The linked event objects have already pre-
defined representations that cannot be changed by this tool but by other means.

• TRIP_REPRESENTATION

The name of the representation (symbol set) used for the general trip indication.
The predefined representation can be selected from the selector type of list called
Library Representations.

By default, more than 50 different kinds of symbol sets have been implemented for
the users to choose from; see Fig. 7.3.2.-6 for graphical presentation of symbol sets.

If there is no appropriate symbol set, the user has the possibility to make use of a
representation of his own. In that case the representation should be of the following
selector type:

Table 7.3.2-1

Selector types

Note! As a presumption these modules are using TS2 as the
indicator of latched output.

If there is no appropriate protection module to pick or if
freely defined process objects are going to be used, it is
possible to link those objects by using the following syntax:

"ID","I1","R1","I2","R2","I3","R3", ...

ID = module ID - (used only as a comment)
I1 = DB index of latch indication object
R1 = representation (symbol set) for latch ind.
I2 = DB index of trip indication object 1
R2 = representation (symbol set) for object 1
I3 = DB index of trip indication object 2
R3 = representation (symbol set) for object 2

If the module does not support sending of an event of a
latched output relay, the vector element I1 has been left as
an empty element i.e. "".

As an example, non-directional overcurrent and neutral
earth-fault of REF 54x feeder terminal:
"REF54x","","F_REPR/F_LATCH1","1","F_REPR/
F_TRIP3",- ”60","F_REPR/F_TRIP11"

The type designation of the protection module x (x=1..5) is
not necessary if there is no logical name for the protection
module in question.

Value

Meaning

-1

Symbol identifier - (used only by tool)

0

Trip off

1

Trip on or alarm is prevailing

2

Alarm has not been acknowledged

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

147

7. Protection tripping tag

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

7

The name of the representation should be written to the selector with a logical path
if any, for example:

F_REPR/TRIP_OWN

The predefined trip symbols have been justified to the left end of the representation
window.

)LJ

3UHGHILQHGV\PEROVLQWKHUHSUHVHQWDWLRQZLQGRZ

)LJ

3UHGHILQHGV\PEROVLQWKHUHSUHVHQWDWLRQVZLQGRZ

background image

148

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

7.

Protection tripping tag

Configuration Guide

)LJ

3UHGHILQHGV\PEROVLQWKHUHSUHVHQWDWLRQVZLQGRZ

)LJ

3UHGHILQHGV\PEROVLQWKHUHSUHVHQWDWLRQVZLQGRZ

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

149

7. Protection tripping tag

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

7

)LJ

7KHGHIDXOWVHWRIUHSUHVHQWDWLRQVIRUWKHSURWHFWLRQWULS

• LATCH_REPRESENTATION

The name of the representation (symbol set) used for the general trip relay latched
indication. The predefined representation can be selected from the selector type of
list called Library Representations.

By default there is only one symbol set for the users to choose from.

If there is no appropriate symbol set, the user has the possibility to make use of a
representation of his own. In that case the representation should be of the following
selector type:

Table 7.3.2-2

Selector types

The name of the representation should be written to the selector with a logical path
if any, for example:

F_REPR/LATCH_OWN

The predefined latch symbols have been justified to the left end of the representation
window.

Value

Meaning

-1

Symbol identifier - (used only by tool)

0

Latch off

1

Latch on

background image

150

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

7.

Protection tripping tag

Configuration Guide

)LJ

7KHGHIDXOWVHWRIUHSUHVHQWDWLRQVIRUWKHSURWHFWLRQODWFK

7.3.3.

Configurable attributes with the Process Object Tool

Depending on the configuration of the trip tag, the Process Object Tool will create
a certain set of process objects in the database. Those process objects which are
going be linked to actual process should be edited to have a station number, an
address and a proper switching state. All other attributes should have suitable values
for normal operation by default.

Table 7.3.3-1

The Process Object Tool will automatically create objects for
the following purposes

Index

Explanation Purpose

10

General protection trip
indication (optional)

The general protection trip indication can be used as
ON/OFF-type indication of any protection trip within
the bay.

11

General trip relay latched
indication (optional)

The general trip relay latched indication can be used
as ON/OFF-type indication of any latched protection
trip relay within the bay.

12-
17

General trip relay reset
command (optional)

The general trip relay reset command object is an
output object which can be used to reset latched
output relays, trip indicators and memorised
parameters.

110

General protection trip
indication (optional)

Event recording object (for accurate time stamp) with
RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.

111

General trip relay latched
indication (optional)

Event recording object (for accurate time stamp) with
RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.

112-
117

Indication for command
termination (optional)

With IEC 870-5-101 and -103 indicates whether the
issued command was successful or not.

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

151

7. Protection tripping tag

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

7

7.4.

Application engineering information

7.4.1.

Pictures

The following picture is found for the trip tag under the path /LIB4/FMOD/
MVPROCESS/INST

Table 7.4.1-1

Pictures for the trip tag

and /LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/USE

Table 7.4.1-2

Pictures for the trip tag

7.4.2.

Language text files

The following Text Translation Tool compatible text files are used by the trip tag.
The path is /LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/LANG0

Table 7.4.2-1

Text Translation Tool compatible text files used by the trip tag

7.4.3.

Help text files

Below there is a list of the trip tag help text files. The path is /LIB4/FMOD/
MVPROCESS/LANG0.

Table 7.4.3-1

Trip tag help text files

Picture

Functionality

FPI_TRIP2.PIC

Picture function for trip tag

Picture Functionality

FORM4FPBI1.PIC

Format picture for printing single indication (BI) type of signals in
MV Process

FORM4FPAI1.PIC

Format picture for printing analog input (AI) type of signals in MV
Process

FORM4FPBO1.PIC

Format picture for printing binary output (BO) type of signals in
MV Process

Text file

Functionality

FPI_TRIP2.TXT

Text file for the database creation of the picture function

FORM4FPBI1.TXT

Text file for format picture of printing single indication (BI) type of
signals

FORM4FPAI1.TXT

Text file for format picture of printing analog input (AI) type of
signals

FORM4FPBO1.TXT

Text file for format picture of printing binary output (BO) type of
signals

Help file

Functionality

FPI_TRIP2.HLP

Help file for trip tag installation and configuration

background image

152

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

7.

Protection tripping tag

Configuration Guide

7.4.4.

Configuration files

The following configuration files are used by the trip tag. The path is LIB4/FMOD/
MVPROCESS/INST

Table 7.4.4-1

Configuration files used by the trip tag.

7.4.5.

Other text files

The following text files are used by the auto-reclosing tag. The path is LIB4/FMOD/
MVPROCESS/USE

Table 7.4.5-1

Text files used by the auto-reclosing tag.

7.4.6.

Process objects

The following process objects will be created for the trip tag.

Table 7.4.6-1

Process objects that will be created for the trip tag.

7.4.7.

Scale objects

At the first installation the auto-reclosing tag creates the scale 1_1 (linear 1:1 scale).

Configuration file

Functionality

FPI_TRIP2.DAT

Contains the configuration data for the trip tag when it is created,
modified or deleted by the configuration tools.

FPI_TRIP2.POT

Contains the process object definitions for the Process Object Tool.

FPI_DAU.TXT

Contains the list of data acquisition units that are typically used by
MV Process.

FPI_FB.TXT

Contains the list of RED 500 function blocks that exist at the
moment.

INDEX4_F11.TXT

Selection list of LIB 510 Rev 4.0.3 MV Process picture functions for
Installation Tool (common for all other picture functions, too.).

Text file

Functionality

PATH4_F1.TXT

Contains the path definitions for the MV Process

Index

Obj. type

Process object

Remarks

Group ident.

10

BI

Protection trip

Optional

FPFTRPITRP

11

BI

Trip relay latched

Optional

FPFTRPITRL

12-
17

BO

Latched trip relay reset

Optional

FPFTRPCTRL

110

EVREC

Protection trip

Only RP570
Optional

FPFTRPETRP

111

EVREC

Trip relay latched

Only RP570
Optional

FPFTRPETRL

112-
117

TERM

Command termination of
latched trip relay reset

Only IEC 870-5-
101 and -103;
Optional

FPFTRPTTRL

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

153

8. Auto-reclosing (AR)

tag

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

8

8.

Auto-reclosing (AR) tag

8.1.

Communication support

The auto-reclosing tag with a database of its own supports the following protocols:

• SPACOM/SPANET (SPA)

• SPACOM/SRIO (ANSI)

• SPACOM/LON (LON)

• RTU2xx (RP570)

• RTU2xx/FTABs (RP570)

• IEC 60870-5-101

• IEC 60870-5-103

• DNP 3.0

• MODBUS RTU

8.2.

Environmental requirements

In order for the auto-reclosing tag to have full functionality, the base picture function
has to be installed.

To be able to enable/disable auto-reclosing function or to interrupt auto-reclosing
sequence remotely, it is necessary to install the standard function for the switching
device (circuit breaker) to gain access to the auto-reclosing dialog of the switching
device.

If the auto-reclosing signal from the SPACOM family is being used, it is
recommended to create an event database first with the SPACOM Relay
Configuration Tool and then link these process objects into the auto-reclosing tag.

8.3.

Configuration of the auto-reclosing tag

8.3.1.

Configurable attributes with the Standard Configuration Tool

The attributes are listed and explained in the following table.

Table 8.3.1-1

Configurable Attributes

Attribute

Meaning

Default

STATION_NAME

Name of the substation

-

BAY_NAME

Name of the bay

-

DEVICE_NAME

Name of the device

-

SPECIAL_IDENTIFIER_’number’ Name of the special identifier ‘nr’ Not configurable

P_OBJECT_LN

Logical name of database
process objects

-

STATION_TYPE

The type of control device &
protocol

RED 500/REX
(LON)

OUTPUT_STATUS

Process objects for output status
with DNP 3.0 protocol

N/A

1MRS751887-MEN

background image

154

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

8.

Auto-reclosing (AR) tag

Configuration Guide

DATA_ACQUISITION_UNIT

The data acquisition unit towards
process

None

FUNCTION_BLOCK

Function block of data
acquisition unit

-

AR_WITH_MULTIPLE_CYCLES

Select object type to indicate
auto-reclosure in progress.

No

SHOW_AR_IN_USE

Show tag during auto-reclosure

Show tag

SHOW_AR_NOT_IN_USE

Show tag also when no auto-
reclosing is in progress

Do not show tag

EVENT_RECORDING

Process objects for event
recording with RP 570

No process objects

LINK_AR_TAG_TO_LN

Create link between existing
auto-reclosing objects from other
LIB 5xx functions.

-

LINK_AR_TAG_TO_MODULE

Select type designation of the
auto-reclosing module.

No linking

Attribute

Meaning

Default

STATION_NAME

A selector type of an editable combo box to select or
enter the name of the substation. By default, the
maximum length of the text is 9 characters. The selection
list shows up to ten last entries.

The configurable attribute is being read directly from the
process object database if there is any process object
linked to the selected auto-reclosing tag. Therefore, the
configurable attribute within a picture function has
meaning only when the process objects have not been
created.

This text will be used as a substation identifier of the
auto-reclosing objects on event list, alarm list, printout,
database query, etc. It is very important that this text is
similar to all objects within the same substation.

BAY_NAME

A selector type of an editable combo box to select or
enter the name of the bay (feeder). By default, the
maximum length of the text is 14 characters. The
selection list shows up to ten latest entries.

The configurable attribute is being read directly from the
process object database, if there is any process object
linked to the selected auto-reclosing tag. Therefore, the
configurable attribute within a picture function has
meaning only when the process objects have not been
created.

This text will be used as a bay (feeder) identifier of the
auto-reclosing objects on event list, alarm list, printout,
database query, etc. It is very important that this text is
similar to all objects within the same bay (feeder).

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

155

8. Auto-reclosing (AR)

tag

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

8

DEVICE_NAME

A selector type of an editable combo box to select or
enter the name (identifier) of the auto-reclosing function.
By default, the maximum length of the text is 5
characters. The selection list shows up to ten latest
entries.

The configurable attribute is being read directly from the
process object database, if there is any process object
linked to the selected auto-reclosing tag. Therefore, the
configurable attribute within a picture function has
meaning only when the process objects have not been
created.

This text will be used as an identifier of the auto-
reclosing on event list, alarm list, printout, database
query, etc.

SPECIAL_IDENTIFIER_’number’ A selector type of an editable combo box to select or

enter a special identifier of the auto-reclosing function.
By default, this identifier is not in use, i.e. it is not
configurable with the SCT. The selection list shows up to
ten latest entries.

The configurable attribute is being read directly from the
process object database, if there is any process object
linked to the selected auto-reclosing tag. Therefore, the
configurable attribute within a picture function has
meaning only when the process objects have not been
created.

This text will be used as an additional identifier of the
auto-reclosing on event list, alarm list, printout, database
query, etc.

background image

156

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

8.

Auto-reclosing (AR) tag

Configuration Guide

P_OBJECT_LN

The logical name of the database process objects. The
maximum length of the text is 10 characters. Allowed
characters are the letters A-Z, all digits and the
underscore (_).

The logical names of process objects have to be unique
throughout the entire system, that is, different objects
cannot have the same logical name. Therefore, it is very
important to have a proper naming convention for the
process object database.

Certain naming convention is also required to speed up
the opening time of the main dialogs. With the predefined
naming convention it is possible to collect all station and
bay related database objects without searching through
the complete database. Therefore, it is advised to use
the following naming convention:

The first three characters identify the substation.
The following four characters identify the bay.
The last three characters can be freely used to identify
the source of the signal, i.e. device, unit, etc.

The following list is presented as an example of the
proper naming convention within one bay. The station
name is Green Bay, and the bay name is HA12
Downtown:

GRB, station

GRBHA12BAY, bay

GRBHA12Q0, circuit breaker Q0

GRBHA12Q1, truck Q1

GRBHA12Q9, earth switch Q9

GRBHA12CT, measurements/current transformer

GRBHA12VT, measurements/voltage transformer

GRBHA12ALA, alarm indicator

GRBHA12AR, auto-reclosing tag

GRBHA12TRP, tripping tag

GRBHA12R1, feeder terminal or protection unit 1

GRBHA12R2, feeder terminal or protection unit 1

GRBHA12LS1, line segment 1 of busbar coloring

GRBHA12LS2, line segment 2 of busbar coloring

GRBHA12LS3, line segment 3 of busbar coloring

GRBHA12LI, line indicator of busbar coloring

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

157

8. Auto-reclosing (AR)

tag

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

8

STATION_TYPE

A selector type of a combo box to select the station type
of the objects. The configurable attribute is being
enabled if the attribute P_OBJECT_LN has been
configured.

The database process objects will be created for the
station type defined here. The list of supported protocols
is as follows:

SPACOM / SPANET (SPA)

SPACOM / SRIO (ANSI)

RED 500 / REx (LON)

RTU2xx (RP570)

RTU2xx / FTABs (RP570)

IEC 870-5-101

IEC 870-5-103

DNP 3.0

MODBUS RTU

If SPACOM device has been connected to the LON-bus
via LON-SPA Gateway (LSG), the station type should be
selected as SPACOM/SPANET (SPA).

If REx device (e.g. REF 541) with LON communication is
used, the station type should be selected as RED 500/
REx (LON).

OUTPUT_STATUS

An ON/OFF type of a toggle button to select whether
there is need for output status process objects with the
DNP 3.0 protocol. If STATION_TYPE is other than DNP
3.0, the configurable attribute is being disabled, and the
value has no meaning.

background image

158

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

8.

Auto-reclosing (AR) tag

Configuration Guide

DATA_ACQUISITION_UNIT

A selector type of an editable combo box to select the
data acquisition unit of the auto-reclosing. The
configurable attribute is being enabled if the attribute
P_OBJECT_LN has been configured.

This selection is not obligatory if the signal engineering is
done by other means than SigTOOL.

The data acquisition unit, i.e. the device or module,
which connects the signals from the process to the
communication system, can be defined either by
selecting the unit from the selection list and editing it or
just by entering the type designation.

If there are more than one data acquisition unit of the
same type within the bay, it is necessary to differentiate
units by using additional characters. As an example, the
data acquisition units for a bay with SPAJ 140 C, SPAC
535 C3 and SACO 64D4:

SPAJ 140 C

SPCJ4D29_1

SPAC 535 C3

SPCJ4D29_2

SPTO6D3 (or SPTO6D3_1)

SACO 64D4

SACO16D2_1

SACO16D2_2

SACO16D2_3

SACO16D2_4

The additional characters should always start with the
underscore (_) and then be followed by an unit
distinction character ranging from 1 - 9, 0, A - Z. If there
is no more than one data acquisition unit of the same
type within the bay, the additional characters can be left
out.

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

159

8. Auto-reclosing (AR)

tag

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

8

FUNCTION_BLOCK

A selector type of an editable combo box to select the
function block (software module) of a data acquisition
unit that handles the signals for this picture function. If
the configurable attribute DATA_ACQUISITION_UNIT
does not specify such a device that contains function
blocks, or the attribute P_OBJECT_LN has not been
configured, this attribute is being disabled, and the value
has no meaning.

This selection is not obligatory if the signal engineering is
done by other means than SigTOOL.

Devices like REF 54x, REM 54x, REC 52x and REC 53x
utilize function blocks for configuration. If the name of the
function block does not exist in the selection list (a new
one), you may enter it yourself!

AR_WITH_MULTIPLE_CYCLES An ON/OFF type of a toggle button to select the object

type for the indication auto-reclosing in progress. The
configurable attribute is being enabled if the attribute
P_OBJECT_LN has been configured. The database
process objects will be created either as a binary input or
as an analog input depending on the selection.

SHOW_AR_IN_USE

An ON/OFF type of a toggle button to select if the tag is
shown when the auto-reclosing is in use. The
configurable attribute is being enabled if the attribute
P_OBJECT_LN has been configured.

By default no tag is shown. This is useful when the auto-
reclosure is normally OFF and a warning should be
produced if the auto-reclosing is in use.

SHOW_AR_NOT_IN_USE

An ON/OFF type of a toggle button to select if the tag is
shown when the auto-reclosing is not in use. The
configurable attribute is being enabled if the attribute
P_OBJECT_LN has been configured.

By default no tag is shown. This is useful when the auto-
reclosure is normally ON and the warning should be
produced if the auto-reclosing is not in use.

EVENT_RECORDING

An ON/OFF type of a toggle button to select whether
there is a need for event recording process objects with
the RP 570 protocol. If STATION_TYPE is other than
RTU 2xx or RTU 2xx/FTABs or P_OBJECT_LN has not
been configured, the configurable attribute is being
disabled, and the value has no meaning.

With RP 570 the time stamp from process device comes
into the event recording process object. If no accurate
time stamp is needed or available, or the device is
emulating the RP 570 without the event recording
possibility, do not set this attribute ON.

background image

160

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

8.

Auto-reclosing (AR) tag

Configuration Guide

LINK_AR_TAG_TO_LN

The logical name of the database process objects of the
auto-reclosing module. The maximum length of the text
is 10 characters.

Allowed characters are the letters A-Z, all digits and the
underscore (_). However, an object name cannot begin
with a digit or an underscore.

The configurable attributes LINK_AR_TAG_TO_LN and
LINK_AR_TAG_TO_MODULE are utilized to create a
link between existing auto-reclosing objects from the
other LIB 5xx function (e.g. auto-reclosing module) and
the auto-reclosing tag. It even supports linking of user-
defined process objects as
LINK_AR_TAG_TO_MODULE is an editable selector.

LINK_AR_TAG_TO_MODULE

An editable selector type of a combo box to select the
type designation of the auto-reclosing module. The
configurable attribute is being enabled if the attribute
LINK_AR_TAG_TO_LN has been configured.

By default, all auto-reclosing modules from SPACOM
family have been implemented for the users to choose
from. The supported modules are:

SPCT 2C5
SPCT 2C17
SPCT 2D38
SPCT 2D46
SPCT 5D54
SPTO 6D3

During the relay installation and configuration, the
following indexes have to be created and SPACOM
events have to be enabled as a minimum requirement for
the auto-reclosing tag by using the SPACOM Relay
Configuration Tool:

SPCT 2C5
index 65 auto-reclosing started/reset (E1/E2)

SPCT 2C17
index 151 auto-reclosing started/reset (E1/E2)

SPCT 2D38
index 70 HSAR started/reset (E1/E2)
index 74 SSAR started/reset (E6/E7)
index 78 delayed SSAR started/reset (E11/E12)

SPCT 2D46
index 91 HSAR forward started/reset (E1/E2)
index 95 SSAR started/reset (E6/E7)
index 109 auto-reclosing interrupted (E25)

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

161

8. Auto-reclosing (AR)

tag

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

8

8.3.2.

Configurable attributes with the Representation Tool

AR_IN_PROGRESS_REPR

The name of the representation (symbol set) used for the indication auto-reclosing
in progress. The predefined representation can be selected from the selector type of
the list called Library Representations.

By default, almost 10 different kinds of symbol sets have been implemented for the
users to choose from.

If there is no appropriate symbol set, it is possible to make use of a representation of
your own. In that case the representation should be of the following selector type:
Auto-reclosing without multiple cycles (BI)

SPCT 5D54
index 32 auto-reclosing interrupted by ARINH (E30)
index 33 auto-reclosing interrupted manually (E31)
index 34 auto-reclosing interrupted by open cmd (E32)
index 40 shot 1 started/reset (channel 1 - E1/E2)
index 46 shot 2 started/reset (channel 2 - E1/E2)
index 52 shot 3 started/reset (channel 3 - E1/E2)
index 58 shot 4 started/reset (channel 4 - E1/E2)
index 64 shot 5 started/reset (channel 5 - E1/E2)

SPTO 6D3
index 16 auto-reclosing interrupted (E7)
index 17 auto-reclosing interrupted by open cmd (E8)
index 18 auto-reclosing interrupted by ARINH (E9)
index 20 shot 1 started/reset (E11/E12)
index 25 shot 2 started/reset (E16/E17)
index 30 shot 3 started/reset (E21/E22)
index 35 shot 4 started/reset (E26/E27)
index 40 shot 5 started/reset (E31/E32)

If there is no appropriate auto-reclosing module to pick,
or if freely defined process objects are going to be used,
it is possible to link those objects by using the following
syntax:

"IDENT","INDX1","REPR1","INDX2","REPR2", ...
IDENT = module ID - (used only as a comment)
INDX1 = DB index of "AR in progress" -object 1
REPR1 = representation (symbol set) for object 1
INDX2 = DB index of "AR in progress" -object 2
REPR2 = representation (symbol set) for object 2

As an example, the auto-reclosing module SPCT 2D46:

"SPCT
2D46","91","F_REPR/F_ARRUN4","95","F_REPR/

ARRUN5"

The type designation of the auto-reclosing module is not
necessary; it is just additional information for users.

background image

162

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

8.

Auto-reclosing (AR) tag

Configuration Guide

Table 8.3.2-1

Auto-reclosing without multiple cycles (BI)

Auto-reclosing with multiple cycles (AI)

Table 8.3.2-2

Auto-reclosing with multiple cycles (AI)

The name of the representation should be written to the selector with a logical path
if any, for example:

F_REPR/AR_RUN

The predefined auto-reclosing in progress symbols have been justified to the left end
of the representation window.

)LJ

7KHGHIDXOWVHWRIUHSUHVHQWDWLRQVIRUWKHDXWRUHFORVLQJLQSURJUHVV

AR_IN_USE_REPR

Value

Meaning

-1

Symbol identifier - (used only by tool)

0

Auto-reclosing not in progress

1

Auto-reclosing in progress

Value

Meaning

-1

Symbol identifier - (used only by tool)

0

Auto-reclosing not in progress

1

Auto-reclosing shot 1 in progress

2

Auto-reclosing shot 2 in progress

3

...

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

163

8. Auto-reclosing (AR)

tag

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

8

The name of the representation (symbol set) used for the indication auto-reclosing
in use/out of use. The predefined representation can be selected from the selector
type of list called Library Representations.

By default, two different kinds of symbol sets have been implemented for the users
to choose from.

If there is no appropriate symbol set, it is possible to use a representation of your
own. In that case the representation should be of the following selector type:

Table 8.3.2-3

Selector Type

The name of the representation should be written to the selector with a logical path
if any, for example:

F_REPR/AR_USE

The predefined symbols have been justified to the left end of the representation
window.

)LJ

7KHGHIDXOWVHWRIUHSUHVHQWDWLRQVIRUWKHDXWRUHFORVLQJLQXVHRXWRIXVH

8.3.3.

Configurable attributes with the Process Object Tool

Depending on the configuration of the auto-reclosing tag, the Process Object Tool
will create a certain set of process objects in the database. The process objects which
are going to be linked to an actual process should be edited to have a station number,

Value

Meaning

-1

Symbol identifier - (used only by tool)

0

Auto-reclose not in use

1

Auto-reclose in use

background image

164

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

8.

Auto-reclosing (AR) tag

Configuration Guide

an address and a proper switching state. Otherwise by default all other attributes
should have suitable values for normal operation.

Table 8.3.3-1

The Process Object Tool will create process objects for
autoreclosing tag based on the following list

8.4.

Application engineering information

8.4.1.

The structure of the auto-reclosing tag

This chapter describes the structure of the auto-reclosing tag. All pictures, form
pictures, help and other text files as well as all database objects are included. The
auto-reclosing tag is a part of the MV Process of LIB 510 and has a directory /LIB4/
FMOD/MVPROCESS, and the standard LIB 510 sub-directories INST, LANG0
and USE.

8.4.2.

Pictures

The following pictures are found for the auto-reclosing tag under the path /LIB4/
FMOD/MVPROCESS/INST

Index

Explanation

Purpose

10

Auto-reclosing in use/out of use
indication (optional)

Indicates if the auto-reclose is in use
(software switch of the auto-reclosing unit)

11

Auto-reclosing in use/out of use
indication (optional)

Indicates if the auto-reclose is in use
(hardware switch of the auto-reclosing
unit)

12

Auto-reclosing in progress/not in
progress ind. (optional)

Indicates if there is an auto-reclosing
sequence running

13

Auto-reclosing interrupt command
(optional)

Interrupts the auto-reclosing sequence

14

Auto-reclosing in use/out of use
command (optional)

Enables/disables the auto-reclosure

110

Auto-reclosing in use/out of use
indication (optional)

Event recording object (for accurate time
stamp) with RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of
stations.

111

Auto-reclosing in use/out of use
indication (optional)

Event recording object (for accurate time
stamp) with RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of
stations.

112

Auto-reclosing in progress/not in
progress ind. (optional)

Event recording object (for accurate time
stamp) with RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of
stations.

113

Auto-reclosing interrupt command
(optional)

Command termination object with IEC
870-5-101 and -103 type of stations.

Output status object with DNP 3.0 type of
stations.

114

Auto-reclosing in use/out of use
command (optional)

Command termination object with IEC
870-5-101 and -103 type of stations.

Output status object with DNP 3.0 type of
stations.

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

165

8. Auto-reclosing (AR)

tag

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

8

Table 8.4.2-1

Pictures for the auto-reclosing tag

and /LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/USE

Table 8.4.2-2

Pictures for the auto-reclosing tag

8.4.3.

Language text files

The following Text Translation Tool compatible text files are used by the auto-
reclosing tag. The path is /LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/LANG0

Table 8.4.3-1

Text Translation Tool compatible text files

8.4.4.

Help text files

Below there is a list of the auto-reclosing tag help text files. The path is /LIB4/
FMOD/MVPROCESS/LANG0.

Table 8.4.4-1

Auto-reclosing tag help text files

8.4.5.

Configuration files

The following configuration files are used by the auto-reclosing tag. The path is
LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/INST

Picture

Functionality

FPI_ARC2.PIC

Picture function for auto-reclosing tag

Picture

Functionality

FORM4FPBI1.PIC

Format picture for printing single indication (BI) type of signals
in MV Process

FORM4FPAI1.PIC

Format picture for printing analog input (AI) type of signals in
MV Process

FORM4FPBO1.PIC

Format picture for printing binary output (BO) type of signals in
MV Process

Text file

Functionality

FPI_ARC2.TXT

Text file for the database creation of the picture function

FORM4FPBI1.TXT

Text file for format picture of printing single indication (BI) type
of signals

FORM4FPAI1.TXT

Text file for format picture of printing analog input (AI) type of
signals

FORM4FPBO1.TXT

Text file for format picture of printing binary output (BO) type of
signals

Help file

Functionality

FPI_ARC2.HLP

Help file for auto-reclosing installation and configuration

background image

166

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

8.

Auto-reclosing (AR) tag

Configuration Guide

Table 8.4.5-1

Configuration files used by the auto-reclosing tag

8.4.6.

Other text files

The following text files are used by the auto-reclosing tag. The path is LIB4/FMOD/
MVPROCESS/USE

Table 8.4.6-1

Text files used by the auto-reclosing tag

8.4.7.

Process objects

The following process objects will be created for the auto-reclosing tag.

Table 8.4.7-1

Process objects created for the auto-reclosing tag

Configuration file

Functionality

FPI_ARC2.DAT

Contains the configuration data for the auto-reclosing tag when it is
created, modified or deleted by the configuration tools.

FPI_ARC2.POT

Contains the process object definitions for the Process Object Tool.

FPI_DAU.TXT

Contains the list of data acquisition units that are typically used by
MV Process.

FPI_FB.TXT

Contains the list of RED 500 function blocks that exist at the
moment.

INDEX4_F11.TXT

Selection list of LIB 510 Rev 4.0.3 MV Process picture functions for
the Installation Tool (common for all other picture functions, too).

Text file

Functionality

PATH4_F1.TXT

Contains the path definitions for the MV Process

Index

Obj. type

Process object

Remarks

Group ident.

10

BI

Auto-reclosing in use

Software switch

Optional

FPFARCISCE

11

BI

Auto-reclosing in use

Hardware switch

Optional

FPFARCISCE

12

BI or AI

Auto-reclosing in
progress

Optional

FPFARCIARC

13

BO

Auto-reclosing
interruption

Optional

FPFARCCINR

14

BO

AR in use/ out of use -
cmd

Optional

FPFARCCSCE

110

EVREC

Event recording for
auto-reclosing in use

Only RP570

Optional

FPFARCESCE

111

EVREC

Event recording for
auto-reclosing in use

Only RP570

Optional

FPFARCESCE

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

167

8. Auto-reclosing (AR)

tag

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

8

8.4.8.

Scale objects

At the first installation the auto-reclosing tag creates the scale 1_1 (linear 1:1 scale).
For multiple shots with SPACOM / SRIO (ANSI) type of station the installation will
also create the scale FPU_1_1000 (linear 1:1000 scale).

112

EVREC

Event recording for
aAuto-reclosing in
progress

Only RP570

Optional

FPFARCEARC

113

TERM / OS

Command termination
of auto-reclosing
interruption

Output status object

Only IEC 870-5-101 and
-103; Optional

Output status object
when station type is
DNP 3.0, optional

FPFARCTINR

114

TERM / OS

Command termination
of auto-reclosing in
use/ out of use –cmd

Output status object

Only IEC 870-5-101 and
-103; Optional

Output status object
when station type is
DNP 3.0, optional

FPFARCTSCE

Index

Obj. type

Process object

Remarks

Group ident.

background image
background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

169

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

9. Alarm indicator

9

9. Alarm

indicator

9.1.

Communication support

• SPACOM/SPANET (SPA)

• SPACOM/SRIO (ANSI)

• RED 500/Rex (LON)

• RTU2xx (RP570)

• RTU2xx/FTABs (RP570)

• IEC 60870-5-101

• IEC 60870-5-103

• DNP 3.0

• MODBUS RTU

9.2.

Picture function installation

This chapter describes the installation of picture function for the MV Process alarm
indicator. The picture function for the alarm indicator is found in the directory /
LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/INST and it should be installed by using LIB4
installation procedures (LIB4/LIB510/MV Process 2.x/Alarm indicator).
Configuration of this picture function shall be performed by using standard
configuration tools such as:

1. Standard Configuration Tool

2. Representation Tool
3. Process Object Tool

9.2.1.

Environmental requirements

In order for the alarm indicator to have full functionality, the LIB 500 Base needs to
be installed. If the value of the attribute TYPE_OF_SIGNAL’number’ is not linked,
it is recommended to install the following components:

1. Station

2. Bay

9.2.2.

Installation

The Alarm indicator picture function is available at small (1*1) size. The size of the
small Alarm indicator picture function is 16 x 20 pixels (1 x 1 semigraphical block).
The button frame is drawn out of this area.

Fig. 9.2.2.-1 presents the Alarm indicator picture function as a part of the complete
bay.

1MRS751887-MEN

background image

170

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

9. Alarm indicator

Configuration Guide

)LJ

7\SLFDO$ODUPLQGLFDWRULQVWDOODWLRQ

Table 9.2.2-1

During the installation, the following information has to be
given

9.3.

Picture function configuration

9.3.1.

Preliminary work

Before the configuration of the picture functions can start, some preparations are
required (i.e. configurations required only once). The usage of object identification
(OI) attribute has to be fixed, the naming convention of the process object has to be
decided and the signal texts have to be translated into local language. For further
information, please refer to the General chapter in this MV Process Configuration
Manual.

9.3.2.

Configuration with the Standard Configuration Tool

The Alarm indicator has the following attributes to configure with the Standard
Configuration Tool:

Table 9.3.2-1

The following attributes can be configured with the Standard
Configuration Tool

Attribute

Meaning

Default

ID

Name/Identification of the picture function within the picture

-

Attribute

Meaning

Default

STATION_NAME

Name of the substation

BAY_NAME

Name of the bay

DEVICE_NAME

Name of the device

SPECIAL_IDENTIFIER_’nr’

Name of the special identifier ‘nr’

Not configurable

P_OBJECT_LN

Logical name of database process
obj.

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

171

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

9. Alarm indicator

9

STATION_TYPE

The type of control device & protocol

RED 500/Rex (LON)

DATA_ACQUISITION_UNIT

The data acquisition unit towards
process

None

TYPE_OF_SIGNAL’x’

The type of the input signal

SIGNAL’x’_TEXT

Identification for signal shown in event
lists, alarm list etc.

Not available

ALARMING_STATE_OF_SIG
NAL’x’

The state of the signal when an alarm
(warning) is activated.

Not available

LINK_SIGNAL’x’_LN

The logical name of the process
object to which the signal is linked.

Not available

LINK_SIGNAL’x’_IX

The index of the process object to
which the signal is linked.

Not available

AUTHORIZATION_GROUP

The name of the authorization group

MV_CONTROL

SYMBOL_WITH_BUTTON

Selection of symbol with or without
button

With button

EVENT_RECORDING

Selection whether the event recording
process objects are created when the
RP570 protocol is used.

Not available

STATION_NAME

A selector type of an editable combo box to select or enter the
name of the substation. By default, the maximum length of the text
is 9 characters. The selection list shows up to ten latest entries.
The configurable attribute is being read directly from the process
object database if there is any process object linked to the selected
alarm indicator. Therefore, the configurable attribute within a
picture function has meaning only when the process objects have
not been created.
This text will be used as a substation identifier of the alarm
indicator objects on event list, alarm list, printout, database query,
etc. It is very important that this text is similar to all objects within
the same substation.

BAY_NAME

A selector type of an editable combo box to select or enter the
name of the bay (feeder). By default, the maximum length of the
text is 14 characters. The selection list shows up to ten latest
entries.
The configurable attribute is being read directly from the process
object database, if there is any process object linked to the
selected alarm indicator. Therefore, the configurable attribute
within a picture function has meaning only when the process
objects have not been created.
This text will be used as a bay (feeder) identifier of the alarm
indicator objects on event list, alarm list, printout, database query,
etc. It is very important that this text is similar to all objects within
the same bay (feeder).

Attribute

Meaning

Default

background image

172

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

9. Alarm indicator

Configuration Guide

DEVICE_NAME

A selector type of an editable combo box to select or enter the
name (identifier) of the alarm indicator. By default, the maximum
length of the text is 5 characters. The selection list shows up to ten
latest entries.
The configurable attribute is being read directly from the process
object database, if there is any process object linked to the
selected alarm indicator. Therefore, the configurable attribute
within a picture function has meaning only when the process
objects have not been created.
This text will be used as an identifier of the alarm indicator on
event list, alarm list, printout, database query, etc.

SPECIAL_IDENTIFIER
_’nr’

A selector type of an editable combo box to select or enter a
special identifier of the alarm indicator. By default, this identifier is
not in use, i.e. it is not configurable with the SCT. The selection list
shows up to ten latest entries.
The configurable attribute is being read directly from the process
object database, if there is any process object linked to the
selected alarm indicator. Therefore, the configurable attribute
within a picture function has meaning only when the process
objects have not been created.

This text will be used as an additional identifier of the alarm
indicator on event list, alarm list, printout, database query, etc.

P_OBJECT_LN

The logical name of the database process objects. The maximum
length of the text is 10 characters. Allowed characters are the
letters A-Z, all digits and the underscore (_).
The logical names of process objects have to be unique
throughout the entire system, that is, different objects cannot have
the same logical name. Therefore, it is very important to have a
proper naming convention for the process object database.
Certain naming convention is also required to speed up the
opening time of the main dialogs. With the predefined naming
convention it is possible to collect all station and bay related
database objects without searching through the complete
database. Therefore, it is advisable to use the following naming
convention:
- The first three characters identify the substation
- The following four characters identify the bay
- The last three characters can be freely used to identify the
source of the signal i.e. device, unit, etc.
The following list is presented as an example of a proper naming
convention within one bay. The station name is Green Bay and the
bay name is HA12
Downtown:
GRB, station
GRBHA12BAY, bay
GRBHA12Q0, circuit breaker Q0
GRBHA12Q1, truck Q1
GRBHA12Q9, earth switch Q9
GRBHA12CT, measurements/current transformer
GRBHA12VT, measurements/voltage transformer
GRBHA12ALA, alarm indicator
GRBHA12AR, auto-reclosing tag
GRBHA12TRP, tripping tag
GRBHA12R1, feeder terminal or protection unit 1
GRBHA12R2, feeder terminal or protection unit 1
GRBHA12LS1, line segment 1 of busbar coloring
GRBHA12LS2, line segment 2 of busbar coloring

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

173

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

9. Alarm indicator

9

GRBHA12LS3, line segment 3 of busbar coloring
GRBHA12LI, line indicator of busbar coloring
If some other naming convention than 3+4 is used, it usually takes
a longer time to open the main control dialogs unless the optional
named program U_OTHER_OBJECTS is being utilized to
introduce other required process objects.

STATION_TYPE

A selector type of a combo box to select the station type of the
objects.
The database process objects will be created for the station type
defined here. The list of supported protocols is as follows:
SPACOM / SPANET (SPA)
SPACOM / SRIO (ANSI)
RED 500 / REx (LON)
RTU2xx (RP570)
RTU2xx / FTABs (RP570)
IEC 870-5-101
IEC 870-5-103
DNP 3.0
MODBUS RTU
If SPACOM device has been connected to the LON-bus via LON-
SPA Gateway (LSG), SPACOM/SPANET (SPA) should be selected
as the station type
If REx device (e.g. REF 541) with LON communication is used,
RED 500/REx (LON) should be selected as the station type

DATA_ACQUISITION_
UNIT

A selector type of an editable combo box to select the data
acquisition unit of the alarm indicator.
This selection is not obligatory if the signal engineering is done by
other means than SigTOOL.
The data acquisition unit, i.e. the device or module, which connects
the signals from the process to the communication system, can be
defined either by selecting the unit from the selection list and
editing it or just by entering the type designation.
If there are more than one data acquisition unit of the same type
within the bay, it is necessary to differentiate units by using
additional characters. As an example, the data acquisition units for
a bay with SPAJ
140 C, SPAC 535 C3 and SACO 64D4 are:
SPAJ 140 C
SPCJ4D29_1
SPAC 535 C3
SPCJ4D29_2
SPTO6D3 (or SPTO6D3_1)
SACO 64D4
SACO16D2_1
SACO16D2_2
SACO16D2_3
SACO16D2_4
The additional characters should always begin with the underscore
(_) and then be followed by an unit distinction character ranging
from 1 - 9, 0, A - Z. If there is no more than one data acquisition
unit of the same type within the bay, the additional characters can
be left out.

background image

174

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

9. Alarm indicator

Configuration Guide

9.3.3.

Configuration with the Representation Tool

The Alarm indicator has the following attributes to configure with the
Representation Tool:

TYPE_OF_SIGNAL’nr’ A selector type of a combo box to select the type of the signal. The

list of supported input signals is as follows:
Binary Input (BI)
Double Binary (DB)
Analog Input (AI)
Linked
If any of the first three choices is selected, the process objects are
created by using the Process Object Tool. When Linked is
selected, the logical name and the index of the process object
where the signal is connected to has to be given. When an empty
string is selected, it means that the signal is discarded by the alarm
indicator.

SIGNAL’nr’_TEXT

This text will be used as an identifier of the signal on event list,
alarm list, printouts etc.

ALARMING_STATE_O
F_SIGNAL’nr’

The alarming state of the signal is defined by this attribute. The
value of the attribute is related to the type of the signal. The
following examples clarify how this attribute should be defined.
- Type of signal is BI, alarming state is 1
value to be set: (1)
- Type of signal is DB, alarming states are 0 and 3
values to be set: (1,0,0,1)
- Type of signal is AI, high alarm = 12, high warning
= 10, low warning = 8, low alarm = 6
values to be set: (12,10,8,6)

LINK_SIGNAL’nr’_TO_
LN

The logical name of the process object to which signal is linked.

LINK_SIGNAL’nr’_TO_
IX

The index of the process object to which signal is linked.

AUTHORIZATION_GR
OUP

A selector type of an editable combo box to select the
authorization group for the object. The maximum length of the text
is 63 characters. The given text has to be usable as a SCIL list
attribute name (see SCIL manual). The contents of the selection
list is taken from the existing authorization groups.
NOTE! The name may not be composed of two letters followed by
a number.
The attribute can be defined, if the object is wanted to be included
in some authorization group. The authorization level of each user
in this group can be defined afterwards by the system manager
with User Management picture.

SYMBOL_WITH_BUTT
ON

An ON/OFF type of a toggle button to select whether the control
dialog(s) can be opened for the alarm indicator or not.
By default, the symbol is provided with an active button.

EVENT_RECORDING An ON/OFF type of a toggle button to select whether there is need

for event recording process objects with the RP 570 protocol. If
STATION_TYPE is other than RTU 2xx or RTU 2xx/FTABs, the
configurable attribute is being disabled, and the value has no
meaning.
With the RP 570 the time stamp from process device comes into
the event recording process object. If no accurate time stamp is
needed or available, or the device is emulating the RP 570 without
an event recording possibility, do not set this attribute ON.

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

175

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

9. Alarm indicator

9

Table 9.3.3-1

The following attributes can be configured with the
Representation Tool

Table 9.3.3-2

The Alarm indicator requires a selector and a symbol for the
following conditions

By default, there are four sets of symbols for the Alarm indicator. These default
representations are shown below. Please note that in the actual system the symbols
representing selector 3 are blinking to draw attention.

Fig. 9.3.3.-1 presents the available A symbols for the Alarm indicator.

Table 9.3.3-3

Default representation for the A symbols

)LJ

$V\PEROVIRUWKH$ODUPLQGLFDWRU

Attribute

Meaning

Default

REPRESENTATION

Selection of symbol set
shown in picture (Square
symbol)

F_REPR/F_ALIND1

REPRESENTATION

The name of the representation (symbol set) used for the alarm
indicator. The predefined representation can be selected from
the selector type of the list called Library Representations.
If there is no appropriate symbol set, it is possible to make and
use a representation set of your own. In that case it is possible
to copy one of the existing representation sets to a
representation file ../APLMOD4/USE/APLMOD4.PIR under the
application and modify each representation as needed. If object
specific representations are needed, the representation set
(under the application) can be renamed, and the name of the
representation may be written to the selector with the logical
path.
For example: F_REPR/MY_SET

Selector

Condition

Default color

1

Selected on monitor

white

2

Update blocked, invalid value, obsolete value, device not
synchronized or overflow

magenta

3

Unacknowledged alarm

red, blinking

4

Acknowledged alarm

red

5

Warning or blockings (alarms, events, printouts or
reprocessing)

yellow

6

Manually entered or substituted

cyan

7

Normal state

green

8

Substituted, internal or external

Dark blue

Symbol

Size

F_REPR/F_ALIND1

small

background image

176

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

9. Alarm indicator

Configuration Guide

Fig. 9.3.3.-2 presents the available led symbols for the Alarm indicator.

Table 9.3.3-4

Default representation for the led symbols

)LJ

/HGV\PEROIRUWKH$ODUPLQGLFDWRU

Fig. 9.3.3.-3 presents the available bell symbols for the Alarm indicator.

Table 9.3.3-5

Default representation for the bell symbols

)LJ

%HOOV\PEROVIRUWKH$ODUPLQGLFDWRU

Fig. 9.3.3.-4 presents the available star symbols for the Alarm indicator.

Table 9.3.3-6

Default representation for the star symbols

)LJ

6WDUV\PEROVIRUWKH$ODUPLQGLFDWRU

9.3.4.

Configuration with the Process Object Tool

Depending on the configuration of the Alarm indicator, the Process Object Tool will
create a certain set of process objects in the database. Those process objects which
are going to be linked to the actual process should be edited to have a station number,
an address and a proper switching state. Otherwise, by default, all other attributes
should have suitable values for normal operation.

If the value of the attribute TYPE_OF_SIGNAL’nr’ is linked, the process object is
not created by the process object tool, but the name and the index of the signal is
given to the attributes LINK_SIGNAL’nr’_TO_LN and
LINK_SIGNAL’nr’_TO_IX.

Symbol

Size

F_REPR/F_ALIND2

small

Symbol

Size

F_REPR/F_ALIND3

small

Symbol

Size

F_REPR/F_ALAIND4

small

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

177

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

9. Alarm indicator

9

Table 9.3.4-1

The Process Object Tool will create process objects based on
the following list

9.3.5.

An example of the alarm indicator configuration

Table 9.3.5-1

The alarm indicator configuration

9.4.

Application engineering information

9.4.1.

The structure of the alarm indicator

This chapter describes the structure of the alarm indicator. All pictures, form
pictures, help and other text files as well as all database objects are included. Alarm
indicator function is a part of the MV Process of the LIB 510 and has a directory /
LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS, and the standard LIB 510 sub-directories INST,
LANG0 and USE.

9.4.2.

Pictures

Below there is a list of all alarm indicator pictures and a short description of their
functionality. Dialogs are described in detail earlier in this document. The paths are
/LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/INST

Table 9.4.2-1

The alarm indicator pictures and their functionality

and /LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/USE

Index

Explanation

Purpose

10...17

Alarm indication

Used for indication of the alarming state of the signal.

Attribute

Value

ID

BAY5_AI

STATION_NAME

Eastwick

BAY_NAME

Outgoing HA5

DEVICE_NAME

AI

P_OBJECT_LN

EST_HA5AI

STATION_TYPE

RED 500/Rex (LON)

DATA_ACQUISITION_UNIT

REF541

TYPE_OF_SIGNAL1

Binary Input (BI)

SIGNAL1_TEXT

SF6 low pressure

ALARMING_STATE_OF_SIGNAL1

(1)

AUTHORIZATION_GROUP

MV_CONTROL

SYMBOL_WITH_BUTTON

Yes

REPRESENTATION

F_REPR/F_ALIND2 (led)

Picture

Functionality

FPI_AIT.PIC

Type picture function for alarm indicator

FPI_AII_S.PIC

Small picture function (1*1) for alarm indicator

background image

178

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

9. Alarm indicator

Configuration Guide

Table 9.4.2-2

The alarm indicator pictures and their functionality

9.4.3.

Language text files

The following Text Translation Tool compatible text files are used by the alarm
indicator. The path is /LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/LANG0

Table 9.4.3-1

Text Translation Tool compatible text files

9.4.4.

Help text files

Below there is a list of the alarm indicator help text files.

The path is /LIB4/FMOD/

MVPROCESS/LANG0.

Table 9.4.4-1

Alarm indicator help text files

9.4.5.

Configuration files

The following configuration files are used by the alarm indicator. The path is LIB4/
FMOD/MVPROCESS/INST

Table 9.4.5-1

Configuration files used by the alarm indicator

Picture

Functionality

FPU_AIA.PIC

Main control dialog

FPU_AIB.PIC

Time stamp dialog

FPU_AIC.PIC

Alarm state dialog

FPU_AID.PIC

Blockings dialog

FORM4FPBI1

Format picture for printing the alarm for binary input signal.

FORM4FPDB1

Format picture for printing the alarm for double binary input signal.

FORM4FPAI1

Format picture for printing the alarm for analog input signal.

Text file

Functionality

FPU_AI.TXT

Text file for all alarm indicator dialogs

Help file

Functionality

FPI_AI.HLP

Picture function installation help file

FPU_AIA.HLP

Alarm indicator control dialog help file

FPU_AIB.HLP

Last Alarm dialog help file

FPU_AIC.HLP

Alarm state dialog help file

FPU_AID.HLP

Blockings dialog help file

Configuration file

Functionality

FPI_AI.DAT

Contains the configuration data for alarm indicator when it is cre-

ated, modified or deleted by configuration tools.

FPI_AI.POT

Contains the process object definitions for the Process Object

Tool.

INDEX4_F11.TXT

Selection list of MV Process picture functions for LIB4 installation

tool (common for all other picture functions, too).

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

179

10. REC 501

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

10

10. REC

501

10.1.

Communication support

• SPACOM/SPANET (SPA)

• ANSI

• RP570

10.2.

Picture function installation

This chapter describes the installation of the picture function for the MV Process
REC 501. The picture function for REC 501 is found in the directory /LIB4/
FMOD/MVPROCESS/INST and it should be installed by using LIB4 installation
procedures (LIB4/LIB510/MV Process 2.x/REC 501). Configuration of this picture
function shall be performed by using standard configuration tools such as:

1. Standard Configuration Tool

2. Representation Tool
3. Process Object Tool.

10.2.1.

Environmental requirements

In order for the REC 501 to have full functionality, the following components need
to be installed:

• Base

• Station *

• Bay *

* When REC 501 is configured to work as stand-alone, bay and station picture
functions are not obligatory.

10.2.2.

Installation

There are three different sizes of the REC 501 picture functions: small (1*1),
medium (2*2) and large (3*3). The size of the small REC 501 picture function is 16
x 20 pixels (1 x 1 semigraphical block), the medium picture function is 32 x 40 pix-
els (2 x 2 semigraphical blocks) and the large picture function is 48 x 60 pixels (3 x
3 semigraphical blocks). The button frame is drawn out of this area.

It is

QRW recommended to use the medium size of the picture function within the

same bay with a small or a large picture functions because of the different snap of
the feeder lines.

Fig. 10.2.2.-1 presents the REC 501 controlling the RMU station.

1MRS751887-MEN

background image

180

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

10. REC 501

Configuration Guide

)LJ 508ZLWK5(&

Table 10.2.2-1 During the installation, the following information has to be

given

10.3.

Picture function configuration

10.3.1.

Preliminary work

Before the configuration of the picture functions can start, some preparatory
configurations are required (configurations required only once). The usage of the
object identification (OI)-attribute has to be fixed, the naming convention of the
process object has to be decided, and the translation of the signal texts into local
language has to be performed. For further information, please refer to the General
chapter in this MV Process Configuration Manual.

10.3.2.

Configuration with the Standard Configuration Tool

The REC 501 has the following attributes to configure with the Standard
Configuration Tool:

Table 10.3.2-1 Configurable attributes

Attribute

Meaning

Default

ID

Name/Identification of the picture function within the picture

Attribute

Meaning

Default

STATION_NAME

Name of the substation

-

BAY_NAME

Name of the bay

-

COMMON_BAY_NAME

Bay name for the common process
objects

-

DEVICE_NAME

Name of the device

-

SPECIAL_IDENTIFIER_’num
ber’

Special identifier to the object.
Depending on the system
configuration up to three special
identifiers can be used.

-

P_OBJECT_LN

The logical name of process objects

-

SWITCHING_DEVICE_TYP
E

The type of the controlled switching
device

Normal disconnector

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

181

10. REC 501

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

10

SWITCHING_DEVICE_PUR
POSE

The purpose of the controlled
switching device

Disconnector

SWITCH_SECTION

Selection for controlled object within
REC 501

Switching device 1

STATION_TYPE

The type of control device & protocol SPACOM/SPANET

(SPA)

DEVICE_USE

Selection for device to work as a
station or as a slave in a station

-

STATION_ADDRESS

Station address of REC 501

0

STATION_LR_SWITCH

Binary input working as station local
remote switch

BI (7/8)

STATION_LR_POLARITY

Polarity of the station local remote
switch

Local=0, Remote=1

COMMUNICATION

Communication type between REC
501 and MicroSCADA

CONTINUOUS

TELEPHONE_NUMBER

telephone number of REC 501

-

SYMBOL_WITH_BUTTON

Selection of symbol with or without
button (not in network topology Line
Disconnector picture function)

TRUE

PULSE_COUNTER

The selection of creating process
object for pulse counter

FALSE

AUTHORIZATION_GROUP

The name of the authorization group MV_CONTROL

MOTORIZED

Selection for motorized or manually
operated

TRUE

COMPACT_INSTALLATION

Is the disconnector is installed over
the busbar

FALSE

U_INTERLOCKING

User specific interlocking program

U_BINARY_INPUT_TEXTS

Field texts for binary input dialog.

Attribute

Meaning

Default

STATION_NAME

A selector type of an editable combo box to select or
enter thename of the substation. By default, the
maximum length of the text is 9 characters. The selection
list shows up to ten latest entries.
The configurable attribute is being read directly from the
process object database, if there is any process object
linked to the selected REC 501. Therefore, the
configurable attribute within a picture function has
meaning only when the process objects have not been
created.
This text will be used as a substation identifier of the
switching device objects on event list, alarm list, printout,
database query, etc. It is very important that this text is
similar to all objects within the same substation.

background image

182

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

10. REC 501

Configuration Guide

BAY_NAME

A selector type of an editable combo box to select or
enter the name of the bay (feeder). By default, the
maximum length of the text is 14 characters. The
selection list shows up to ten latest entries.
The configurable attribute is being read directly from the
process object database, if there is any process object
linked to the selected REC 501. Therefore, the
configurable attribute within a picture function has
meaning only when the process objects have not been
created.
This text will be used as a bay (feeder) identifier of the
REC 501 objects on event list, alarm list, printout,
database query, etc. It is very important that this text is
similar to all objects within the same bay (feeder).

DEVICE_NAME

A selector type of an editable combo box to select or
enter the name (identifier) of the REC 501. By default,
the maximum length of the text is 5 characters. The
selection list shows up to ten latest entries.
The configurable attribute is being read directly from the
process object database, if there is any process object
linked to the selected REC 501. Therefore, the
configurable attribute within a picture function has
meaning only when the process objects have not been
created.
This text will be used as an identifier of the REC 501 on
event list, alarm list, printout, database query, etc.

SPECIAL_IDENTIFIER_’number

A selector type of an editable combo box to select or
enter a special identifier of the REC 501. By default, this
identifier isnot in use, i.e. it is not configurable with the
SCT. The selectionlist shows up to ten latest entries.

The configurable attribute is being read directly from the
process object database, if there is any process object
linked to the selected REC 501. Therefore, the
configurable attribute within a picture function has
meaning only when the process objects have not been
created.
This text will be used as an additional identifier of the
REC 501 on event list, alarm list, printout, database
query, etc.

COMMON_BAY_NAME

Special bay name for common process objects (indexes
32-48).If REC 501 unit controls only one switching device
BAY_NAME and COMMON_BAY name has to be same.
If both objects are used they should be configured to
have different bay name and shared common bay name.

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

183

10. REC 501

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

10

P_OBJECT_LN

The logical name of the database process objects. The
maximumlength of the text is 10 characters. Allowed
characters are the letters A-Z, all digits and the
underscore (_).
The logical names of process objects have to be unique
throughoutthe entire system, that is, different objects
cannot have the same logical name. Therefore, it is very
important to have a proper naming convention for the
process object database.
Certain naming convention is also required to speed up
the opening time of the main dialogs. With the predefined
naming convention it is possible to collect all station and
bay related database objects without searching through
the complete database. Therefore, it is advised to use
the following naming convention:
- The first three characters identify the substation
- The following four characters identify the bay
- The last three characters can be freely used to identify
the source of the signal, i.e. device, unit, etc.
The following list is presented as an example of the
proper naming convention within one bay. The station
name is Green Bay, and the bay name is HA12
Downtown:
- GRB, station
- GRBHA12BAY, bay
- GRBHA12Q0, circuit breaker Q0
- GRBHA12Q1, truck Q1
- GRBHA12Q9, earth switch Q9
- GRBHA12CT, measurements/current transformer
- GRBHA12VT, measurements/voltage transformer
- GRBHA12ALA, alarm indicator
- GRBHA12AR, auto-reclosing tag
- GRBHA12TRP, tripping tag
- GRBHA12R1, feeder terminal or protection unit 1
- GRBHA12R2, feeder terminal or protection unit 1
- GRBHA12LS1, line segment 1 of busbar coloring
- GRBHA12LS2, line segment 2 of busbar coloring
- GRBHA12LS3, line segment 3 of busbar coloring
- GRBHA12LI, line indicator of busbar coloring

SWITCHING_DEVICE_TYPE

A selector type of a combo box to select the type of the
switching device controlled by REC 501 unit. By default,
the type is a disconnector.

SWITCHING_DEVICE_PURPO
SE

A selector type of a combo box to select the purpose of
the switching device.
The configurable attribute has only an informative
purpose, since by default, it is not used by any function
within LIB 5xx. The attribute is being stored into the
process object database (to the 25th or 26th character of
the RX attribute) for user-defined purposese.g. for
special search condition on the alarm or event list.

SWITCH_SECTION

Within REC 501 there are two objects. With the help of
the attribute SWITCH_SECTION it is possible to select
the object used for controlling the switching device. If
both objects within REC 501 are used, picture functions
for them are installed separately under the same logical
name.

background image

184

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

10. REC 501

Configuration Guide

STATION_TYPE

A selector type of a combo box to select the station type
of the process objects.
The database process objects will be created for the
station type defined here. The list of supported protocols
is as follows:
- SPACOM / SPANET (SPA)
- SPACOM / SRIO (ANSI)
- RP570

DEVICE_USE

A selector type of a combo box to select whether the
REC 501 unit is a stand-alone device or a spa-slave.
The difference between these two choices is the handling
of the station and bay local/remote switches. When REC
501 unit is configured as a slave, station and bay picture
functions are obligatory and the local/remote indication is
read from them.

STATION_ADDRESS

The unit number of station.

STATION_LR_SWITCH

Identification for binary input object used as station local/
remote switch. The information is taken from this binary
input when REC 501 is working as a stand alone device
(DEVICE_USE = station).

STATION_LR_POLARITY

The polarity of the station local/remote-switch input
signal.

COMMUNICATION

The communication type used between MicroSCADA
and REC 501. Continuous = communication active all the
time
During = communication is activated only when operating
(when control dialog is opened line is set in use)
Dial-up = The control dialog makes the call to the
substation (line is configured as an autocaller line)

TELEPHONE_NUMBER

The telephone number of the REC 501. This selection is
relevant only when DIAL_UP communication is selected.

SYMBOL_WITH_BUTTON

An ON/OFF type of a toggle button to select whether the
control dialog(s) can be opened for the object.
By default the symbol is provided with an active button.

PULSE_COUNTER

Selection whether the process objects for pulse counter
are created.

AUTHORIZATION_GROUP

A selector type of an editable combo box to select the
authorization group for the object. The maximum length
of the text is 63 characters. The given text has to be
usable as a SCIL list attribute name (see SCIL manual).
The contents of the selection list is taken from the
existing authorization groups.
NOTE! The name may not be composed of two letters
followed by a number.
The attribute can be defined, if the object is wanted to be
included in some authorization group. The authorization
level of each user in this group can be defined afterwards
by the system manager with User Management pictures.

MOTORIZED

An ON/OFF-type of toggle button to select if the object is
motorized and can be controlled remotely by SCS/
MicroSCADA.

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

185

10. REC 501

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

10

COMPACT_INSTALLATION

An ON/OFF-type of toggle button to select if the
disconnector is installed over the busbar (compact
installation). This selection is not obligatory if the
topological busbar coloring is not used.

U_INTERLOCKING

An optional named program which is designed for the
internal interlocking purpose.
With this internal interlocking program it is possible to
make control buttons insensitive if required. It is also
capable of generating interlocking cause messages to
the information bar of the control dialog.
As an example a simple interlocking program which
checks if the earth switch is open before allowing the
control commands for the circuit breaker controlled by
REC 501.

;******For interlocking purposes only!******

;

; by this program you can create internal

; interlockings by SCIL

;

; as OUTPUT you can give variables:

;

; @OPEN_INTERLOCKED,

; boolean, (if true then opening gets disabled)

; @CLOSE_INTERLOCKED,

; boolean, (if true then closing gets disabled)

; @INTERLOCKING_CAUSE,

; text, cause to be shown on the dialog

information bar

;

; None of these is obligatory!

;

;*****************************************

;earth switch Q9 not open

#IF GRB_HA12Q9:POS10==0 #THEN #BLOCK

#IF GRB_HA12Q9:POV10<>2 #THEN #BLOCK

@OPEN_INTERLOCKED = TRUE

@CLOSE_INTERLOCKED = TRUE

@INTERLOCKING_CAUSE = "Interlocked - Earth

switch Q9 not open"

#BLOCK_END

#BLOCK_END

#ELSE #BLOCK

@OPEN_INTERLOCKED = TRUE

@CLOSE_INTERLOCKED = TRUE

@INTERLOCKING_CAUSE = "Interlocked - Earth

switch Q9 not updated"

#BLOCK_END

.U_BINARY_INPUT_TEXTS

This program provides a possibility to write an optional
identification for binary inputs represented in binary
inputs dialog.
The field texts are written between the quotation marks.
The length of identification texts depends on the free
space in binary inputs dialog.
If there is no texts defined by this program the default
texts are taken in use. (Input X2 (1/2) ... )

background image

186

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

10. REC 501

Configuration Guide

10.3.3.

Configuration with the Representation Tool

The REC 501 function has the following attributes to configure with the
Representation Tool.

Table 10.3.3-1 Configurable attributes

Representation symbols can be seen in other MV process documents. REC 501 pro-
vides representation set for all switching devices in the MV process.

Table 10.3.3-2 The REC 501 requires a selector and a symbol for the

following conditions

Attribute

Meaning

Default

REPRESENTATION

Selection of symbol set
shown in picture

F_REPR/F_DISC1(Diamond
symbol)

REPRESENTATION

The representation set presented by the representation tool is

related to the configurable attribute SWITCHING_DEVICE_TYPE,
hence depending on the configuration the representation set can be
for disconnectors, breakers, earthing switches or trucks.

The name of the representation (symbol set) that is used for the
switching device state indication. The name of the representation
can be selected in the combo box called Representation. The
selected symbol is shown in the preview window.

If there is no appropriate symbol set, it is possible to make and use
a representation set of your own. In that case you can copy one of
the existing representation sets to a representation file ../
APLMOD4/USE/APLMOD4.PIR under the application and modify
each representation as needed. If object specific representations
are needed, then you can rename the representation set (under the
application) and write the name of the representation to the selector
with logical path.

For example: F_REPR/MY_SET

Selector

Condition

Default color

0

Intermediate; selected, under command

white, blinking

1

Intermediate; selected on command

white

2

Intermediate; update blocked or obsolete value

magenta

3

Intermediate; unacknowledged alarm

red, blinking

4

Intermediate; acknowledged alarm

red

5

Intermediate; warning or blockings (alarms, events,
printouts or reprocessing)

yellow

6

Intermediate; manually entered

cyan

7

Intermediate; control blocked

brown

8

Intermediate; normal state

green

10

Closed; selected, under command

white, blinking

11

Closed; selected on command

white

12

Closed; update blocked or obsolete value

magenta

13

Closed; unacknowledged alarm

red, blinking

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

187

10. REC 501

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

10

10.3.4.

Configuration with the Process Object Tool

Depending on the configuration of the REC 501, the Process Object Tool will create
a certain set of process objects in the database. The process objects, which are going
to be linked to the actual process, should be edited to have a station number, an
address and a proper switch state. Otherwise, by default, all other attributes should
have suitable values for normal operation.

14

Closed; acknowledged alarm

red

15

Closed; warning or blockings (alarms, events, printouts or
reprocessing)

yellow

16

Closed; manually entered

cyan

17

Closed; control blocked

brown

18

Closed; normal state

green

20

Open; selected, under command

white, blinking

21

Open; selected on command

white

22

Open; update blocked or obsolete value

magenta

23

Open; unacknowledged alarm

red, blinking

24

Open; acknowledged alarm

red

25

Open; warning or blockings (alarms, events, printouts or
reprocessing)

yellow

26

Open; manually entered

cyan

27

Open; control blocked

brown

28

Open; normal state

green

30

Faulty; selected, under command

white, blinking

31

Faulty; selected on command

white

32

Faulty; update blocked or obsolete value

magenta

33

Faulty; unacknowledged alarm

red, blinking

34

Faulty; acknowledged alarm

red

35

Faulty; warning or blockings (alarms, events, printouts or
reprocessing)

yellow

36

Faulty; manually entered

cyan

37

Faulty; control blocked

brown

38

Faulty; normal state

green

40

Unknown; selected, under command

white, blinking

41

Unknown; selected on command

white

42

Unknown; not sampled or object missing

magenta

Selector

Condition

Default color

background image

188

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

10. REC 501

Configuration Guide

Table 10.3.4-1 The Process Object Tool will create process objects based on

the following list

Index

Explanation

Purpose

10

Position indication

Used for indication of the REC 501 state open /close
/intermediate/faulty.

11

Open command

Used for sending Open select command of the
disconnector section to the control unit.

12

Close command

Used for sending Close select command of the
disconnector section to the control unit

13

Execute command

Used for sending Execute command to the control
unit.

14

Cancel command

Used for sending Cancel command to the control
unit.

15

Operation counter

Used for monitoring the number of object state
changes.

16

Operation counter reset

Used for sending the reset operation counter
command to the control unit.

17

Pulse counter

Used for monitoring the pulse counter values.

18

Reset pulse counter

Used for sending the reset pulse counter command
to control unit.

19

Selected on monitor

In internal use, tags the selection of the object made
in different pictures or monitors.

20

Command event

In internal use.

21-31

*

32

Binary input X2 (1/2)

Used for monitoring the state of the binary input.

33

Binary input X2 (3/2)

Used for monitoring the state of the binary input.

34

Binary input X2 (4/5)

Used for monitoring the state of the binary input.

35

Binary input X2 (6/5)

Used for monitoring the state of the binary input.

36

Binary input X2 (7/8)

Used for monitoring the state of the binary input.

37

Battery voltage level low

Used for monitoring the battery voltage level

38

Power supply
temperature

Used for monitoring the power supply temperature

39

Auxiliary supply

Used for monitoring the state of auxiliary supply.

40

Heating ON/OFF

Used for monitoring the state of the heating.

41

Temperature

Used for monitoring the temperature value.

42

Battery charging voltage

Used for monitoring the state of the battery charging
voltage.

43

Minimum battery voltage

Used for monitoring the state of the minimum battery
voltage.

44

Reset minimum battery
voltage

Used for sending the command Reset minimum
battery voltage to the control unit.

45

Battery test

Used for sending Start battery test command to the
control unit.

46

Heating setting value

Used for monitoring the heating setting value.

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

189

10. REC 501

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

10

*) Indexes from 21 .. 31 are similar to indexes 10 .. 20 and they are created if
SWITCH_SECTION attribute is defined as Switching device 2 during the
configuring phase.

10.4.

Application engineering information

10.4.1.

The structure of REC 501

This document describes the structure of REC 501. All pictures, form pictures, help
and other text files as well as all database objects are included. The REC 501
function is a part of the MV Process of LIB 510 and has a directory /LIB4/FMOD/
MVPROCESS, and the standard LIB 510 subdirectories INST, LANG0 and USE.

10.4.2.

Pictures

Below there is a list of all REC 501 pictures and a short description of their
functionality. The paths are /LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/INST

Table 10.4.2-1 REC 501 pictures

and /LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/USE

Table 10.4.2-2 REC 501 pictures

47

Heating set-point

Used for sending Heating limit command to the
control unit.

48

REC 501 Blockings

Used for printouts of blocking operations. Internal
use only.

49

Used for reading transparent SPA messages from
the slave unit

Index

Explanation

Purpose

Picture

Functionality

FPI_C501.PIC

REC 501 picture function (1*1)

FPI_C501M.PIC

REC 501 picture function (2*2)

FPI_C501L.PIC

REC 501 picture function (3*3)

Picture

Functionality

FPU_C501A.PIC

REC 501 main control dialog

FPU_C501B.PIC

Control confirmation dialog

FPU_C501C.PIC

Forced operation dialog

FPU_C501D.PIC

State settings dialog

FPU_C501E.PIC

Combo list for state settings dialog

FPU_C501F.PIC

Blockings dialog

FPU_C501G.PIC

Alarm state dialog

FPU_C501H.PIC

Operation counter dialog

FPU_C501I.PIC

Data dialog

FPU_C501J.PIC

Binary inputs dialog

background image

190

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

10. REC 501

Configuration Guide

10.4.3.

Language text files

The following Text Translation Tool compatible text files are used by the REC 501
and the path is /LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/LANG0:

Table 10.4.3-1 Text Translation Tool compatible text files.

10.4.4.

Help text files

Below there is a list of the REC 501 help text files. The path is /LIB4/FMOD/
MVPROCESS/LANG0.

Table 10.4.4-1 REC 501 help text files

FPU_C501K.PIC

Object messages dialog

FPU_C501L.PIC

Pulse counter dialog

FPU_C501M.PIC

Combo list for alarm state dialog

FPU_C501N.PIC

Clock synchronization dialog

FPU_C501O.PIC

Combo list for Clock sync. dialog

FPU_C501P.PIC

General info dialog

FPU_C501R.PIC

Update process data dialog

FPU_C501S.PIC

Conn. to Relay Setting Tool dialog

FPU_C501T.PIC

Program versions dialog

FPU_C501U.PIC

Control authority dialog

FPU_C501V.PIC

Position simulation dialog

FORM4FDB1.PIC

Format picture for position indication

FORM4FBO1.PIC

Format picture for open select cmd., Close select cmd,
Cancel cmd. And Execute cmd.

FORM4FPBI1.PIC

Format picture for binary input objects.

Picture

Functionality

Text file

Functionality

FPI_C501.TXT

Object texts for process objects

FPU_C501.TXT

Dialog texts

FORM4FPDB1.TXT

Text file for position indication

FORM4FPBO1.TXT

Text file for open select cmd., Close select cmd, Cancel
cmd. And Execute cmd.

FORM4FPBI1.TXT

Text file for binary input objects.

Help file

Functionality

FPI_C501.HLP

Installation help for REC 501

FPU_C501A.HLP

Help for main control dialog

FPU_C501C.HLP

Help for main forced operation dialog

FPU_C501D.HLP

Help for state settings dialog

FPU_C501F.HLP

Help for blockings dialog

FPU_C501G.HLP

Help for alarm state dialog

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

191

10. REC 501

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

10

10.4.5.

Configuration files

The following configuration files are used by the REC 501 and the path is /LIB4/
FMOD/ MVPROCESS/INST:

Table 10.4.5-1 Configuration files used by REC 501

10.4.6.

Other text files

The following text files are used by the REC 501 function. The paths are /LIB4/
FMOD/MVPROCESS/USE

Table 10.4.6-1 Text files used by the REC 501 function

Table 10.4.6-2 Text files used by the REC 501 function

FPU_C501H.HLP

Help for operation counter dialog

FPU_C501I.HLP

Help for data dialog

FPU_C501K.HLP

Help for object messages dialog

FPU_C501L.HLP

Help for pulse counter dialog

FPUI_C501N.HLP

Help for clock synchronizarion dialog

FPU_C501R.HLP

Help for update process data dialog

FPU_C501S.HLP

Help for Relay Setting tool dialog

Help file

Functionality

Configuration file

Functionality

FPI_C501.DAT

Conf. data file

FPI_C501.POT

Contains the process object definitions for the Process
Object Tool.

INDEX4_F1.TXT

Selections list of MV-process picture functions for LIB4
installation tool

Text file

Functionality

FPU_C501ST.TXT

Command procedure for clock sync.

FPU_C501CH.TXT

Command procedure for clock sync.

FPU_C501SY.TXT

Command procedure for clock sync.

FPU_C5AUTH.TXT

Local / remote authorization service

FPU_SELECT.TXT

Selection service

FPU_EXEC.TXT

Execution service

FPU_CANCEL.TXT

Cancellation service

FPU_UPDATE.TXT

Update process data service

Text file

Functionality

FPU_C501ST.TXT

Command procedure for clock sync.

FPU_C501CH.TXT

Command procedure for clock sync.

FPU_C501SY.TXT

Command procedure for clock sync.

background image

192

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

10. REC 501

Configuration Guide

and the path /’apl’/PICT/

Table 10.4.6-3 Text files used by the REC 501 function

10.4.7.

Process objects

In the table below, there are listed indexes of process object, data type, purpose,
Group identifier (RX-attribute), SPA parameter and ANSI- address where the
process object is linked.

Table 10.4.7-1 Process objects

FPU_AUTH.TXT

Contains the SCIL code for station authority check. This
code is executed by the main control dialog for the switching
device.

FPU_SW_SEL.TXT

Contains the SCIL code for sending Open or Close
selection command to the switching device. This code is
executed by the main control dialog.

FPU_SW_EXE.TXT

Contains the SCIL code for sending Execute command to
the switching device. This code is executed by the main
control dialog.

FPU_SW_CAN.TXT

Contains the SCIL code for sending Cancel command to the
switching device. This code is executed by the main control
dialog.

FPU_UPDATE.TXT

Contains the SCIL code for updating process objects when
they are update-deblocked. This code is executed by the
command procedure FPU_UPDATE.

PATH4_F1.TXT

Contains the path definitions for the MV Process.

Text file

Functionality

Text file

Functionality

FPU_C501S.TXT

Stations included in the clock sync

Index

Data type

Process object

Group ident.

SPA

ANSI

10

DB

Object 1 Position
indication

FPQD01IPOS

I3

0, (750 EV)

11

BO

Object 1 Open select
command

FPQD01COBC

V1

500

12

BO

Object 1 Close select
command

FPQD01COBC

V2

502

13

BO

Object 1 Execute
command

FPQD01COBC

V3

506

14

BO

Object 1 Cancel
command

FPQD01COBC

V4

508

15

AI

Object 1 Operation
counter

FPQD01ICNR

V5

504

16

AO

Object 1 Reset
operation counter

FPQD01SCNR

V5

104

17

PC

Object 1 Pulse counter FPQD01MMSC

V20

1010

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

193

10. REC 501

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

10

18

BO

Object 1 Reset pulse
counter

FPQD01CMSC

-

-

19

AI

Object 1 Selected on
monitor

FPQD01XMEV

-

-

20

BI

Object 1 Command
event

FPQD01XCEV

-

-

21

DB

Object 2 Position
indication

FPQD01IPOS

I3

1,(753 EV)

22

BO

Object 2 Open select
command

FPQD01COBC

V1

501

23

BO

Object 2 Close select
command

FPQD01COBC

V2

503

24

BO

Object 2 Execute
command

FPQD01COBC

V3

507

25

BO

Object 2 Cancel
command

FPQD01COBC

V4

509

26

AI

Object 2 Operation
counter

FPQD01ICNR

V5

505

27

AO

Object 2 Reset
operation counter

FPQD01SCNR

V5

105

28

PC

Object 2 Pulse counter FPQD01MMSC

V20

1012

29

BO

Object 2 Reset pulse
counter

FPQD01CMSC

-

-

30

AI

Object 2 Selected on
monitor

FPQD01XMEV

-

-

31

BI

Object 2 Command
event

FPQD01XCEV

-

-

32

BI

BI 1

FPQD01ISCE

I4

2

33

BI

BI 2

FPQD01ISCE

I5

3

34

BI

BI 3

FPQD01ISCE

I6

4

35

BI

BI 4

FPQD01ISCE

I7

5

36

BI

BI 5

FPQD01ISCE

I8

6

37

BI

Battery voltage level

FPQD01IALA

I11

7

38

BI

Power supply
temperature

FPQD01IALA

I9

8

39

BI

Auxiliary supply
connection state

FPQD01IALA

I10

9

40

BI

Heating ON / OFF

FPQD01ISCE

I12

-

41

AI

Temperature

FPQD01MTMP

I1

1000

42

AI

Battery charging
voltage

FPQD01MVOL

I2

1002

43

AI

Minimum battery
voltage

FPQD01MVOL

V6

1004

44

BO

Minimum battery
voltage reset

FPQD01CVOL

V7

510

Index

Data type

Process object

Group ident.

SPA

ANSI

background image

194

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

10. REC 501

Configuration Guide

10.4.8.

Scale objects

At the first installation, REC 501 creates the scale 1_1 (linear 1:1 scale). For ANSI
type of station, the scale FPU_1_10 (linear 1:10 scale) will also be created at the
installation.

10.4.9.

Command procedures

At the first installation, REC 501 creates the following command procedures:

FPU_UPDATE, which updates process objects when they are update-deblocked.
This feature is similar to the LIB 500 Blocking List function.

For SPACOM / SRIO (ANSI)-type of station, the command procedure FPU_AI2DB
will be created at the installation. The command procedure FPU_AI2DB updates
position indication double binary from an analog input.

The first use of clock sync. dialog creates the following command
procedures:FPU_C501ST, FPU_C501CH, FPU_C501SY, which handles the
cyclical clock synchronisation of REC 501 stations.

When the selected station type is RP 570, a command procedure FPU_C501RD is
created for activating the decoding of the transparent spa message.

10.4.10.

Event channels

For SPACOM / SRIO (ANSI)-type of station, the event channel FPU_AI2DB will
be created at the installation. The event channel FPU_AI2DB is set to activate the
command procedure FPU_AI2DB.

The event channel FPU_C501RD is created for activating the command procedure
FPU_C501RD.

10.4.11.

Time channels

The first use of the clock sync. dialog creates the following time channel:

FPU_C501SY, which activates the command procedure FPU_C501ST

45

BO

Active battery test

FPQD01CMSC

V8

-

46

AI

Heating setting value

FPQD01MTMP

S3

-

47

AO

Heating setpoint

FPQD01STMP

S3

-

48

AI

REC 501 blockings

FPQD01XBLK

_

-

49

BS

Transparent spa
communication

Index

Data type

Process object

Group ident.

SPA

ANSI

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

195

11. DTU

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

11

11. DTU

11.1.

Communication support

• SPACOM/SRIO (ANSI)

11.2.

Picture function installation

This chapter describes the installation of the picture function for the MV Process.
The picture function for DTU is found in the directory /LIB4/FMOD/MVPRO-
CESS/INST and it should be installed by using LIB4 installation procedures. The
configuration of this picture function shall be performed by using standard configu-
ration tools such as:

1. Standard Configuration Tool

2. Representation Tool
3. Process Object Tool

11.2.1.

Environmental requirements

In order for the DTU to have full functionality, LIB 500 Base needs to be installed.

11.2.2.

Installation

There are three different sizes of the DTU picture function: small (1*1), medium
(2*2) and large (3*3). The size of the small DTU picture function is 16 x 20 pixels
(1 x 1 semigraphical block), the medium picture function is 32 x 40 pixels (2 x 2
semigraphical blocks) and the large picture function is 48 x 60 pixels (3 x 3 semi-
graphical blocks). The button frame is drawn out of this area.

It is not recommended that the medium size of the picture function is used within
the same bay with small or large picture functions because of the different snap of
the feeder lines. Fig. 11.2.2.-1 presents the DTU picture functions.

)LJ 7\SLFDO'78LQVWDOODWLRQ

Table 11.2.2-1 During the installation the following information has to be

given

Attribute

Meaning

Default

ID

Name/Identification of the picture function within picture

-

1MRS751887-MEN

background image

196

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

11. DTU

Configuration Guide

11.3.

Picture function configuration

11.3.1.

Preliminary work

Before the configuration of the picture functions can start, some preparations are
required (i.e. configurations that are required only once). The usage of object
identification (OI) attribute has to be fixed, the naming convention of the process
object has to be decided and the translation of the signal texts into local language has
to be performed. For further information, please refer to the General chapter in this
MV Process Configuration Manual.

11.3.2.

Configuration with the Standard Configuration Tool

The DTU has the following attributes to configure with the Standard Configuration
Tool:

Table 11.3.2-1 Configurable attributes with the Standard Configuration Tool

Attribute

Meaning

Default

STATION_NAME

Name of the substation

BAY_NAME

Name of the bay

DEVICE_NAME

Name of the device

SPECIAL_IDENTIFIER_’nr’

Name of the special identifier ‘nr’

Not configurable

P_OBJECT_LN

Logical name of database process
obj.

STATION_TYPE

The communication protocol

SPACOM/SRIO (ANSI)

STATION_NUMBER

The station number of DTU

0

DTU_TYPE

The type of DTU

DTU 1

DISCONNECTOR_NUMBER Disconnector section at DTU 4

1

COMMUNICATION

Used communication method

CONTINUOUS

TELEPHONE_NUMBER

Telephone number of DTU when
dial-up communication is used

DUMMY

CONNECTION_AT_SELECT
ION

Is the connection opened when
control dialog is opened.

TRUE

SPEF

Selection for fault indicator SPEF

FALSE

STATION_NUMBER_SPEF

Station number of fault indicator

0

SYMBOL_WITH_BUTTON

Selection of symbol with or without
button (not in network topology
Line Disconnector picture function)

TRUE

AUTHORIZATION_GROUP

The name of the authorization
group

MV_CONTROL

U_EXTRA_INPUT_TEXTS

Field texts for extra inputs dialog

U_INTERLOCKING

User-specific interlocking program

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

197

11. DTU

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

11

STATION_NAME

A selector type of an editable combo box to select or enter
the name of the substation. By default, the maximum length
of the text is 9 characters. The selection list shows up to ten
latest entries.

The configurable attribute is being read directly from the pro-
cess object database if there is any process object linked to
the selected DTU. Therefore, the configurable attribute
within a picture function has meaning only when the process
objects have not been created.

This text will be used as a substation identifier of the DTU
objects on event list, alarm list, printout, database query, etc.
It is very important that this text is similar to all objects within
the same substation.

BAY_NAME

A selector type of an editable combo box to select or enter
the name of the bay (feeder). By default, the maximum
length of the text is 14 characters. The selection list shows
up to ten latest entries.

The configurable attribute is being read directly from the pro-
cess object database, if there is any process object linked to
the selected DTU. Therefore, the configurable attribute
within a picture function has meaning only when the process
objects have not been created.

This text will be used as a bay (feeder) identifier of the DTU
objects on event list, alarm list, printout, database query, etc.
It is very important that this text is similar to all objects within
the same bay (feeder).

DEVICE_NAME

A selector type of an editable combo box to select or enter
the name (identifier) of the DTU. By default, the maximum
length of the text is 5 characters. The selection list shows up
to ten latest entries.

The configurable attribute is being read directly from the pro-
cess object database, if there is any process object linked to
the selected DTU. Therefore, the configurable attribute
within a picture function has meaning only when the process
objects have not been created.

This text will be used as an identifier of the DTU on event
list, alarm list, printout, database query, etc.

SPECIAL_IDENTIFIER_’nr’

A selector type of an editable combo box to select or enter a
special identifier of the DTU. By default, this identifier is not
in use, i.e. it is not configurable with the SCT. The selection
list shows up to ten latest entries.

The configurable attribute is being read directly from the pro-
cess object database, if there is any process object linked to
the selected DTU. Therefore, the configurable attribute
within a picture function has meaning only when the process
objects have not been created.

This text will be used as an additional identifier of the DTU
on event list, alarm list, printout, database query, etc.

background image

198

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

11. DTU

Configuration Guide

P_OBJECT_LN

The logical name of the database process objects. The max-
imum length of the text is 10 characters. Allowed characters
are the letters A-Z, all digits and the underscore (_).
The logical names of process objects have to be unique
throughout the entire system, that is, different objects cannot
have the same logical name. Therefore, it is very important
to have a proper naming convention for the process object
database.

Certain naming convention is also required to speed up the
opening time of the main dialogs. With the predefined nam-
ing convention it is possible to collect all station and bay
related database objects without searching through the com-
plete database. Therefore, it is advised to use the following
naming convention:

- The first three characters identify the substation
- The following four characters identify the bay
- The last three characters can be freely used to identify
the source of the signal, i.e. device, unit, etc.

The following list is presented as an example of a proper
naming convention within one bay. The station name is
Green Bay, and the bay name is HA12 Downtown:

- GRB, station
- GRBHA12BAY, bay
- GRBHA12Q0, circuit breaker Q0
- GRBHA12Q1, truck Q1
- GRBHA12Q9, earth switch Q9
- GRBHA12CT, measurements/current transformer
- GRBHA12VT, measurements/voltage transformer
- GRBHA12ALA, alarm indicator
- GRBHA12AR, auto-reclosing tag
- GRBHA12TRP, tripping tag
- GRBHA12R1, feeder terminal or protection unit 1
- GRBHA12R2, feeder terminal or protection unit 1
- GRBHA12LS1, line segment 1 of busbar coloring
- GRBHA12LS2, line segment 2 of busbar coloring
- GRBHA12LS3, line segment 3 of busbar coloring
- GRBHA12LI, line indicator of busbar coloring

If some other naming convention than 3+4 is used, it usually
takes a longer time to open the main control dialogs unless
the optional named program U_OTHER_OBJECTS is being
utilized to introduce other required process objects.

If DTU 4 is selected, the different disconnectors must be
installed under the same logical name.

STATION_TYPE

A selector type of a combo box to select the station type of
the objects.

The database process objects will be created for the station
type defined here. The list of supported protocols is as fol-
lows:

- SPACOM / SRIO (ANSI)

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

199

11. DTU

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

11

STATION_NUMBER

The station number of DTU. This will be used when the data-
base is created, so it is important that STA type of station
exists for the given station number.

DTU_TYPE

A selector type of combo box to select DTU 1 or DTU 4 to be
controlled.

DISCONNECTOR_NUMBER Selection for the switch section (1..4) when DTU 4 is con-

cerned.

COMMUNICATION

Communication method used between DTU station and
MicroSCADA.

TELEPHONE_NUMBER

Telephone number of DTU station. This must be configured
when dial-up communication is used.

CONNECTION_AT_SELECT
ION

An ON/OFF-type of toggle button to select whether the con-
nection is opened to the station when the DTU control dialog
is opened or not.

SPEF

Selection for SPEF fault indicator. If SPEF is selected it is
possible to open setting dialogs from main control dialog.

STATION_NUMBER_SPEF

The station number of SPEF fault indicator.

AUTHORIZATION_GROUP

A selector type of an editable combo box to select the autho-
rization group for the object. The maximum length of the text
is 63 characters. The given text has to be usable as a SCIL
list attribute name (see the SCIL manual). The contents of
the selection list is taken from the existing authorization
groups.

NOTE! The name may not be composed of two letters fol-
lowed by a number.

By default, all DTU functions will be included in the same
authorization group. A new authorization group can be
defined, if the DTU is wanted to be included in some user-
defined authorization group. Afterwards the authorization
level of each user in this group can be defined by the system
manager with User Management pictures.

SYMBOL_WITH_BUTTON

An ON/OFF-type of toggle button to select whether the con-
trol dialog(s) can be opened for the DTU. By default the sym-
bol is provided with active button. (not in network topology
Line Disconnector picture function).

U_EXTRA_INPUT_TEXTS

User can define identification texts for extra binary and ana-
log inputs presented in extra inputs dialog.

background image

200

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

11. DTU

Configuration Guide

11.3.3.

Configuration with the Representation Tool

The DTU has the following attributes to configure with the Representation Tool:

Table 11.3.3-1 Configurable attributes with the Representation Tool

U_INTERLOCKING

An optional named program which is designed for the inter-
nal interlocking purpose. With this internal interlocking pro-
gram it is possible to make control buttons insensitive if
required. It is also capable of generating interlocking cause
messages to the information bar of the control dialog.

As an example a simple interlocking program which checks
if the breaker is open before allowing the control commands
for disconnector.

; ************ For interlocking purposes only!

****************

;

; by this program You can create internal

; interlockings by SCIL

;

; as OUTPUT you can give variables:

;

; @OPEN_INTERLOCKED,

; boolean, (if true then opening gets disabled)

; @CLOSE_INTERLOCKED,

; boolean, (if true then closing gets disabled)

; @INTERLOCKING_CAUSE,

; text, cause to be shown on the dialog infobar

;

; None of these is obligatory!

;

;************************************************

*

; breaker Q0 not open

#IF GRB_HA12Q0:POS10==0 #THEN #BLOCK

#IF GRB_HA12Q0:POV10<>2 #THEN #BLOCK

@OPEN_INTERLOCKED = TRUE

@CLOSE_INTERLOCKED = TRUE

@INTERLOCKING_CAUSE = "Interlocked - breaker

Q0 not open"

#BLOCK_END

#BLOCK_END

#ELSE #BLOCK

@OPEN_INTERLOCKED = TRUE

@CLOSE_INTERLOCKED = TRUE

@INTERLOCKING_CAUSE = "Interlocked - Breaker Q0

not updated"

#BLOCK_END

Attribute

Meaning

Default

REPRESENTATION

Selection of symbol set
shown in picture (Diamond
symbol)

F_REPR/F_DISC1

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

201

11. DTU

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

11

11.3.4.

Configuration with the Process Object Tool

Depending on the configuration of the DTU, the Process Object Tool will create a
certain set of process objects in the database. The process objects which are going to
be linked to the actual process should be edited to have a station number, an address
and a proper switching state. Otherwise, by default, all other attributes should have
suitable values for normal operation.

Table 11.3.4-1 The Process Object Tool will create process objects based on

the following list

REPRESENTATION

The name of the representation (symbol set) that is used for

the switching device state indication. The name of the
representation can be selected in the combo box called
Representation. The selected symbol is shown in the
preview window.

If there is no appropriate symbol set, it is possible to make
and use a representation set of your own. In that case one of
the existing representation sets can be copied to a
representation file ../APLMOD4/USE/APLMOD4.PIR under
the application and each representation may be modified as
needed. If object specific representations are needed, you
can rename the representation set (under the application)
and write the name of the representation to the selector with
the logical path.

For example: F_REPR/MY_SET

Attribute

Meaning

Default

Index

Explanation

Purpose

10

Switch 1 position
indication (DTU 1&4)

Used for indication of the switch 1 state open/close/
intermediate/faulty

11

Switch 1 open command
(DTU 1&4)

Used for sending Open command to the switch1.

12

Switch 1 close command
(DTU 1&4)

Used for sending Close command to the switch 1.

13

Switch 1 local remote
(DTU 1&4)

Used for indication of switch1 local/remote switch.

14

Switch 1 selection on
monitor (DTU 1&4)

In internal use, tags the selection of the object
made in different pictures or monitors.

15

Switch 2 position
indication (DTU 4)

Used for indication of the switch 2 state open/close/
intermediate/faulty

16

Switch 2 open command
(DTU 4)

Used for sending Open command to the switch 2.

17

Switch 2 close command
(DTU 4)

Used for sending Close command to the switch 2.

18

Switch 2 local remote
(DTU 4)

Used for indication of switch 2 local/remote switch.

19

Switch 3 selection on
monitor (DTU 4)

In internal use, tags the selection of the object
made in different pictures or monitors.

background image

202

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

11. DTU

Configuration Guide

20

Switch 3 position
indication (DTU 4)

Used for indication of the switch 3 state open/close/
intermediate/faulty

21

Switch 3 open command
(DTU 4)

Used for sending Open command to the switch 3.

22

Switch 3 close command
(DTU 4)

Used for sending Close command to the switch 3.

23

Switch 3 local remote
(DTU 4)

Used for indication of switch 3 local/remote switch.

24

Switch 3 selection on
monitor (DTU 4)

In internal use, tags the selection of the object
made in different pictures or monitors.

25

Switch 4 position
indication (DTU 4)

Used for indication of the switch 4 state open/close/
intermediate/faulty

26

Switch 4 open command
(DTU 4)

Used for sending Open command to the switch 4.

27

Switch 4 close command
(DTU 4)

Used for sending Close command to the switch 4.

28

Switch 4 local remote
(DTU 4)

Used for indication of switch 4 local/remote switch.

29

Switch 4 selection on
monitor (DTU 4)

In internal use, tags the selection of the object
made in different pictures or monitors.

30

Extra BI1

Indication for extra binary input 1.

31

Extra BI2

Indication for extra binary input 2.

32

230 AC supply

Indication for auxiliary supply.

33

Heating resistor

Indication for heating state (ON/OFF).

34

Extra AI1

Indication for extra analog input 1.

35

Extra AI2

Indication for extra analog input 2.

36

Temperature

Indication for temperature within enclosure.

37

Battery voltage

Indication for battery voltage.

38

Extra AI1 max

Indication for maximum value of extra AI 1.

39

Extra AI2 max

Indication for maximum value of extra AI 2.

40

Minimum voltage

Indication for minimum battery voltage.

41

Status information

Indication for program status.

42

Program version

Indication of DTU program version.

43

Temperature setpoint

Setpoint for temperature.

44

Hysteresis setting

Setpoint for hysteresis of the temperature.

45

Charg. spont. transmit

Setpoint for spontaneous transmit of charging
change.

46

Extra AO1

Setpoint for reseting extra analog input 1.

47

Extra AO2

Setpoint for reseting extra analog input 2.

48

Minimum voltage reset

Setpoint for reseting the minimum battery voltage.

49

Indication polarity

Setpoint for indication polarity.

50

Heat. spont. transmit

Setpoint for spontaneous transmit of heating
change.

Index

Explanation

Purpose

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

203

11. DTU

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

11

11.3.5.

An Example of the DTU configuration

As an example, the configuration of the DTU is provided below:

Table 11.3.5-1 Configuration of the DTU

11.4.

Application engineering information

11.4.1.

The structure of the DTU

This chapter describes the structure of the DTU. All pictures, form pictures, help and
other text files as well as all database objects are included. DTU function is a part of
the MV Process of the LIB 510 and has a directory /LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS,
and the standard LIB 510 sub-directories INST, LANG0 and USE.

51

Temperature

Indication for heating setting value.

52

Hysteresis setting value

Indication for hysteresis setting value.

53

Charg. spont ON/OFF

Indication for spontaneous transmit of charging
changes.

54

Indication polarity

Indication for indication polarity.

55

Heating spont. ON/OFF

Indication for spontaneous transmit of heating
changes.

100

DTU blockings

Internal use for reporting DTU blockings.

110

DTU position indication
(upper)

This is used for converting the indication from
analog value to double binary value. For RTU it is
used as event recording object.

Index

Explanation

Purpose

Attribute

Value

ID

LINE1_Q1

STATION_NAME

Markham

BAY_NAME

LINE

DEVICE_NAME

Q1

P_OBJECT_LN

MARLINEQ1

STATION_TYPE

SPACOM / SRIO (ANSI)

STATION_NUMBER

1

DTU_TYPE

DTU 1

DISCONNECTOR_NUMBER

N/A

COMMUNICATION

CONTINUOUS

TELEPHONE_NUMBER

N/A

CONNECTION_AT_SELECTION

Yes

SPEF

No

STATION_NUMBER_SPEF

N/A

AUTHORIZATION_GROUP

MV_CONTROL

SYMBOL_WITH_BUTTON

Yes

REPRESENTATION

F_REPR/F_DISC2 (vertical link)

background image

204

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

11. DTU

Configuration Guide

11.4.2.

Pictures

Below there is a list of all DTU pictures and a short description of their functionality.
Dialogs are described in detail earlier in this document. The paths are /LIB4/FMOD/
MVPROCESS/INST

Table 11.4.2-1 DTU pictures

and /LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/USE

Table 11.4.2-2 DTU pictures

Picture

Functionality

FPI_DTU.PIC

Small picture function (1*1) for DTU

FPI_DTUM.PIC

Medium picture function (2*2) for DTU

FPI_DTUL.PIC

Large picture function (3*3) for DTU

Picture

Functionality

FPU_DTUA.PIC

Main control dialog

FPU_DTUB.PIC

Control confirmation dialog

FPU_DTUC.PIC

Forced operation dialog

FPU_DTUD.PIC

Normal state setting dialog

FPU_DTUE.PIC

Object messages dialog

FPU_DTUF.PIC

Blocking dialog

FPU_DTUG.PIC

Alarm state dialog

FPU_DTUH.PIC

Operation counting dialog

FPU_DTUI.PIC

Data dialog

FPU_DTUJ.PIC

Settings dialog

FPU_DTUK.PIC

Program status dialog

FPU_DTUL.PIC

Extra inputs dialog

FPU_DTUM.PIC

Connection dialog

FPU_DTUN.PIC

Communication dialog

FPU_DTUO.PIC

Reserved

FPU_DTUP.PIC

Drop down list box

FPU_DTUQ.PIC

Drop down list box

FPU_DTUR.PIC

Fault indicator measured data dialog

FPU_DTUS.PIC

Fault indicator settings dialog

FPU_DTUT.PIC

Time syncronization dialog

FPU_DTUU.PIC

Update process data dialog

FPU_DTUV.PIC

Fault indicator recorded data dialog

FPU_DTUW.PIC

Fault indicator alarms dialog

FPU_DTUX.PIC

Position simulation dialog

FORM4FPDB1.PIC

Format picture for printing position indications

FORM4FPBO1.PIC

Format picture for object commands

FORM4FPBI1.PIC

Format picture for station local / remote indication

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

205

11. DTU

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

11

11.4.3.

Language text files

The following Text Translation Tool compatible text files are used by the DTU. The
path is /LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/LANG0.

Table 11.4.3-1 Compatible text files

11.4.4.

Help text files

Below there is a list of the DTU help text files. The path is /LIB4/FMOD/
MVPROCESS/LANG0.

Table 11.4.4-1 DTU help text files

11.4.5.

Configuration files

The following configuration files are used by the DTU. The path is LIB4/FMOD/
MVPROCESS/INST

Text file

Functionality

FPI_DTU.TXT

Text file for the database creation of the picture function

FPU_DTU.TXT

Text file for all DTU dialogs

FORM4FPDB1.TXT

Text file for format picture of printing position indications

FORM4FPBO1.TXT

Text file for format picture of printing object commands

FORM4FPBI1.TXT

Text file for format picture of printing station local/remote indication

Help file

Functionality

FPI_DTU.HLP

Picture function installation help file

FPU_DTUA.HLP

DTU control dialog help file

FPU_DTUD.HLP

Normal state setting dialog help file

FPU_DTUE.HLP

Object messages dialog help file

FPU_DTUF.HLP

DTU blocking dialog help file

FPU_DTUG.HLP

Alarm state dialog help file

FPU_DTUH.HLP

Operation counting dialog help file

FPU_DTUI.HLP

Data dialog help file

FPU_DTUJ.HLP

Settings dialog help file

FPU_DTUL.HLP

Extra inputs dialog help file

FPU_DTUM.HLP

Connection dialog help file

FPU_DTUN.HLP

Communication dialog help file

FPU_DTUR.HLP

SPEF measured data dialog help file

FPU_DTUS.HLP

SPEF settings dialog help file

FPU_DTUT.HLP

Time syncronization dialog help dialog

FPU_DTUU.HLP

Update process data dialog help file

FPU_DTUV.HLP

SPEF recorded data dialog

FPU_DTUW.HLP

SPEF alarms dialog help file

FPU_DTUX.HLP

Position simulation dialog help file

background image

206

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

11. DTU

Configuration Guide

Table 11.4.5-1 DTU configuration files

11.4.6.

Other text files

The following text files are used by the DTU. /LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/INST.

Table 11.4.6-1 DTU text files

/LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/USE.

Table 11.4.6-2 DTU text files

‘APL’/PICT

Table 11.4.6-3 DTU text files

11.4.7.

Process objects

The DTU will create the following process objects with the Process Object Tool:

Table 11.4.7-1 DTU process objects created with the Process Object Tool

Configuration file

Functionality

FPI_DTU.DAT

Contains the configuration data for DTU when it is created, modified
or deleted by configuration tools.

FPI_DTU.DAT

Contains the process object definitions for the Process Object Tool.

INDEX4_F1.TXT

Selection list of MV Process picture functions for LIB4 installation tool
(common for all other picture functions, too.)

Text file

Functionality

FPI_DTUR.TXT

Command procedure for reading data from SPEF fault indicator via
DTU

FPI_DTUW.TXT

Command procedure for writing data to SPEF fault indicator via DTU

Text file

Functionality

FPU_AUTH.TXT

Contains the SCIL code for station authority check. This code is
executed by the main control dialog for DTU.

FPU_UPDATE.TXT

Contains the SCIL code for updating process objects when they are
update-deblocked. This code is executed by the command
procedure FPU_UPDATE.

FPU_DTUC.TXT

Command procedure for clock syncronization of DTU and SPEF.

PATH4_F1.TXT

Contains the path definitions for the MV Process.

Text file

Functionality

FPU_DTUS.TXT

Contains the information from stations to be updated by time
syncronization dialog.

Index Data type

Meaning Process object

Remarks

Group identifier

10

DB

Disconnector 1 position indication

DTU 1 &
DTU 4

FPQD07IPOS

11

BO

Disconnector 1 open command

DTU 1 &
DTU 4

FPQD07COBC

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

207

11. DTU

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

11

12

BO

Disconnector 1 close command

DTU 1 &
DTU 4

FPQD07COBC

13

BI

Disconnector 1 local/remote

DTU 1 &
DTU 4

FPQD07ILRS

14

AI

Disconnector 1 selected on monitor

DTU 1 &
DTU 4

FPQD07XMEV

15

DB

Disconnector 2 position indication

DTU 4

FPQD07IPOS

16

BO

Disconnector 2 open command

DTU 4

FPQD07COBC

17

BO

Disconnector 2 close command

DTU 4

FPQD07COBC

18

BI

Disconnector 2 local/remote

DTU 4

FPQD07ILRS

19

AI

Disconnector 2 selected on monitor

DTU 4

FPQD07XMEV

20

DB

Disconnector 3 position indication

DTU 4

FPQD07IPOS

21

BO

Disconnector 3 open command

DTU 4

FPQD07COBC

22

BO

Disconnector 3 close command

DTU 4

FPQD07COBC

23

BI

Disconnector 3 local/remote

DTU 4

FPQD07ILRS

24

AI

Disconnector 3 selected on monitor

DTU 4

FPQD07XMEV

25

DB

Disconnector 4 position indication

DTU 4

FPQD07IPOS

26

BO

Disconnector 4 open command

DTU 4

FPQD07COBC

27

BO

Disconnector 4 close command

DTU 4

FPQD07COBC

28

BI

Disconnector 4 local/remote

DTU 4

FPQD07ILRS

29

AI

Disconnector 4 selected on monitor

DTU 4

FPQD07XMEV

30

BI

Extra BI 1

FPQD07ISCE

31

BI

Extra BI 2

FPQD07ISCE

32

BI

230 VAC supply

FPQD07IALA

33

BI

Heating resistor

FPQD07ISCE

34

AI

Extra AI 1

FPQD07MMSC

35

AI

Extra AI 2

FPQD07MMSC

36

AI

Temperature

FPQD07MTMP

37

AI

Battery voltage

FPQD07MVOL

38

AI

Extra AI 1 maximum

FPQD07MMSC

39

AI

Extra AI 2 maximum

FPQD07MMSC

40

AI

Minimum battery voltage

FPQD07MVOL

41

AI

Program status information

FPQD07ISTS

42

AI

Program version

FPQD07IVER

43

AO

Temperature set point

FPQD07STMP

44

AO

Temperature hysteresis set point

FPQD07STMP

45

AO

Charging spontaneous transmit-
command

FPQD07CSCE

46

AO

Extra AI 1 maximum reset

FPQD07CMSC

47

AO

Extra AI 2 maximum reset

FPQD07CMSC

48

AO

Minimum battery voltage reset

FPQD07CVOL

Index Data type

Meaning Process object

Remarks

Group identifier

background image

208

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

11. DTU

Configuration Guide

11.4.8.

Scale objects

At the first installation, the DTU creates the scales 1_1 (linear 1:1 scale),
FPU_1_1000 (linear 1:1000 scale), FPU_DTUBAT (linear 0..255 : 15..35 scale),
FPU_DTUE1 (linear 0..255 : 0..255 scale), FPU_DTUE2 (linear 0..255 : 0..255
scale), FPU_DTUHYS (linear 0..255 : 0..109 scale), FPU_DTUTEM (linear 0..255
: -40.. 60 scale).

49

AO

Indication polarity setting

FPQD07CSCE

50

AO

Heating spontaneous transmit setting

FPQD07CSCE

51

AI

Temperature setting

FPQD07MTMP

52

AI

Temperature hysteresis setting

FPQD07MTMP

53

AI

Charging spontaneous transmit

FPQD07ISCE

54

AI

Indication polarity

FPQD07ISCE

55

AI

Heating spontaneous transmit

FPQD07ISCE

56

AO

Guard tone set point

Only for dial-
up comm.

FPQD07SMSC

57

AO

Answer after 1..10 calls set point

Only for dial-
up comm.

FPQD07SMSC

58

AO

Timeout for answer set point

Only for dial-
up comm.

FPQD07SMSC

59

AO

Delay after comma set point

Only for dial-
up comm.

FPQD07SMSC

60

AO

Timeout for carrier wave set point

Only for dial-
up comm.

FPQD07SMSC

61

AI

Guard tone

Only for dial-
up comm.

FPQD07MMSC

62

AI

Answer after 1..10 calls

Only for dial-
up comm.

FPQD07MMSC

63

AI

Timeout for answer

Only for dial-
up comm.

FPQD07MMSC

64

AI

Delay after comma

Only for dial-
up comm.

FPQD07MMSC

65

AI

Timeout for carrier wave

Only for dial-
up comm.

FPQD07MMSC

66

AI

Telephone number

Only for dial-
up comm.

FPQD07MMSC

100

AI

DTU blockings

FPQD07XBLK

110

AI

Disconnector 1 position indication

Only ANSI
(DTU 1/4)

FPQD07EPOS

115

AI

Disconnector 2 position indication

Only ANSI
(DTU 4)

FPQD07EPOS

120

AI

Disconnector 3 position indication

Only ANSI
(DTU 4)

FPQD07EPOS

125

AI

Disconnector 4 position indication

Only ANSI
(DTU 4)

FPQD07EPOS

Index Data type

Meaning Process object

Remarks

Group identifier

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

209

11. DTU

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

11

11.4.9.

Command procedures

At the first installation, the DTU creates the command procedure FPU_UPDATE,
which updates process objects when they are update-deblocked. This feature is
similar to the LIB 500 Blocking List function.

For SPACOM / SRIO (ANSI) type of station, the command procedure FPU_AI2DB
will be created at the installation. The command procedure FPU_AI2DB updates the
position indication double binary from the analog input.

Time synchronisation dialog creates the command procedure FPU_DTUCLK for
clock synchronisation.

11.4.10.

Event channels

For SPACOM / SRIO (ANSI)-type of station, the event channel FPU_AI2DB will
be created at the installation. The event channel FPU_AI2DB is set to activate the
command procedure FPU_AI2DB.

11.4.11.

Time channels

Time synchronisation dialog creates the time channel FPU_DTUCLK for activating
command procedure of the same name.

background image
background image

1MRS751887-MEN

SYS 500

211

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

12. Combined switch

device state

12

12.

Combined switch device state

12.1. Purpose

With Combined switch device state picture function it is possible to show open/close
state for the whole bay. In this way complex process pictures can be simplified.
From the Combined switch device state picture function actual process pictures
containing more detailed information can be opened. The state of the bay is
calculated according to position indications of switch devices and the electrical
connection of bay.

12.2. Communication

Support

Function is not protocol dependent

12.3. Picture

Function

Installation

This document describes the picture function of the MV Process Combined switch
device state. The picture function Combined switch device state is found in the
directory /LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/INST and it should be installed by using
LIB4 installation procedures (LIB4/LIB510/MV Process 2.x/Switching Device/
Combined state). Configuration of this picture function shall be performed by using
configuration tools such as:

1. Standard Configuration Tool

2. Representation Tool
3. Process Object Tool
4. Bay Configuration Tool

12.3.1. Environmental

Requirements

In order for the Combined switch device state to have full functionality, the
following components need to be installed:

• Base

• Station (*)

• Bay (*)

• Switching devices

(*) These components are needed to get the full functionality of Bay Configuration
Tool.

12.3.2. Installation

There are three different sizes of the Combined switch device state picture function:
small (1*1), medium (2*2) and large (3*3). The size of the small switching device
picture function is 16 x 20 pixels (1 x 1 semigraphical block), the medium picture
function is 32 x 40 pixels (2 x 2 semigraphical blocks) and the large picture function
is 48 x 60 pixels (3 x 3 semigraphical blocks). The button frame is drawn out of this
area.

1MRS751887-MEN

background image

212

1MRS751887-MEN

Manual Name

SYS 500

12. Combined switch

device state

Configuration Guide

)LJ 7\SLFDO&RPELQHGVZLWFKGHYLFHVWDWHLQVWDOODWLRQV

Table 12.3.2-1 During the installation, the following information has to be

given:

12.4. Picture

Function

Configuration

12.4.1. Preliminary

Work

Before the configuration of the picture functions can start, some preparatory
configurations are required (i.e. configurations that are required only once). The
usage of object identification (OI) attribute has to be settled, the naming convention
of the process object has to be decided, and the translation of the signal texts into
local language has to be performed. For more information, please refer to the
General chapter in this MV Process Configuration Manual.

12.4.2.

Configuration with Standard Configuration Tool

It is important to configure attributes in the order of appearance since setting one
attribute may enable/disable and/or reset another attribute later.

The Combined switch device state picture function has the following attributes to
configure with the Standard Configuration Tool:

Table 12.4.2-1 Standard configuration tool attributes

STATION_NAME

A selector type of an editable combo box to select or enter
the name of the substation. By default, the maximum
length of the text is 9 characters. The selection list shows
up to ten latest entries. The configurable attribute is being
read directly from the process object database if there is

Attribute

Meaning

Default

Picture Function Name

Name of the picture function within the picture

-

Attribute

Meaning

Default

STATION_NAME

Name of the substation

-

BAY_NAME

Name of the bay

-

SPECIAL_IDENTIFIER_’nr’

Name of the special identifier ‘nr’

-

CONTROL_PICTURE

The name of the process picture

-

SHOW_AS_DIALOG

Show picture in separate dialog

FALSE

SUFFIX_POSITION

Location of suffix

Lower right corner

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

SYS 500

213

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

12. Combined switch

device state

12

any process object linked to the selected Combined switch
device state. Therefore, the configurable attribute within a
picture function has meaning only when the process
objects have not been created. This text will be used as a
substation identifier of the Combined switch device state
objects on event list, alarm list, printout, database query,
etc. It is very important that this text is similar to all
objects within the same substation.

BAY_NAME

A selector type of an editable combo box to select or enter
the name of the bay (feeder). By default, the maximum
length of the text is 14 characters. The selection list shows
up to ten latest entries.

The configurable attribute is being read directly from the
process object database if there is any process object
linked to the selected Combined switch device state.
Therefore, the configurable attribute within a picture
function has meaning only when the process objects have
not been created.

This text will be used as a bay (feeder) identifier of the
Combined switch device state objects on event list, alarm
list, printout, database query, etc. It is very important that
this text is similar to all objects within the same bay
(feeder).

CONTROL_PICTURE

The name of the actual process picture, which will
be opened when Combined switch device state picture
function is clicked. The maximum length of the text is 30
characters. Allowed characters are the letters A-Z, all
digits and the underscore(_).

SHOW_AS_DIALOG

An ON/OFF type of a toggle button to select dialog or
picture which will be opened when picture function is
clicked.

When this option is used It is recommended to use SLIB
dialog as a base for process pictures opened to dialog. The
window name of dialogs must be same as the control
picture name.

Note! Switch device picture function in dialog and in
actual process picture cannot have same name.

SUFFIX_POSITION

A selector type of combo box to select the position of the
suffix for the switching device.

The purpose of this configurable attribute is to provide the
possibility to show the status of the switching device with
letters beside the symbol.

The supported positions for the suffix are:

- None

- Upper right corner

- Lower right corner

- Lower left corner

background image

214

1MRS751887-MEN

Manual Name

SYS 500

12. Combined switch

device state

Configuration Guide

- Upper left corner

The configuration is done in the Application Settings
picture, depending on how the status of the switching
device is wanted to be shown: with suffices, with colors,
or with both of them.

12.4.3.

Configuration with Representation Tool

The Combined switch device state picture function has the following attributes to
configure with the Representation Tool:

Table 12.4.3-1 Representation tool attributes

Table 12.4.3-2 The Combined switch device state requires a selector and a

symbol for the following conditions:

Combined switch device state uses the same sets of symbols as normal switching
devices. Please refer to some manual for more information.

Attribute

Meaning

Default

REPRESENTATION

Selection of symbol set
shown in the picture

F_REPR/F_

REPRESENTATION

The name of the representation (symbol set) used for the

Combined switch device state indication. The predefined
representation can be selected from the selector type of list called
Library Representations.
If there is no appropriate symbol set, it is possible to make and use
a representation set of your own. In that case one of the existing
representation sets can be copied to a representation file ../
APLMOD4/USE/ APLMOD4.PIR under the application and modify
each representation as needed. If object specific representations
are needed, the representation set (under the application) can be
renamed and the name of the representation can be written into the
selector with the logical path.
For example: F_REPR/MY_SET

Selector

Condition

Default color

1

Selected on monitor

white

2

Update blocked or obsolete value

magenta

3

Unacknowledged alarm

red, blinking

4

Acknowledged alarm

red

5

Warning or blockings (alarms, events, printouts or
reprocessing)

yellow

6

Manually entered

cyan

7

Normal state

green

8

Substituted

Dark blue

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

SYS 500

215

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

12. Combined switch

device state

12

12.4.4.

Configuration with Bay Configuration Tool

)LJ %D\&RQILJXUDWLRQ7RRO

background image

216

1MRS751887-MEN

Manual Name

SYS 500

12. Combined switch

device state

Configuration Guide

)LJ %D\/RJLF7RRO

Bay layout

The bay that corresponds to the actual bay can be chosen
by these layout pictures. With this layout picture the
program calculates the electric state of the bay.
Layout pictures:
1. Single busbar system
2. Single busbar system with bypass disconnector
3. Single busbar system with bypass busbar system
4. Double busbar system
5. Double busbar system with bypass busbar system
6. Duplex system

Device type

In the select of these attributes what devices are in use and
what is their device type can be defined.
The user defines only devices that he needs by choosing
circuit breaker, isolator or truck and rest he can be omitted
by choosing disabled.

Process object logical name

The database search fetches the logical names of
switching devices to the lists of comboboxes. The database
search requires that the attributes of a station, bay and
device type have been given. From the list, the right logical
name for the switching devices can be selected. The logical
name can be also written directly into combo box.

Indication type

The program automatically proposes the indication type to
the device the basis of device type and the logical name.
The Indication type can be also selected from the list of
combo-boxes.

Advanced … option

The user has a possibility to define bays by using
Advanced option. The bays defined by the user can be
saved and loaded to reused. It is recommended that the
logics defined by the user are saved in the sc/apl//pict
directory.
Examples of the syntax of bay logics:
(Only this kind of syntax has been allowed)
The Logic of Single Busbar System (layout picture 1 of
BCT)
%ln(1) and %ln(2) and %ln(3) and %ln(4)
The Logic of Single Busbar System with bypass
disconnector (layout picture 2 of BCT)
(%ln(1) and %ln(2) and %ln(3) and %ln(4)) or %ln(5)
If there is a need to change the row, just press the enter
before or after the logical operator.

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

SYS 500

217

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

12. Combined switch

device state

12

12.4.5.

An example of the combined switch device state configuration

The configuration of the Combined switch device state with a horizontal field can
be given as an example:

Table 12.4.5-1 Configuration of the Combined switch device state

12.4.6.

The structure of the combined switch device state function

This chapter describes the structure of the Combined switch device state function.
All pictures, help and other text files are included. The Combined switch device state
function is a part of the MV Process of LIB 510 and has a directory /LIB4/FMOD/
MVPROCESS, and the standard LIB 510 subdirectories INST, LANG0 and USE.

The installation of the “instance” picture function (small, medium or large sized)
will automatically install “type” picture function (FPI_OVRT) if it does not already
exist. The “type” picture function contains all common programs for the “instance”
picture function and it is only visible at the Picture Editor.

12.4.7. Pictures

Below there is a list of all Combined switch device state function pictures and a short
description of their functionality. Dialogs are described in detail earlier in this
document. The path is /LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/INST

Table 12.4.7-1 Combined switch device state function pictures

12.4.8.

Help text files

Below there is a list of the Combined switch device state help text files. The path is
/LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/LANG0.

Table 12.4.8-1 Combined switch device state help text file

Attribute

Value

Picture Function Name

OV1

STATION_NAME

Eastwick

BAY_NAME

Incoming 110kV

SPECIAL_IDENTIFIER_x

N/A

REPRESENTATION

F_REPR/F_BREAK2 (vertical link)

Picture

Functionality

FPI_OVRT.PIC

Common programs Combined switch device state function

FPI_OVRI_S.PIC

Small picture function Combined switch device state function

FPI_OVRI_M.PIC

Medium picture function for Combined switch device state function

FPI_OVRI_L.PIC

Large picture function for Combined switch device state function

FPI_BCT.VSO

Bay Configuration Tool

Help file

Functionality

FPI_OVR.HLP

Picture function installation help file Combined switch device state function

background image

218

1MRS751887-MEN

Manual Name

SYS 500

12. Combined switch

device state

Configuration Guide

12.4.9. Configuration

files

The following configuration files are used by the Combined switch device state
function. The path is /LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/INST.

Table 12.4.9-1 Combined switch device state configuration files

12.4.10.

Other text files

The following text files are used by the Combined switch device state function. The
path is /LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/USE.

Table 12.4.10-1Combined switch device state text files

Configuration file

Functionality

FPI_OVR.DAT

Contains the configuration data for Combined switch device state
function when it is created, modified or deleted by the configuration
tools.

INDEX4_F11.TXT

Selection list of LIB 510 Rev 4.0.3 MV Process picture functions for
the Installation Tool (common for all other picture functions, too.)

Text file

Functionality

PATH4_F1.TXT

Contains the path definitions for the MV Process.

background image

LIB 510

Index

Configuration Guide

Index

Page

6\PEROV

(*) SHOW_MEAS_’number’_AS_BAR

..................................................................... 101

(*) SHOW_MEAS_’number’_UNIT

........................................................................... 101

(*) SHOW_MEAS__mber’AS_BAR

........................................................................... 97

(*) SHOW_MEAS_’number’_UNIT

............................................................................ 97

(*/**) SHOW_MEAS__mber’

...................................................................................... 97

(*/**)SHOW_MEAS_'number'

................................................................................... 101

$

A symbols for the Alarm indicator

.............................................................................. 175

Active power symbol for the measurement

.........................................................105

,

106

Alarm indicator pictures

.............................................................................................. 177

Alarm limits of the measurement

................................................................................ 113

ALARMING_STATE_OF_SIGNAL’nr’

.................................................................... 174

ALARMING_STATE_OF_SIGNAL’x’

...................................................................... 171

ALARMING_STATE_OF_SIGNAL1

........................................................................ 177

AR_IN_PROGRESS_REPR

....................................................................................... 161

AR_IN_USE_REPR

.................................................................................................... 162

AR_WITH_MULTIPLE_CYCLES

............................................................................ 159

Attributes

12

,

18

,

26

,

34

,

45

,

58

,

87

,

88

,

96

,

104

,

120

,

127

,

128

,

129

,

153

,

164

,

180

,

...............................................186

,

187

,

196

,

200

,

201

,

212

,

214

AUTHORIZATION_GROUP

... 13

,

17

,

19

,

27

,

31

,

36

,

45

,

54

,

83

,

97

,

102

,

113

,

120

,

.............. 121

,

126

,

130

,

171

,

174

,

177

,

181

,

184

,

196

,

199

,

203

AUTO_MANUAL_IND_TYPE

.........................................................................121

,

125

AUTO_MANUAL_INDICATION

............................................................................. 127

Auto-reclosing tag

....................................................................................................... 153

AUXILIARY_PLUG

........................................................................................ 46

,

54

,

83

%

Bay picture function

...................................................................................................... 36

BAY_LABEL

................................................................................................... 27

,

28

,

35

BAY_LR_IN_USE

........................................................................................... 27

,

32

,

36

BAY_NAME

26

,

28

,

35

,

45

,

46

,

82

,

97

,

98

,

112

,

120

,

121

,

122

,

130

,

138

,

154

,

170

,

.............. 171

,

177

,

180

,

182

,

196

,

197

,

203

,

212

,

213

,

216

,

217

Bell symbols for the Alarm indicator

.......................................................................... 176

&

CHANNEL_NUMBER

.................................................................................... 45

,

53

,

83

Circle symbol for the measurement

............................................................................. 105

Circle symbols for the truck

.......................................................................................... 78

CMD_PARAMETER

..........................................................................................121

,

124

Command procedure

................................................................................................... 209

Command procedures

.................................................................................................. 194

COMMON_BAY_NAME

...................................................................................180

,

182

COMMUNICATION

................................................................. 181

,

184

,

196

,

199

,

203

COMPACT_INSTALLATION

........................................................ 46

,

55

,

83

,

181

,

185

Configuration files

......................... 21

,

38

,

85

,

115

,

133

,

152

,

165

,

178

,

191

,

205

,

218

Configuration of the picture functions

........................................................... 26

,

44

,

170

Configuration of the station picture function

................................................................ 19

Configuration of the switching device

.......................................................................... 82

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

Index

Configuration Guide

CONNECT_TO_OBJECT

.......................................................................................... 127

CONNECTION_AT_SELECTION

............................................................196

,

199

,

203

CONTROL_BITS

.............................................................................................45

,

52

,

83

CONTROL_DIALOG_WINDOW

.................................................... 120

,

121

,

125

,

130

CONTROL_PULSE_LENGTH

........................................................................45

,

52

,

83

CONTROL_TYPE

............................................................................................45

,

52

,

82

Current symbol for the measurement

.......................................................................... 214

Current transducer 1 for the measurement

.................................................................. 107

Current transducer 2 for the measurement

.................................................................. 108

'

DATA_ACQUISITION_UNIT

13

,

16

,

19

,

27

,

31

,

36

,

45

,

53

,

83

,

121

,

125

,

158

,

171

,

.......................................................................................... 173

,

177

DATA_ACQUISITION_UNIT_’number’

................................................................... 101

DATA_ACQUISITION_UNIT_’number’

.................................................................... 97

DATA_ACQUISITION_UNIT_1

............................................................................... 112

DATA_ACQUISITION_UNIT_2

............................................................................... 112

DATA_ACQUISITION_UNIT_3

............................................................................... 112

DATA_ACQUISITION_UNIT_4

............................................................................... 112

Default set of representations for the protection latch

................................................ 150

Default set of representations for the protection trip

.................................................. 149

DEVICE_NAME

45

,

46

,

82

,

97

,

98

,

112

,

120

,

121

,

123

,

130

,

138

,

155

,

170

,

172

,

177

,

.................................................................180

,

182

,

196

,

197

,

203

DEVICE_USE

.................................................................................................... 181

,

184

Diamond symbols for the disconnector

........................................................................ 66

DISCONNECTOR_NUMBER

...................................................................196

,

199

,

203

DTU installation

.......................................................................................................... 195

DTU picture function

.................................................................................................. 195

DTU pictures

............................................................................................................... 204

DTU_TYPE

................................................................................................196

,

199

,

203

(

EVENT_RECORDING

13

,

18

,

19

,

27

,

33

,

36

,

46

,

55

,

83

,

97

,

102

,

113

,

121

,

126

,

141

,

..................................................................................159

,

171

,

174

Examples of different configuration of transformer measurement

............................. 127

)

FOLDER_'number'_TITLE

........................................................................................ 100

FOLDER_’number_TITLE

.......................................................................................... 97

FOLDER_1_TITLE

.................................................................................................... 112

FOLDER_2_TITLE

.................................................................................................... 112

FOLDER_3_TITLE

.................................................................................................... 112

FOLDER_4_TITLE

.................................................................................................... 112

FUNCTION_BLOCK

......................................................................45

,

53

,

83

,

141

,

159

FUNCTION_BLOCK_'number'

................................................................................. 102

FUNCTION_BLOCK_’number’

.................................................................................. 97

FUNCTION_BLOCK_1

............................................................................................. 112

FUNCTION_BLOCK_2

............................................................................................. 112

FUNCTION_BLOCK_3

............................................................................................. 112

FUNCTION_BLOCK_4

............................................................................................. 112

+

HARD_WIRED

.......................................................................................................... 126

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

Index

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

HARDWIRED

.....................................................................................................120

,

130

Help text files

................................ 21

,

37

,

85

,

115

,

132

,

151

,

165

,

178

,

190

,

205

,

217

Horizontal link to the left symbols for the circuit breaker

............................................ 62

Horizontal link to the left symbols for the disconnector

............................................... 68

Horizontal link to the left symbols for the truck

.....................................................74

,

77

Horizontal link to the left symbols of contactor for the circuit breaker

........................ 65

Horizontal link to the left symbols of load breaking switch for the disconnector

........ 71

Horizontal link to the right symbol for the circuit breaker

............................................ 62

Horizontal link to the right symbol for the disconnector

.............................................. 68

Horizontal link to the right symbol for the truck

........................................................... 74

Horizontal link to the right symbols for the truck

......................................................... 76

Horizontal link to the right symbols of contactor for the circuit breaker

...................... 64

Horizontal link to the right symbols of load breaking switch for the disconnector

...... 70

,

ID

...............................................................................120

,

130

,

170

,

177

,

180

,

195

,

203

IND_DOUBLE_BINARY

................................................................................ 27

,

32

,

36

INDICATION_TYPE

....................................................................................... 45

,

51

,

82

Installation of a picture function

................................................................................... 25

Installation of picture function

..................................................................... 43

,

169

,

179

Installation of picture functions

..................................................................................... 11

Installation of the picture function

.............................................................................. 195

/

LATCH_REPRESENTATION

.................................................................................... 149

Led symbol for the Alarm indicator

............................................................................ 176

Library Representations

.............................................................................................. 149

LINK_AR_TAG_TO_

................................................................................................. 160

LINK_AR_TAG_TO_MODULE

................................................................................ 160

LINK_SIGNAL’nr’_TO_IX

................................................................................174

,

176

LINK_SIGNAL’nr’_TO_LN

..............................................................................174

,

176

LINK_SIGNAL’x’_IX

................................................................................................ 171

LINK_SIGNAL’x’_LN

............................................................................................... 171

LINK_TRIP_TAG_TO_LN_x

.................................................................................... 142

LINK_TRIP_TAG_TO_MODULE_x

......................................................................... 143

LR_REMOTELY_CONTROLLABLE

......................................... 13

,

17

,

19

,

27

,

32

,

36

0

MAX_POSIT

.......................................................................................................123

,

130

MAX_POSITION

...............................................................................................120

,

121

MEAS_'number'_DECIMALS

.................................................................................... 101

MEAS_’number_DECIMALS

...................................................................................... 97

MEAS_1_DECIMALS

............................................................................................... 112

MEAS_2_DECIMALS

............................................................................................... 112

MEAS_3_DECIMALS

............................................................................................... 112

MEAS_4_DECIMALS

............................................................................................... 112

MIN_POSIT

........................................................................................................123

,

130

MIN_POSITION

.................................................................................................120

,

121

MOTORIZED

.................................................................................. 45

,

51

,

82

,

181

,

184

1

NOMINAL VOLTAGE

............................................................................................... 123

NOMINAL_VOLTAGE

......................................................................................120

,

130

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

Index

Configuration Guide

2

Object identification (OI) -attribute

.............................................................................. 26

Object identification (OI) attribute

........................................................ 12

,

96

,

196

,

212

Object identification (OI)-attribute

............................................................................. 180

OUTPUT_STATUS

............................................................................................... 16

,

124

3

P_OBJECT_LN

13

,

14

,

15

,

19

,

27

,

29

,

35

,

45

,

47

,

48

,

82

,

97

,

99

,

112

,

120

,

121

,

123

,

...... 130

,

142

,

156

,

170

,

172

,

177

,

180

,

183

,

196

,

198

,

203

,

212

PARALLEL_INDICATION

........................................................................................ 127

Picture

......................................................................................................................... 151

Picture Function Name

................................... 12

,

19

,

26

,

35

,

44

,

82

,

96

,

112

,

212

,

217

Pictures

.......................................................................................................................... 36

Process object

.............................................................................................................. 192

Process Object Tool

................................18

,

34

,

78

,

128

,

150

,

163

,

176

,

187

,

201

,

206

Process objects

................................................................ 21

,

38

,

86

,

110

,

116

,

133

,

166

Protocol

....................................................................................................................... 137

Protocols

...................................................................................................................... 153

PULSE_COUNTER

............................................................................................ 181

,

184

5

Reactive power symbol for the measurement

............................................................. 107

REPRESENTATION

...58

,

83

,

104

,

113

,

128

,

130

,

175

,

177

,

186

,

201

,

203

,

214

,

217

Representation Tool

....................................... 18

,

34

,

58

,

104

,

128

,

146

,

174

,

200

,

214

RMU with REC 501

.................................................................................................... 180

6

Scales

.......................................................................................................................... 208

SHOW_AR_IN_USE

.................................................................................................. 159

SHOW_AR_NOT_IN_USE

....................................................................................... 159

SHOW_MEAS_1

........................................................................................................ 112

SHOW_MEAS_1_AS_BAR

...................................................................................... 112

SHOW_MEAS_1_UNIT

............................................................................................ 112

SHOW_MEAS_2

........................................................................................................ 112

SHOW_MEAS_2_AS_BAR

...................................................................................... 112

SHOW_MEAS_2_UNIT

............................................................................................ 112

SHOW_MEAS_3

........................................................................................................ 112

SHOW_MEAS_3_AS_BAR

...................................................................................... 112

SHOW_MEAS_3_UNIT

............................................................................................ 112

SHOW_MEAS_4

........................................................................................................ 112

SHOW_MEAS_4_AS_BAR

...................................................................................... 112

SHOW_MEAS_4_UNIT

............................................................................................ 112

SIGNAL’nr’_TEXT

.................................................................................................... 174

SIGNAL’x’_TEXT

...................................................................................................... 171

SIGNAL1_TEXT

........................................................................................................ 177

SPACOM

..................................................................................................................... 137

SPECIAL_IDENTIFIER_'nr'

................................................................. 14

,

28

,

123

,

172

SPECIAL_IDENTIFIER_'number'

..............................................99

,

139

,

155

,

180

,

182

SPECIAL_IDENTIFIER_’nr’

.......... 13

,

26

,

45

,

47

,

97

,

120

,

121

,

170

,

196

,

197

,

212

SPECIAL_IDENTIFIER_x

............................................................. 19

,

35

,

82

,

112

,

217

SPEF

............................................................................................................196

,

199

,

203

Square symbols for the circuit breaker

......................................................................... 60

Standard Configuration Tool

.....................................12

,

26

,

45

,

96

,

120

,

170

,

180

,

212

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

LIB 510

Index

MV Process Configuration

Configuration Guide

Star symbols for the Alarm indicator

.......................................................................... 176

Station pictures

.............................................................................................................. 20

STATION_ADDRESS

........................................................................................181

,

184

STATION_LABEL

........................................................................................... 13

,

14

,

19

STATION_LR_IN_USE

................................................................................... 13

,

17

,

19

STATION_LR_POLARITY

................................................................................181

,

184

STATION_LR_SWITCH

....................................................................................181

,

184

STATION_NAME

13

,

19

,

26

,

27

,

35

,

45

,

46

,

82

,

97

,

98

,

112

,

120

,

121

,

122

,

130

,

138

,

.............. 154

,

170

,

171

,

177

,

180

,

181

,

196

,

197

,

203

,

212

,

217

STATION_NUMBER

................................................................................. 196

,

199

,

203

STATION_NUMBER_SPEF

..................................................................... 196

,

199

,

203

STATION_TYPE

13

,

15

,

19

,

27

,

30

,

35

,

45

,

51

,

82

,

97

,

100

,

112

,

120

,

121

,

124

,

130

,

.............. 140

,

157

,

171

,

173

,

177

,

181

,

184

,

196

,

198

,

203

,

212

Structure of the alarm indicator

................................................................................... 177

SWITCH_SECTION

....................................................................... 45

,

50

,

82

,

181

,

183

Switching device pictures

.............................................................................................. 83

SWITCHING_DEVICE_PURPOSE

.............................................. 45

,

49

,

82

,

181

,

183

SWITCHING_DEVICE_TYPE

...................................................... 45

,

48

,

82

,

180

,

183

SYMBOL_WITH_BUTTON

.46

,

54

,

83

,

97

,

102

,

113

,

120

,

121

,

126

,

130

,

171

,

174

,

..........................................................177

,

181

,

184

,

196

,

199

,

203

7

TAP_POSITION_INDICATION

................................................................................ 127

TELEPHONE_NUMBER

......................................................... 181

,

184

,

196

,

199

,

203

Text Translation Tool compatible text files

...20

,

37

,

84

,

115

,

132

,

151

,

165

,

178

,

190

,

.................................................................................................. 205

TOPO_OBJECT COLOR3_NUMBER

...................................................................... 126

TOPO_OBJECT_COLOR_NR

................................................................................... 130

TOPO_OBJECT_COLOR1_NUMBER

............................................120

,

121

,

122

,

126

TOPO_OBJECT_COLOR2_NUMBER

.................................................... 121

,

122

,

126

TOPO_OBJECT_COLOR3_NUMBER

.............................................................121

,

122

TOPO_OBJECT1_COLOR_NR

................................................................................. 130

TOPO_OBJECT2_COLOR_NR

................................................................................. 130

Transformer measurement

........................................................................................... 127

Transformer pictures

.................................................................................................... 131

TRANSFORMER_TYPE

..................................................................120

,

121

,

126

,

130

TRIP_REPRESENTATION

........................................................................................ 146

TYPE_MEAS_’number’

.............................................................................................. 100

TYPE_MEAS_’number’

............................................................................................... 97

TYPE_MEAS_1

.......................................................................................................... 112

TYPE_MEAS_2

.......................................................................................................... 112

TYPE_MEAS_3

.......................................................................................................... 112

TYPE_MEAS_4

.......................................................................................................... 112

TYPE_OF_SIGNAL’nr’

.....................................................................................174

,

176

TYPE_OF_SIGNAL’number’

..................................................................................... 169

TYPE_OF_SIGNAL’x’

............................................................................................... 171

TYPE_OF_SIGNAL1

................................................................................................. 177

Typical installation for a visible station picture function

.............................................. 12

8

U_BINARY_INPUT_TEXTS

.............................................................................181

,

185

U_EXTRA_INPUT_TEXTS

...............................................................................196

,

199

U_INTERLOCKING

......................................................46

,

56

,

83

,

181

,

185

,

196

,

200

U_OTHER_OBJECTS

................................................. 27

,

33

,

46

,

57

,

83

,

97

,

103

,

113

background image

1MRS751887-MEN

MV Process Configuration

LIB 510

Index

Configuration Guide

9

Vertical link downwards symbol for the circuit breaker

............................................... 63

Vertical link downwards symbol for the disconnector

.................................................. 69

Vertical link downwards symbol for the truck

........................................................ 72

,

75

Vertical link downwards symbols of contactor for the circuit breaker

......................... 66

Vertical link downwards symbols of load breaking switch for the disconnector

.......... 72

Vertical link upwards symbol for the circuit breaker

.................................................... 61

Vertical link upwards symbol for the disconnector

....................................................... 67

Vertical link upwards symbol for the truck

................................................................... 73

Vertical link upwards symbols for the truck

................................................................. 76

Vertical link upwards symbols of contactor for the circuit breaker

.............................. 64

Vertical link upwards symbols of load breaking switch for the disconnector

.............. 70

Voltage transducer 1 for the measurement

.................................................................. 105

VOLTAGE_INDICATION

......................................................................................... 127


Document Outline


Wyszukiwarka

Podobne podstrony:
LIB 510 MV Process Operator s Manual
LIB 510 Configuration Manual
LIB 510 Operator s Manual
LIB 500 Configuration Manual
W4 Proces wytwórczy oprogramowania
WEWNĘTRZNE PROCESY RZEŹBIĄCE ZIEMIE
Proces tworzenia oprogramowania
Proces pielęgnowania Dokumentacja procesu
19 Mikroinżynieria przestrzenna procesy technologiczne,
4 socjalizacja jako podstawowy proces spoeczny
modelowanie procesˇw transportowych
Proces wdrazania i monitoringu strategii rozwoju
Wykorzystanie modelu procesow w projektowaniu systemow informatycznych

więcej podobnych podstron